USER GUIDE

PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Version 5.x

www.fast-soft.com
© 2020 FasTrak SoftWorks, Inc.
262.238.8088
Throughout this document, PLC WorkShop for Modicon – 32 Bit will be referred to as PLC
WorkShop.

PLC WorkShop is a trademark of FasTrak SoftWorks, Inc.

Modicon is a trademark of Schneider Electric, Inc.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
 LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
FasTrak SoftWorks, Inc.

Licensor is the owner of all rights, including the copyright, in and to that certain set of executable computer programs identified
in the Registration Form, including design and structure thereof (the "Software"), together with all manuals and other written or
printed technical material provided with the Software to explain its operation and to aid in its use (the "Documentation").
Licensee wishes to have the right to use the Software, and Licensor is willing to grant such a right to Licensee on the terms and
conditions set forth herein.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. In consideration of Licensee's payment of the license fee referred to below and Licensee's agreement
to abide by the terms and conditions stated herein, FasTrak SoftWorks, Inc. (referred to as "Licensor") grants Licensee a
nonexclusive right to use and display one (1) copy of the Software with respect to one microcomputer at a time for so long as
Licensee complies with the terms hereof. Licensor retains the right to terminate this Agreement and Licensee's rights at any time,
by written notice to Licensee, in the event Licensee violates any of the provisions hereof.
Licensor reserves all rights in and to the Software and Documentation not expressly granted to Licensee herein. Licensee agrees
to pay Licensor the license fee specified by Licensor as of the date hereof, payable in full upon deliver of a copy of the Software
and Documentation to Licensee. Licensee acknowledges that the license fee payable hereunder is consideration solely for the right
to use the Software, and payment thereof will not entitle Licensee to support, assistance, training, maintenance or other services,
or the enhancements or modifications to the Software which may subsequently be developed by Licensor, except as otherwise
expressly provided in this Agreement.
2. LICENSEE'S AGREEMENTS. Licensee agrees to comply with the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement,
specifically including but not limited to the following:
(a) Licensee will take all reasonable steps to protect the Software from theft or use contrary to the terms of this
Agreement.
(b) Licensee agrees to pay Licensor additional license fees as specified by Licensor if and to the extent Licensee intends
to use or does use the Software in any way beyond the scope of this Agreement.
(c) Licensee agrees not to modify the Software and not to disassemble, decompile, or otherwise reverse engineer of the
Software.
(d) Licensee agrees to either destroy or return the original and all existing copies of the Software to Licensor within five (5)
days after receiving notice of Licensor's termination of this Agreement.
(e) Licensee agrees not to disclose the Software or Documentation or any part thereof or any information relating thereto
to any other party, it being understood that the same contains and/or represents confidential information which is
proprietary to Licensor.
3. OWNERSHIP OF SOFTWARE. Licensee shall be deemed to own only the magnetic or other physical media on which the
copy of the Software provided to Licensee is originally or subsequently recorded or fixed, as well as any boards, key-locks, or
cables provided for use with the Software, but an express condition of this Agreement is that Licensor shall at all times retain
ownership of the Software recorded on the original diskette copy and all subsequent copies of the Software, regardless of the form
or media in or on which the original or other copies may initially or subsequently exist. This Agreement does not constitute a
sale of any copy of the Software to Licensee.
4. POSSESSION AND COPYING. Licensee agrees that the Software will only be displayed or read into or used on one (1)
computer at a time, at the location designated for notices to Licensee under paragraph 13, below. Licensee may change the
computer on which Licensee uses the Software to another computer at such location. Licensee agrees not to make copies of the
Software other than for its own use, all of which copies shall be kept in the possession or direct control of Licensee. Licensee
agrees to place a label on the outside of all copies showing the program name, version number, if applicable, and Licensor's
copyright and trademark notices in the same form as they appear on the original licensed copy.
5. TRANSFER OR REPRODUCTION. Licensee is not licensed to copy, rent, lease, transfer, network, reproduce, display or
otherwise distribute the Software except as specifically provided in this Agreement. Licensee understands that unauthorized
reproduction of copies of the Software and/or unauthorized transfer of any copy of the Software is a violation of law and will
subject Licensee to suit for damages, injunctive relief and attorney's fees. Licensee further understands that it is responsible for the
acts of its agents and employees. Licensee may not transfer any copy of the Software to another person or entity, on either a
permanent or temporary basis, unless Licensee obtains the prior written approval of Licensor which will ordinarily be subject to
payment of Licensor's then current license transfer fee. Such approval will not unreasonably be withheld if Licensee advises
Licensor in writing of the name and address of the proposed transferee, such transferee is suitable in Licensor's sole judgement,
and such transferee agrees in writing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If the transfer is approved,
Licensee must deliver all copies of the Software, including the original copy to the transferee.
6. ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES. Licensor may from time to time release updates of the Software incorporating
changes intended to improve the operation and/or reliability of the Software. Such updates will be provided to Licensee at no
charge (except shipping charges and media costs) for a period of twelve (12) months from the date hereof, and Licensee agrees to
install all updates designated by Licensor as mandatory. Licensor may also offer enhanced versions of the Software from time to
time incorporating changes intended to provide new or enhanced features and/or capabilities, at such license fees as Licensor may
from time to time establish.
7. LIMITED WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY. LICENSOR HAS NO CONTROL OVER THE
CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH LICENSEE USES THE SOFTWARE. THEREFORE, LICENSOR CANNOT AND
DOES NOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS THAT MAY BE OBTAINED BY ITS USE. HOWEVER,
LICENSOR PROVIDES THE FOLLOWING LIMITED WARRANTY:
Licensor warrants, for a period of twelve (12) months only, that the Software shall be free from significant programming errors.
Licensor further warrants that it has full power and authority to grant the rights granted by this Agreement with respect to the
Software and that the use by Licensee of the Software and Documentation will not infringe the rights of others. In the event
Licensee believes that it has discovered one or more significant programming errors, Licensee shall immediately notify Licensor of
such fact in writing. If such notice is received by Licensor within twelve (12) months from the date hereof, Licensor shall, within
a reasonable time, subject to the demands of Licensor's other customers and subject to delays beyond Licensor's control (including
but not limited to labor trouble, illness, delays in shipment of materials, and bad weather), at Licensor's expense, correct the
programming errors. In the event Licensor is unable to correct the programming error within a reasonable time, Licensee may
elect to terminate this Agreement and receive a refund of the licensee fee paid hereunder. For purposes hereof, a programming
error is "significant" only if, as a result thereof, the software does not substantially perform the functions described in the
Documentation. Licensor does not warrant that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free. EXCEPT
FOR THE ABOVE EXPRESS WARRANTY, LICENSOR MAKES AND LICENSEE RECEIVES NO WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AND LICENSOR SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE REMEDY PROVIDED HEREIN IS EXCLUSIVE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL LICENSOR BE
RESPONSIBLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES OR LOST
PROFITS. LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE LICENSE FEE HEREUNDER IS NOT ADEQUATE FOR
LICENSOR TO ASSUME OBLIGATIONS TO LICENSEE GREATER THAN THE EXPRESS REMEDY PROVIDED
ABOVE.
8. GOVERNING LAW. The validity and performance of this Agreement shall be governed by Wisconsin law, except as to
copyright and trademark matters which are governed by United States laws and international treaties. This Agreement is deemed
entered into in Wisconsin. All lawsuits arising out of this Agreement shall be brought in a court of general jurisdiction in
Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Licensor shall be entitled to recover its costs and expenses (including attorney's fees) incurred in enforcing
its rights under this Agreement.
9. WAIVER. The failure of Licensor to enforce any of the provisions hereof shall not be construed to be a waiver of the right to
enforce such provisions at a later time or to enforce any of the other provisions hereof.
10. EFFECT OF TERMINATION. The expiration or termination of this Agreement shall not affect the obligations of Licensee
which by their character are of continuing nature.
11. INTEGRATION. This Agreement sets forth the entire understanding and agreement of the parties shall be bound by any
conditions, definitions, warranties or representations with respect to any of the terms or conditions hereof other than as expressly
provided in this Agreement. This Agreement may only be modified by a writing signed by the party to be charged.
12. BINDING EFFECT. This Agreement shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of the parties hereto and their
respective successors and assigns, subject to the limitations on the transfer of Licensee's rights to the Software provided in
paragraph 5, above.
13. NOTICES. All notices shall be in writing and shall be hand delivered or sent by U.S. mail, first class, postage prepaid, if to
Licensor at its address first above written, and to Licensee at the address indicated in the Registration Form. A party may change
its address for notices at any time by notice to the other party in the manner provided herein, but each party may have only one
address for notices at a time.
14. REGISTRATION FORM. The Registration Form is a part of this Agreement and is incorporated herein by reference. This
Agreement will not take effect, and Licensee will have no rights whatsoever with respect of the Software, unless and until the
Registration Form is duly executed and returned to the Licensor and is accepted by Licensor.
 Table of Contents
1 - INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 1
Manual Design .............................................................................................................................................. 1
Customer Support ........................................................................................................................................ 1
What is PLC WorkShop? ............................................................................................................................ 2
Package Contents ......................................................................................................................................... 2
Hardware Requirements ............................................................................................................................. 2
Software Requirements ............................................................................................................................... 3
Parallel Port Compatibility.......................................................................................................................... 3
2 - INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................. 5
Installing PLC Workshop ........................................................................................................................... 5
Installing the FasTrak-KEY ....................................................................................................................... 5
Connecting the Communications Cable................................................................................................... 7
3 - PLC WORKSHOP BASICS.................................................................................................11
Before You Begin .......................................................................................................................................11
The Landscape: PLC WorkShop Window .............................................................................................12
Working with Logic Programs .................................................................................................................17
Online Access Modes ................................................................................................................................28
Saving Logic Programs ..............................................................................................................................30
Printing Logic Programs ...........................................................................................................................34
Editing Features .........................................................................................................................................42
Using WorkShop with FTVersionTrak ..................................................................................................61
4 - PLC WORKSHOP SETUP ................................................................................................ 89
Overview .....................................................................................................................................................89
Program Setup ............................................................................................................................................89
Application Setup .......................................................................................................................................90
Communications Setup .............................................................................................................................91
Fast PLC Setup ...........................................................................................................................................97
File Associated Communications ............................................................................................................97
Printer Setup ...............................................................................................................................................99
Page Setup ................................................................................................................................................ 100
5 - FASTRAK AUTHENTICATION AND NT SECURITY ...............................................103
Overview ................................................................................................................................................... 103
Choosing a Security Type ...................................................................................................................... 103

v
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

FasTrak Authentication Security ........................................................................................................... 105

FasTrak Authentication Security Configuration Dialog ................................................................... 105
FasTrak Authentication Security Audit Setup .................................................................................... 105
Password Security Setup ........................................................................................................................ 106
User Security Setup ................................................................................................................................. 111
NT Authentication Security ................................................................................................................... 113
Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 113
Installing the Security Server ................................................................................................................. 113
Workgroups and Domains .................................................................................................................... 115
Adding Users and Groups to the Operating System......................................................................... 115
Configuring DCOM for NT Authentication Security ...................................................................... 118
Security Configurator ............................................................................................................................. 122
Security Audits ......................................................................................................................................... 125
Event Viewer ........................................................................................................................................... 126
6 - PLC CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................129
Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 129
PLC Type Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 129
PLC Configuration.................................................................................................................................. 130
Configuring the Modicon 984 Family Processors ............................................................................. 133
PLC Status ................................................................................................................................................ 165
7 - PROGRAMMING .............................................................................................................197
Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 197
Online versus Offline Programming.................................................................................................... 197
Using the Logic Editor ........................................................................................................................... 198
Using the ASCII Message Editor ......................................................................................................... 210
Finding Logic ........................................................................................................................................... 213
Trace Coil and Untrace Coil .................................................................................................................. 216
Using the Data Window......................................................................................................................... 219
Editing Logic ........................................................................................................................................... 221
Disabling/Enabling Discrete I/O ........................................................................................................ 226
DX Zoom................................................................................................................................................. 227
Using the Cross Reference Feature ...................................................................................................... 233
Compare ................................................................................................................................................... 234
Using the Diagnostic Features .............................................................................................................. 236
Clearing Memory ..................................................................................................................................... 240

vi
 Introduction

8 - DOCUMENTATION .......................................................................................................241
Using the Segment and Network Headers Editor ............................................................................. 241
Using the Documentation Window ..................................................................................................... 243
Documenting in Ladder ......................................................................................................................... 250
Edit Title Page (Print Only) .................................................................................................................. 252
9 - SYMBOLS ........................................................................................................................ 253
Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 253
Using Symbols and Symbol Libraries in WorkShop ......................................................................... 253
Programming with Symbols .................................................................................................................. 255
Documenting with Symbols .................................................................................................................. 256
The Symbols Library .............................................................................................................................. 258
10 - RELAYS, SHORTS, AND COILS ................................................................................. 263
Relay Instructions.................................................................................................................................... 263
Vertical Branches and Horizontal Shorts ............................................................................................ 266
Coils ........................................................................................................................................................... 267
Duplicate Coils ........................................................................................................................................ 270
NOBIT ..................................................................................................................................................... 271
NCBT........................................................................................................................................................ 272
NBIT ......................................................................................................................................................... 272
SBIT .......................................................................................................................................................... 273
RBIT.......................................................................................................................................................... 274
11 - TIMERS AND COUNTERS .......................................................................................... 275
Timers ....................................................................................................................................................... 275
Up Counters ............................................................................................................................................. 277
Down Counters ....................................................................................................................................... 279
12 - ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS .................................................................................281
Arithmetic Functions .............................................................................................................................. 281
Addition Function................................................................................................................................... 281
Subtraction Functions ............................................................................................................................ 284
Multiplication Function.......................................................................................................................... 287
Division Function (DIV) ....................................................................................................................... 289
13 - TRANSFER AND MOVE INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................... 293
Data Transfer Functions ........................................................................................................................ 293
IBKR ......................................................................................................................................................... 304
IBKW ........................................................................................................................................................ 305

vii
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

FIFO Move Operations ......................................................................................................................... 309

Logical Data Transfer Functions .......................................................................................................... 312
14 - LOGIC BIT INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................................................... 323
Logical Compare (CMPR) ..................................................................................................................... 323
Logical Bit Modify (MBIT).................................................................................................................... 326
Logical Bit Sense (SENS)....................................................................................................................... 328
Logical Bit Rotate (BROT) .................................................................................................................... 330
15 - STATUS INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................... 333
Monitoring System Status ...................................................................................................................... 333
16 - SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................................... 379
DISA (Disabled Monitor System) ........................................................................................................ 379
HIST (Discrete Logic Analyzer/Histogram) ...................................................................................... 380
SKIP .......................................................................................................................................................... 381
READ (ASCII Read Function)............................................................................................................. 383
WRIT (ASCII Write Function) ............................................................................................................. 385
XMRD (Extended Memory Read) ....................................................................................................... 388
XMWT (Write Extended Memory)...................................................................................................... 389
XMIT (Transmit) .................................................................................................................................... 392
17 - SOFTWARE LOADABLE MODULES ......................................................................... 403
General Description ............................................................................................................................... 403
CALL ........................................................................................................................................................ 404
EARS......................................................................................................................................................... 406
EUCA ....................................................................................................................................................... 407
FN10 ......................................................................................................................................................... 408
HLTH (984 Health Status) .................................................................................................................... 410
HSBY ........................................................................................................................................................ 411
MAP3 ........................................................................................................................................................ 412
MBUS........................................................................................................................................................ 413
MRTM (Multi-Register Transfer Module) .......................................................................................... 414
PEER ........................................................................................................................................................ 415
PID ............................................................................................................................................................ 416
18 - ENHANCED EXECUTIVE CARTRIDGE INSTRUCTIONS ....................................417
BLKT (Block-to-Table Move) .............................................................................................................. 418
CKSM (CHECKSUM)........................................................................................................................... 419
EMTH (Extended Math) ....................................................................................................................... 422

viii
 Introduction

MSTR ........................................................................................................................................................ 425

PID2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 427
TBLK (Table-to-Block Move) .............................................................................................................. 428
19 - SUBROUTINES ..............................................................................................................431
JSR (Jump To Subroutine) ..................................................................................................................... 431
LAB (Label Subroutine) ......................................................................................................................... 433
RET (Return From Subroutine) ........................................................................................................... 434
20 - MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................ 435
Instructions for the 351/455 Processors ............................................................................................ 435
16-Bit Signed and Unsigned Math Functions ..................................................................................... 443
PCFL ......................................................................................................................................................... 451
DIOH ....................................................................................................................................................... 455
Instructions for the Micro PLCs .......................................................................................................... 456
21 - FTLOGGER/FTTREND .............................................................................................. 485
FTLogger Overview ............................................................................................................................... 485
FTTrend Overview ................................................................................................................................. 485
22 - AUDITING .................................................................................................................... 487
Activity Audit ........................................................................................................................................... 487
INDEX .................................................................................................................................. 489

ix
1 - Introduction
Manual Design
Welcome to PLC WorkShop, a powerful Windows-based tool in programming programmable logic
controllers (PLCs). Whether you are a novice or an experienced programmer, this manual has been
constructed to help you begin using PLC WorkShop quickly. We at FasTrak SoftWorks, Inc. have
tried to assume little about you, the user, except that when you have a question regarding this
software you'll want it answered. We hope this manual and the on-line help will answer those
questions.
Chapter topics use names that will point you quickly to the specific information you want to find.
Chapters are titled as follows:
Chapter Name Description
1 - Introduction Outlines manual contents, Customer Support numbers, and
necessary hardware and software to run PLC WorkShop.

2 - Installation Guides you through the installation procedures for the

software and security.
3 - PLC WorkShop Basics Describes PLC WorkShop features and helps you move
through the Windows environment.
4 - PLC WorkShop Setup Provides specific guidelines in setting up and customizing
the software.
5 - FasTrak Authentication and Provides instructions for establishing and using a Password
NT Security Security Mode.
6 - PLC Configuration and Provides directions for configuring your processor to work
Setup with PLC WorkShop.
7 - Programming Gives you solid understanding of PLC WorkShop’s easy to
use programming features.
8 - Documentation Shows you how to add symbols, labels and comments to
your logic programs.
9 - Symbols Instructions for initializing and using graphical symbols for
programming and documentation.
10-20 - Instructions Gives detailed information about the PLC instructions
including programming examples.
21 - FTLogger/FTTrend Shows you how to program the data Logger and Trender.
22 - Auditing Outlines options for tracking program and setting changes.

Customer Support
It’s our goal that customers become proficient users of our software as quickly and easily as
possible. With that in mind, FasTrak makes available a number of support options. Commonly
asked questions can usually be answered with this manual, online help, or by visiting our website at
www.fast-soft.com. Our website features easy-to-access FAQs, technical resources, and system
documentation.
For real-time how-to help and advanced troubleshooting, contact FasTrak’s customer support
center and speak directly with a technical support representative. Our trained experts offer
convenient, accurate and prompt assistance.

1
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Customer Support 262.238.8088

Customer Support Fax 262.238.8080
Email [email protected]
Website www.fast-soft.com

You may also forward questions, comments, and suggestions to:

FasTrak SoftWorks, Inc.
P.O. Box 240065
Milwaukee, WI 53224

What is PLC WorkShop?

PLC WorkShop is one of the world’s most powerful and exciting programmable logic controller
(PLC) programming software. PLC WorkShop is the universal solution offering features that will
save you time and money, such as:
Symbolic Programming
Cut, Copy & Paste
Instruction Toolbar and Mnemonics
Multiple windows view and edit
Flexible program setup
Write, read, and force addresses from the Data Window
Multiple documentation options
Generous Online Help

Package Contents
Your PLC WorkShop package includes the items listed below. If any of these items are missing or
damaged, please contact FasTrak SoftWorks Customer Service.
One (1) PLC WorkShop CD
PLC WorkShop User’s Guide (this manual)
FasTrak-KEY to attach to your computer’s parallel or USB port if applicable

Hardware Requirements
To install PLC WorkShop on your computer you need the following hardware.
A personal computer with an Intel Pentium 100 processor or higher
32 MB or more of RAM
An 800 X 600 VGA monitor with at least 256 colors
100 MB free disk space on your hard drive
A mouse is recommended, but not required
PLC WorkShop may not function properly on systems that are not 100% Intel compatible. Certain
other hardware components and peripherals can create incompatibility problems.

2
 Introduction

Software Requirements
You also need the following software loaded on your computer before you install PLC WorkShop.
Windows 95, 98, NT, 2000, XP, or Vista

Parallel Port Compatibility

Connecting the FasTrak-KEY to your computer’s parallel or USB port is required to use PLC
WorkShop. Procedures for installing the FasTrak-KEY and PLC WorkShop are outlined in the
next chapter. If your parallel port is not 100% IBM compatible, you may experience problems with
the FasTrak-KEY, which will prevent PLC WorkShop from functioning properly.
In most cases, you can correct the parallel interface incompatibilities by replacing the parallel port
with a 100% IBM compatible port or by adding a second printer adapter card.
NOTE: FasTrak SoftWorks is not responsible for problems that result from using an
incompatible parallel interface.

3
2 - Installation
Installing PLC Workshop
Before you begin installation, review the System Requirements section in the Introduction chapter.
To install PLC Workshop, turn on the computer on and start Windows. A user name and password
may be required to log in to a computer network. If unsure, contact your company’s System
Administrator or IT representative. Follow these steps to install the software:
1. Insert the PLC Workshop CD in your computer’s CD-ROM drive.
2. The CD should start automatically. If not, click the Windows Start button. Then click
Run, and type x:\setup.exe, where x is the letter for the CD-ROM drive.
3. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
4. After making your selection, click Next. Installation begins. A message will appear
telling you that the PLC Workshop Installation Utility is loading.

Installing the FasTrak-KEY

What is the FasTrak-KEY?

The WorkShop software is copy-protected with a device called the FasTrak-KEY, which is included
in your shipment. The FasTrak-KEY will be used for one of two purposes, depending on your
licensing agreement with FasTrak SoftWorks, Inc:
ƒ Single-user keyed license - Under this agreement, each FasTrak-KEY represents one
single-user license. The FasTrak-KEY must be attached to your computer before you
launch WorkShop. Otherwise, if a FasTrak-KEY is not detected, WorkShop will run in
Demo mode with limited functionality.
ƒ Multi-user key on install only site license - Under this agreement, one FasTrak-KEY is
issued for your company. This key allows a certain number of installations of WorkShop
based on your site license agreement. The FasTrak-KEY must be attached to your
computer before you can install WorkShop, but can be removed once WorkShop is
installed.
To attach the FasTrak-KEY to your computer, connect the key to a parallel port (LPT1-LPT3) or
USB port on your computer, following the steps below. The FasTrak-KEY will not interfere with
normal port data transmissions, nor will it prevent you from creating backup copies of the software.
NOTE: Installation of the FasTrak-KEY must be completed before you run PLC WorkShop.
If a FasTrak-KEY is not detected, PLC WorkShop will run in Demo mode with limited
functionality.

5
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Connecting the FasTrak-KEY

Follow the steps below to install the FasTrak-KEY.
1. Determine which parallel or USB port to connect the FasTrak-KEY to.
2. Disconnect other security devices or cables attached to that port.
3. Connect the FasTrak-KEY to the port.
4. Attached other cables to the FasTrak-KEY, if necessary. If the device attached to the
FasTrak-KEY is a parallel printer, make sure the printer is turned on before starting PLC
WorkShop.
NOTE: The FasTrak-KEY must be the first device attached to the parallel port. Other devices
or cables can subsequently be attached to the FasTrak-KEY.

Troubleshooting the FasTrak-KEY

Following is an error message associated with the FasTrak-KEY, possible causes, and solutions.

Message

Possible Causes
PLC WorkShop was started without the FasTrak-KEY attached to the parallel port.
A parallel port driver may be missing.
If running Windows NT, the NT driver may not be loaded.

Solution
Check to see that:
The FasTrak-KEY is connected to a parallel or USB port.
The FasTrak-KEY is the first device attached to the computer.
Any parallel printers attached to a parallel port are turned on.
If the above has been confirmed, the FT-Key Driver may need to be reinstalled. Visit our
website at www.fast-soft.com to download a new FT-Key Driver.

6
 2 - Installation

Connecting the Communications Cable

The communications cable connects a serial port of the computer to the PLC. This enables
programs and data to be transferred between the computer and the PLC. This cable has a 25-pin
connector on the computer end and either a 9- or 25-pin connector on the PLC end.
The pin-outs for six possible communications cables are shown below.

9-Pin PLC Port to 25-Pin Serial Port

9-Pin PLC Port to 9-Pin Serial Port

7
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

25-Pin PLC Port to 25-Pin Serial Port

25-Pin PLC Port to 9-Pin Serial Port

8
 2 - Installation

RJ45 PLC Port to 9-Pin Serial Port

24-Pin PLC Port to 25-Pin Serial Port

PLC Computer
24-Pin Male 25-Pin Female
C ——— 1
J ——— 2
K——— 3
L ——— 6
P ——— 7
Z — — — 20
G ——— 4
M ——— 5

9
3 - PLC WorkShop Basics
Before You Begin
This chapter will get you started using PLC WorkShop by pointing out software features and
outlining an approach to programming. The basics are covered as well, such as:
ƒ Navigating the PLC WorkShop Window Landscape
ƒ Working with Logic Programs
ƒ Understanding Online Access Modes
ƒ Saving Logic Programs
ƒ Printing Logic Programs
ƒ Editing Logic Programs
ƒ Merging Logic Programs
ƒ Importing/Exporting Logic Programs

Starting PLC WorkShop

After installing PLC WorkShop, launch PLC WorkShop by doing one of the following actions:
Double-click on the PLC WorkShop icon
From the Start menu, select Programs/FasTrak SoftWorks/PLC WorkShop - 32 For
Modicon.
While PLC WorkShop loads the PLC WorkShop copyright screen will display. If PLC WorkShop
does not detect a FasTrak-KEY, the following message appears.

If this occurs, check to see that the FasTrak-KEY is:

Connected to a parallel or USB port
If connected to a parallel port, connected before printers or other devices
See Connecting the FasTrak-KEY in Chapter 2 - Installation.
After checking the key’s installation, try to load PLC WorkShop from the icon. If PLC WorkShop
continues to not detect the FasTrak-KEY, please call FasTrak’s Customer Support at 262.238.8088
immediately.

11
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

When PLC WorkShop has loaded completely, the PLC WorkShop Window, as described and
defined in the next section, will display.

The Landscape: PLC WorkShop Window

The PLC WorkShop window is the starting point for all work. The key features of the window are
designated with arrows on the sample illustrated below. Definitions of each feature are next,
followed by more detailed information.

Window Description
The key features of the PLC WorkShop window are defined below. More detailed descriptions
follow.
Window
Function
Feature
Displays the name of the application. Buttons in the upper right corners
Title Bar
change the window’s size and position.
Main Toolbar Use to quickly access frequently used menu options.
Menu Bar Use to select PLC WorkShop functions
FTVersionTrak
Use to perform version control operations using FTVersionTrak.
Toolbar
Instruction Bar Use to add instructions, new rows and new networks to a logic program.
Status Line Displays information about the operation in progress.
Program Demonstrates that you can display and edit multiple logic programs at the
Windows same time, limited only by the size of your computer’s memory.

12
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Title Bar
The Title Bar spans the top of the PLC WorkShop window.

Use the Title Bar for three purposes:

ƒ To identify the application being used. In the example above, it’s PLC WorkShop.
ƒ To move the window. A window or dialog box can be moved by clicking on the title bar
with the mouse pointer, holding down the left mouse button and dragging to the desired
location.
ƒ To change the size or position of the window. The following buttons appear on the right
side of the title bar:

Button Title Location Function

Minimize Left box Click the dash button to
reduce window to an icon.

Maximize/Restore Down Middle box Click the window button to

enlarge the window when
minimized, or shrink the
window when maximized.
Close Right box Click to exit WorkShop.

Menu Bar
The menu bar, located just below the title bar, identifies the names of the available PLC WorkShop
functions. To display the menu options for each function, click on the function name. The menu
options displayed may change depending upon the operation in progress.
For example, the Menu Bar illustrated below appears when you open PLC WorkShop.

Main Toolbar
The Main Toolbar, just below the Menu Bar on the PLC WorkShop window, displays a row of
buttons. Each button represents an option you’re likely to use frequently. Select the option by
clicking on its button, saving you the steps of selecting several options from a series of menus.
Notice that when you click on the button, its purpose appears on the Status Line at the bottom of
the window.
The Menu Bar can be turned off and on by:
1. Selecting Toolbars from the View menu.

13
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

2. Then select or deselect the Main Toolbar.

Click To
Fast PLC Connection. See Connecting to a PLC

Create a new program. See Creating New Logic Programs

Open an existing program. See Opening Logic Programs

Save the active program. See Saving Logic Programs

Cut the highlighted section to the clipboard. See Editing

Logic Programs
Copy the highlighted section to the clipboard. See Editing
Logic Programs
Paste a section from the clipboard. See Editing Logic
Programs
Find a network, address, or symbol. See Finding Logic

Find the next occurrence of the found address, or symbol.

See Finding Logic
Find the previous occurrence of the found address, or
symbol. See Finding Logic
Display the Logic Editor Window.

Display the Data Window.

Display the Cross Reference.

Display the Documentation Window.

Add a new row to a program.

Enter and validate the active program.

Launch FTLogger. See FTLogger Overview

Launch FTTrend. See FTTrend Overview

Insert New Network.

Append New Network.

Zoom in Logic.

14
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Zoom out Logic.

Puts the PLC in to Run Mode.

Stops the PLC (takes the PLC out of run mode).

Instruction Bar
The instruction bar defaults to appear at the top of PLC WorkShop window, just below the menu
bar. The instruction bar and menu bar are both dockable.
Instructions are divided into groups. The groups appear on the top level the instructions for that
group are on the lower level. To display the instructions for a group, press the group button. For
example, to display the math instructions, press the Math group button. The Math group button
remains selected until another group button is pressed.
The Instruction Bar can be turned off and on by:
1. Selecting Toolbars from the View menu.
2. Then select or deselect the Instruction Bar you wish to see.

To Insert an Instruction Bar Item in a Program

1. Click the desired instruction group button on the upper half of the Instruction Bar.
Instructions for that group will appear on the lower half of the bar.
2. Click the button showing the item you want to insert in the program. The item attaches to
the pointer when you move to the ladder editing area.
3. Move the pointer to the item insertion point on the ladder editing area and click the left
mouse button. The instruction is dropped into place.
4. Repeat step 3 each time you want to add the same item.
5. Click on the arrow button in the middle of the Instruction Bar to return the pointer to an
arrow.

Multiple Program Windows

PLC WorkShop gives you the ability to display more than one logic program window at a time. You
can open as many logic program windows as your computer’s memory permits.
For example, you may wish to copy part of a logic program to another program. This will save you
programming time by not having to retype similar logic statements for each program. To copy a
part of one logic program to another, use the following procedure:
1. Open both programs.
2. Arrange the logic program windows by selecting Tile or Cascade from the Window
menu.
3. Highlight the data you want to copy to the other program by ‘clicking the mouse and
dragging across the data.
4. Click Copy from the toolbar or from the Edit menu.
5. Move the pointer to the place you want to insert the data in the other program. Click Paste
from the toolbar or from the Edit menu.

15
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Customizing Window Size and Position

By default, as WorkShop Logic, Documentation, Data, and Cross Reference (client) Windows are
opened, each Window slightly overlays the previously opened Window (cascades). Once opened,
these Windows may be resized and moved as desired.
When individual client Windows are closed, or when WorkShop is terminated, the position and size
settings of these Windows are saved and restored when the Windows are subsequently reopened.
If the WorkShop Window is resized or monitor resolution changed, the positions of the client
Windows relative to WorkShop’s client area are adjusted, maintaining the proportions of the client
Windows to the client area.
NOTE: Window position and size restoration occurs at the application level and not the
program level. For example, the Documentation Window of Program A is restored to
the same position as the Documentation Window of Program B even when both
programs are open at the same time.

Exceptions:
If multiple client Windows of the same type are open for the same program, only the first Window
of a given type is restored. Any additional Windows of the same type will cascade upon opening.
If multiple client Windows of the same type are open when WorkShop terminates, position and size
settings are not restored.
Windows are always restored to their normal state. Minimized and maximized states are not
retained when Windows are closed.

Floating Documentation Window

The Floating Documentation Window shows documentation for the address on which the
parameter cursor is located. As the cursor moves, the information in the window changes.
The window can be configured to show either the description only, or the tag, description, and
comment. To configure the window, or to turn it on or off (it is off by default) use the Application
Setup dialog.
The window may be docked to a side of the PLC WorkShop window.

Status Line
The Status Line spans the bottom of the PLC WorkShop window. It displays information or
describes the current operation on the left side. To display status line information for a menu item
or button, click on the item or button and hold the left mouse button.
The right side of the Status Line displays the information listed below.

PLC The first shadowed box on the

Route status line displays the route

16
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

defined for the active program. If

the PLC route is a direct serial
connection to a PLC, then Direct
is displayed. The on-line PLC
route is taken directly from the
controller you are connected to.
The off-line PLC route informs
you as to the parameter saved in
the PLC setup window for this
particular program.
Logic Indicates whether you are
Mode programming on-line or off-line.
Cursor Indicates cursor type, either insert
Type (Ins) or overtype (Ovr). With
characters to the right of the
cursor, in insert mode characters
are moved one space with each
character typed. In overtype mode
characters to right of the cursor
are replaced with each new
character typed.
NUM Indicates if Num Lock is active
for the keyboard. Thus numbers
will be typed when using the
keypad, which is usually on the
right side of the keyboard. Num
Lock is not active when indicator
area is blank.
CAP Indicates if Caps Lock is active
for the keyboard. When typing,
capital letters will appear if Caps is
indicated. Caps Lock is not active
when indicator area is blank.
Valid Indicates legal address range for
Ranges the instruction at the current
position.

Working with Logic Programs

Creating a New Logic Program

With PLC WorkShop, it’s easy to create a new program.
NOTE: New programs may be created in offline mode only. To connect to a processor
online, use the File/Open or File/Fast PLC Connect menu items.
To create a new logic program and begin programming, do the following:

17
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

1. Select the File/New menu item, click the toolbar icon, or press [Ctrl+N] on the
keyboard.
2. Select the PLC Type.
3. Press OK.

Fast PLC Connection - Connecting to a PLC

With PLC WorkShop, the PLC can be connected to with a click of the mouse and existing logic in
the PLC can then be viewed and edited.
Prior to connecting the first time, the PLC connection must be set up. Refer to Chapter 4 - Fast
PLC Setup for more details.
To connect to a PLC online, select the File/Fast PLC Connection menu item or click the
toolbar icon.
NOTE: Files cannot be loaded with Fast PLC Connection. To load a file Online, use the Open
Program dialog, which is accessed through the File/Open menu item.

Preventing Fast PLC Connection

To prevent connection by Fast PLC:
1. Select the Options/Application Setup menu item. The Application Setup dialog
appears.

2. Deselect the Enable Fast PLC Connection check box.

Opening an Existing Logic Program Offline or Online

You can open an existing logic file to edit or update program information in either online or offline
mode. Logic programs may contain one or more of the following: logic and data, tags, headers, and
descriptions and comments. Several programs may be open at one time without losing memory
contents.

18
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Editing or modifying a program online may produce

unexpected or hazardous results.

To open an existing program:

1. Select the File/Open menu item, click the toolbar icon, or press [Ctrl-O]. The
Open Program dialog appears.
NOTE: The last four files that were opened are saved and listed at the bottom of the File
menu. When one of these files is selected, the Open Program dialog automatically
opens with the file that has been selected.

2. Click Browse. The Open dialog appears.

3. Change drives and/or directories, if necessary, to find the program you wish to open. You
can open *.FMD (PLC WorkShop 32-bit files), *.FTK (PLC WorkShop 16-bit files),
*.PGR (PLC WorkShop DOS files) or *.CFG (ModSoft configuration) files.
4. Click on the program name in the File Name scroll box and click OK. The name of the
program appears in the Program File and Address Documentation fields of the Open
Program dialog. If a different documentation program is desired, it may be linked via the
Share Address Documentation function.
5. In the Program Type group box, select Offline or Connect to PLC. If Connect to PLC
is selected, the previously saved communication port can be used or a new communication
port selected by clicking the Setup button and other options may be chosen, such as
Transfer Logic to PLC - Transfers all logic and data areas to the PLC, and loads
documentation.
6. Click OK or press [Enter] to open the program.

19
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Sharing Address Documentation

When a file is configured, a database file that holds and sorts all documentation can be specified.
Multiple users can simultaneously modify documentation for the same file, thus regular updates can
be scheduled to get the latest documentation within the database. Documentation can be imported
from *.FMD (PLC WorkShop 32-bit files), comma or tab separated. Conversely documentation can
be exported from the database file into a text file or *.PGR (PLC WorkShop DOS files).
To set up shared documentation:
1. Access the Open Program dialog by selecting the File/Open menu item.
2. Click Browse to select a file.
3. Click the Advanced button of the Open Program dialog. The Share Address
Documentation dialog appears.

4. Enter the share address documentation program name and path in the Shared File and
Path field to create a new file or select Browse to locate an existing file. If creating a new
file, when prompted, click Yes to confirm that it should be created.
5. Click Next. The following screen appears.

6. Enter the refresh rate (time lag between updates from other users of the database). Valid
times are from 1 to 1440 minutes.
7. Click Next. The following screen appears.

20
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

8. Click Finish. The Open Program dialog reappears with the new filename and path for the
address documentation.

Combined
If you have an existing file and want to connect online, to a controller that the program resides in,
you can use the Combined feature to go online faster. Combined also allows for any online edits of
Ladder, TCOP, ASCII message, Configuration Extension, Modbus Ports, ASCII Ports and
Segment Scheduler to be made to the PLC and Databases at the same time which allows for a faster
online save. You select Combined Mode in the Open dialog by selecting the Combined checkbox.
For Combined Mode to work, the file that is used to attach online is assumed to be an exact match
with the PLC program.
If the ladder or basic configuration does not match, connection online is not allowed.
Even if ladder, Coils Used (including Battery coil), configuration, Modbus Ports, State Table
(Registers) match after attach, the following parts could still be different:
Configuration:
ƒ DAT Loadables
ƒ TCOP
ƒ Configuration Extension
ƒ Solve Table
ƒ ASCII Port Parameters
ƒ EXE Loadables
ASCII:
ƒ ASCII Message
Data:
ƒ Never checked
Combined Mode does not allow changes to the configuration memory (Configuration. Ext.,
Segment, Configured Quantities, Adding or deleting Loadables etc.), proceeding with this action
removes Combined Mode and requires a full online save.

21
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Clearing PLC memory is also not allowed in Combined Mode. Proceeding with this action removes
Combined Mode and requires a full online save.
If Combined Mode has been canceled, and a save is attempted, save reads from the PLC memory,
not from offline.
If the PLC is in Dim-awareness the Combine Mode will produce an error.

Combined Mode Save

The 3 top check boxes are always checked and disabled. The complete program is always saved.
Data values for 0x through 6x are an option. If data is not saved they retain their previous values
from the offline file. The Save 6x Registers check box is only enabled if 6x registers exist in the
PLC.

Transfer Offline Program to Online

PLC WorkShop allows you to transfer an existing offline logic file to an online Modicon controller.

Editing or modifying a program online may produce

unexpected or hazardous results.

To transfer an existing offline program to online:

1. Select Transfer Î Online from the File menu or press [Ctrl+T]. The Open
Program dialog box appears.

2. Select OK to Transfer.

22
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Importing Documentation
Use the following procedure to import documentation.
1. Select Import from the File menu. The Import Documentation dialog box appears.

2. Select the type of file to import from the drop down menu.
3. Type the program name in the Filename field, or click Browse to search from valid
program names.
4. Click OK to import the program.
The Include group box contains three documentation items: Tags, Descriptions, and Headers
(Description Comments), which are read when files are imported. Not every item is valid for every
import format. And not every format allows these items to be manually selected and unselected.
But the items loaded during the import are indicated in this group box.
ƒ Select the Tags check box to include them in the documentation import.
ƒ Select the Descriptions check box to include them in the documentation import
ƒ Click the Header check box (labeled “Description Comments” under the Taylor
ProWORX Symbol .fis Documentation File format) to include them in the
documentation import.
NOTE: For most import formats, these options are checked by default. However, the check
box may be selected or unselected under some import formats. When importing
Delimited Documentation Text Files, headers must be imported independently of tags
and descriptions.
The Format combo box of the Import dialog offers several file types:
ƒ FasTrak WorkShop documentation (*.fmd) - This selection reads documentation from
another WorkShop program
ƒ FasTrak DOS (PLC WorkShop) - This selection reads documentation from a DOS
WorkShop program.

23
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

ƒ Taylor ProWORX/ASCII .fil Documentation File - This selection reads

documentation exported by ProWORX into the Taylor ASCII *.FIL format. The
ProWORX “Descriptor” is loaded into the WorkShop Description, the “Short Comment”,
“Page Title”, and “Long Comment” are written in that order to the WorkShop Description
Comment.
ƒ Taylor ProWORX Symbol .fis Documentation File - This selection reads symbol
documentation exported by ProWORX into the Taylor *.FIS format. The ProWORX
“Symbol” is written to the Workshop Tag; the “Descriptor” is written to the WorkShop
Description, the “Short Comment”, “Page Title” and “Long Comment” are written in that
order to the WorkShop Description Comment.
ƒ Modsoft Text Export (Address/Symbol/Descriptor) - This selection reads the
Modsoft Address, Symbol and Descriptor documentation exported into an ASCII text file.
ƒ Modsoft Text Export (Segment & Network Comments) - This selection reads the
Modsoft Segment and Network Comment documentation exported into an ASCII text file.
ƒ DMC LadderMaster (ASCII Export) - This selection reads documentation exported by
DMC into an ASCII file.
ƒ Delimited Documentation Text File - This selection reads documentation previously
exported by FasTrak WorkShop into an ASCII file.
ƒ 4x Register Text File - This selection reads 4x register data previously exported by
FasTrak WorkShop into an ASCII file.
NOTE: FasTrak WorkShop allows only alphanumeric characters and the “_” underscore
character in the Tag. The “_” underscore character replaces any other characters
imported into the Tag. For example, “ABC%$#123” would be imported as
“ABC___123” The character substitution may create duplicate Tags which would
terminate the import process.
When any Tag characters are substituted during documentation import, a message like the one
below appears.

The Text Import Delimiter group box contains the two delimiter characters (commas or tab
characters), which may be used in certain text import files. These delimiter characters are used to
separate fields within each record of these files. The delimiter character may be selected for
Delimited Documentation Text File and 4x Register Data Test File formats only.
Use the Delimited Documentation Text File format to merge tags, descriptions, and/or headers
from the ASCII text files exported from PLC WorkShop into the selected file. You must also select
comma or tab delimited records with the following format:
ƒ Characters 1 – 5 or 6 contain the 5 or 6-digit Modicon address.

24
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

ƒ Character 6 is the comma or tab character.

ƒ Character 8 and beyond is the variable length tag, followed by the comma or tab character,
the variable length description, and a carriage return.
ƒ Headers are imported independently of tags and descriptions. If a header contains a
carriage return, double quote characters, or commas, it is surrounded by double quotes.
Headers have a maximum length of 16k ASCII characters. A header with no special
characters will be stored without double quotes and read to the end of its line.

Exporting Documentation
Use the following procedure to export documentation.
1. Select Export from the File menu.
2. Select a file format for export from the Format combo box.
3. Type the program name in the Filename field, or click Browse to search from valid
program names.
4. Select the parts of documentation to export: Tags, Descriptions, or Headers. Then
determine which delimiter format to use. The delimiter is used to separate the types of
documentation (Tags, Descriptions or Headers).
5. Click OK to export the program.

The Format combo box of the Export dialog offers several file types to which documentation can
be written. Documentation to PLC WorkShop, FasTrak’s DOS package, can be written directly to
the native data files. In addition, documentation can be exported into file formats, which in turn
can be imported by competitor’s packages.
ƒ FasTrak DOS (PLC WorkShop) - This selection writes documentation to a DOS
WorkShop program documentation file.
ƒ Delimited Documentation Text File - This selection writes documentation, which can
be edited externally then, imported back into PLC WorkShop.
ƒ 4x Register Text File - This selection writes 4x register data, which can be edited
externally then imported back into PLC WorkShop.

25
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

ƒ Taylor ProWORX/ASCII .fil Documentation File - This selection writes

documentation into the Taylor ASCII *.FIL format, which can be imported by ProWORX.
The WorkShop Description is exported as the ProWORX “Descriptor”, the WorkShop
Description Comment is split into the “Short Comment” and “Page Title”. The
ProWORX “Long Comment” is stored in a separate ProWORX database file to which the
Export process cannot write. Therefore, the “Long Comment” portion of the Description
Comment cannot be exported even if it was originally imported from a ProWORX *.FIL.
ƒ Taylor ProWORX Symbol .fis Documentation File - This selection writes symbol
documentation into the Taylor *.FIS format, which can be imported by ProWORX. The
WorkShop Tag is exported as the ProWORX “Symbol”, the Description is exported as the
ProWORX “Descriptor”, and the WorkShop Description Comment is split into the “Short
Comment” and “Page Title”. The ProWORX “Long Comment” is stored in a separate
ProWORX database file to which the Export process cannot write. Therefore, the “Long
Comment” portion of the Description Comment cannot be exported - even if it was
originally imported from a ProWORX *.FIS.
The Include group box contains three documentation items: Tags, Descriptions, and Headers
(Description Comments), which are written when files are exported. Not every item is valid for
every export format. Additionally, not every format allows these items to be manually selected and
unselected. But the items written during the export are indicated in this group box.
NOTE: When exporting Delimited Documentation Text Files, headers must be exported
independently of tags and descriptions. Selecting Header when exporting this format will
disable Tags and Descriptions, and vice versa.
Click the Tags check box to include them in the documentation export. For most export formats,
this option is checked by default. However, this check box may be selected or unselected under
some export formats.
Click the Descriptions check box to include them in the documentation export. For most export
formats, this option is checked by default. However, this check box may be selected or unselected
under some export formats.
Click the Header check box to include them in the documentation export. For most export
formats, this option is checked by default. However, this check box may be selected or unselected
under some export formats.
The Delimiter group box contains the selection of two delimiter characters (commas or tab
characters), which may be used in some text exports files. These characters are used to separate
fields within each record of these files. The delimiter character may be selected for Delimited
Documentation Text File and 4x Register Data Test File formats only.
Use the Tag/Description Text File to merge Tags or Descriptions from the ASCII text files
exported by PLC WorkShop for Windows into the currently opened program. The default file
extension is *.TXT but alternate extensions are allowed. You must also select comma or tab
delimited records with the following format:
Characters 1 – 5/6 contain the 5/6-digit Modicon address.
Character 6 is the comma or tab character.
Character 8 and beyond is the variable length tag, the comma or tab character, the variable length
description, and a carriage return.

26
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

When the Taylor ProWORX/ASCII .fil Documentation File or Taylor ProWORX Symbol .fis
Documentation File formats are selected, the Descriptor Field Width and Number of Descriptor
Fields combo boxes appear within the Taylor ProWORX group box below.

These settings correspond to the same options used in ProWORX to specify the number and
length of ProWORX “Descriptor” lines. It is important to select the matching settings so the
exported *.FIL or *.FIS files are written in the proper size.

Delimited Documentation Text Format

Documentation exported as delimited text files may be edited in any text editor or spreadsheet
application that supports the *.TXT extension. When importing and exporting to this format,
headers will be imported and exported as its own file separate from tags and descriptions. After
exporting the files, tags, descriptions, and headers can be edited and updated before importing back
into the program. While editing delimited documentation, the proper format must be retained for
the documentation to be imported correctly.

Tags and Descriptions

Tags and descriptions are exported as comma- or tab-separated values in the following format:

address<delimiter> tag<delimiter>description

Descriptions that break across multiple lines are also separated into their own comma- or tab-
separated values:

Example
00001, TAG, This description, is on three, lines
00002, TAG2, Two line, description

27
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Headers
Headers are exported to their own files as comma- or tab-separated values. Network headers,
segment headers, and the Title Page may be exported, edited, and imported in the following format:

Title<delimiter>
Title description<delimiter>
Seg 1<delimiter>
Segment 1 header<delimiter>
Net 1<delimiter>
Network 1 header<delimiter>

Headers that contain newline, double quote characters, commas, or other special characters are
surrounded by double quotes inside the delimiters. Headers that do not contain any of these
characters contain no double quotes and are only separated by their delimiters. Headers that break
across multiple lines are also separated into their own delimited values:

Example
Title,
“The first line of the title has a word wrapped in double quotes. ““word”””,
“The second line has a comma in it, so it needs to be wrapped in double quotes”,
The third line does not have any special chars in it,
Segment 1,
Segment 1 header,
Net 1,
Network 1 header,
Net 2,
Network 2 header. This happens,
To be on 2 lines.,

Online Access Modes

PLC WorkShop provides modes for editing ladder logic online, and for monitoring logic online
without the risk of inadvertent edits.
Program Mode: allows online editing
Monitor Mode: prevents online editing
Auto Monitor Mode: allows an online editing session, then switches (after a user-defined period of
inactivity) to Monitor Mode.
NOTE: The access modes apply only when online. Editing is always possible when offline. In
the event of an unintended edit offline, the backup files that PLC WorkShop
automatically creates can be used.

28
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Selecting the Initial Online Access Mode

1. Select the Options/Application Setup menu option to display the Application Setup
dialog.

2. Click the option button corresponding to the desired Access Mode.

3. If you selected Auto Monitor, enter the number of minutes of inactivity that will indicate
that the editing session is over, and cause the switch from Program to Monitor mode. The
time selected is the length of inactivity - the user may program indefinitely as long as it is in
an uninterrupted session.

29
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Changing the Online Access Mode while online

The current access mode is shown in the title bar.

If you attempt to edit online while in Monitor mode, a dialog appears informing you of the fact. If
you are in Auto Monitor mode and the programming session has timed out, the dialog includes an
option to re-enable Program Mode.
It is also indicated by the presence or absence of a check mark next to the Program / Program
Mode menu option.

To change the mode while online:

1. Select the Program/Program Mode menu option. If Program Mode is active (indicated
by a check mark) this switches PLC WorkShop to Monitor Mode. If PLC WorkShop is in
Monitor Mode, this switches to Program Mode.

Saving Logic Programs

Use the Save Program command to save the active program contents with its existing name. To
save the active logic program:
1. Click on the Toolbar or select Save Program from the File menu or press
[Ctrl+S], and a previously saved logic program is saved.
2. If the program has not been previously saved, the Save As dialog box appears. Select
the desired location to save the program, and type in a name for the program in the
Filename field.

30
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

3. Click Save or press [Enter] to save the program.

4. If you select a file name that already exists in that directory, a message appears with
options. Select from the following options:
YES saves the updated program with the current name, overwriting the previous version.
NO cancels the save procedure.
NOTE: You must validate logic before saving. If you have not done so, a message appears
stating changes to logic have not been validated or entered. Changes cannot be saved
until logic has been validated and entered. Click Validate Logic on the toolbar, or
select Validate and Enter Logic from the Program menu. Complete necessary
changes to logic and try to save the program again.

Save/Save As Online
Use the online Save Program command to save all the active program contents with its existing
name or parts of an existing logic program. One or more of the following parts can be saved:
ƒ PLC Program
ƒ Save Ladder Headers
ƒ Save Address Documentation (Tags, Descriptions, Comments and Headers)
ƒ Save 6x Registers
To save the active logic program:
1. Click on the Toolbar or select Save Program from the File menu [Ctrl+S]. The
Save dialog box appears.

2. Deselect the parts of the program you do not wish to save.

3. If the program has not been previously saved or you wish to change the file name, select
the Browse button, and type in a name for the program in the Filename field.
4. Click Save or press Enter to save the program.
5. If you select a file name that already exists in that directory, a message appears with
options. Select from the following options:
ƒ YES saves the updated program with the current name, overwriting the previous
version.

31
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

ƒ NO cancels the save procedure.

NOTE: You must validate logic before saving. If you have not done so, a message appears
stating changes to logic have not been validated or entered. Changes cannot be saved
until logic has been validated and entered. Click Validate Logic on the toolbar, or
select Validate and Enter Logic from the Program menu. Complete necessary
changes to logic and try to save the program again.
If you are working online and saving your changes, a warning message appears stating that logic in
the active PLC program has been modified, and asks if you wish to save the logic in addition to tags
and documentation.
Click Yes to save logic, tags, and documentation. Click No to save documentation and tags only.
Cancel aborts the save procedure.
If you are saving documentation to an online logic program and the last network header exceeds
the number of networks/addresses, an error message appears.

Editing or modifying a program online may produce

unexpected or hazardous results.

Save Program As Offline

Use Save Program As to save the active logic program with a different program name. This is
useful when maintaining the original without changes. For example, open file ABC.FMD, make
changes, select Save Program As, and save the program as DEF.FMD. Now you have two files,
ABC.FMD retained its same condition before you opened it, and DEF.FMD that contains changes
made to ABC.FMD.
NOTE: You must validate logic before saving. If you have not done so, a message appears
stating changes to logic have not been validated or entered. Changes cannot be saved
until logic has been validated and entered.
Click Validate Logic on the toolbar, or select Validate and Enter Logic from the
Program menu. Complete necessary changes to logic and try to save the program again.
To save a logic program with a new file name:
1. Select Save As from the File menu. The Save As dialog box appears.

2. In the Save As dialog box, click options in the necessary group boxes to designate a
location to save the logic program.
3. Click OK or press [Enter]. Your file is saved with its new name.

32
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

4. If you select a file name that already exists in that directory, a message appears with
options. Select from the following options:
ƒ YES saves the updated program with the current name, overwriting the previous
version.
ƒ NO cancels the save procedure.
NOTE: If you are saving documentation to an online program, please see Saving Online under
Saving Logic Programs on the preceding pages.

Automatic Backup
WorkShop automatically maintains a rolling set of backup files each time a PLC program is saved.
When a PLC program is saved, the previous version is renamed to the existing file name with
BAK001appended. Any existing backup files are renamed with a number one higher, up to the
number of backups that have been defined. See Setting Maximum Number of Backup Files.
For example, if a program named MyProg.fmd is saved, and the number of backups is set to 5:
The current file Becomes
MyProg.fmd MyProgBAK001.fmd
MyProgBAK001.fmd MyProgBAK002.fmd
MyProgBAK002.fmd MyProgBAK003.fmd
MyProgBAK003.fmd MyProgBAK004.fmd
MyProgBAK004.fmd MyProgBAK005.fmd
MyProgBAK005.fmd Is not saved

Setting Maximum Number of Backup Files

The default maximum number of backup files maintained for each *.FMD file is five. This value
may be set to any integer between 0 and 999. This setting applies to all *.FMD files and is not
specific to only the current file.
To specify the maximum number of backup files:
1. Select the Options/Application Setup menu item. The Application Setup dialog
appears.

33
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

2. Enter a value in the Number of Backup Files Saved edit box.

NOTE: To deactivate the *.FMD file backup feature, set the Number of Backup Files
Saved to zero.

Opening a Backup File

Backup files (whose names end in _BAKxxx.FMD) may be opened using the File/Open menu
item. Once opened, backup files may be viewed and edited just like the original ladder program
from which they were created.
Backup files cannot be saved again with the same backup file name. Attempting to re-save a backup
file displays a similar error message:

To re-save the backup file, select the File/Save As menu item and enter another file name.

Printing Logic Programs

PLC WorkShop provides you with a number of print features that allow customization of your
printouts. These include:
Specific Print Selections
ƒ Logic
ƒ PLC Configuration
ƒ Registers
ƒ Documentation
ƒ Cross Reference
ƒ Disabled States
ƒ ASCII Messages
Customizable Options
ƒ Output to Text File
ƒ Documentation Font
ƒ Edit Title Page
Before you can print, open a logic program. Make certain that you have loaded the correct print
drivers for your printer through the Windows Control Panel. If you have questions regarding
loading print drivers, consult your printer’s user’s manual and the Windows User’s Guide.

34
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

To print logic programs and/or documentation:

1. Access the appropriate Print dialog by selecting either Print or Print Preview from the
File menu or by pressing [Ctrl+P].

2. Click on the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to print. For each item
selected, you can choose sort options and the information you want to include for
reports. The Selected Items window displays the print range of each print item to be
printed.

Print Logic
Select the Logic check box within the Print dialog to print the following:
ƒ All ladder logic
ƒ Selected ladder logic
ƒ Inline Xref
ƒ Ladder with Addresses, Tags, Descriptions, or Headers
ƒ Multiple or single networks per page

35
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

To display the Print Logic options:

1. Access the appropriate Print dialog by selecting either Print or Print Preview from the
File menu or by pressing [Ctrl+P].
2. Click the Logic button within the Print dialog. The Print Logic dialog appears.

The Print Logic dialog box determines which items are printed.
3. Configure the following options for the Logic printout:
ƒ Click the Print All check box to print the entire range of ladder selected.
ƒ To print a selection range, deselect the Print All check box and enter a range in the
associated Segment, Network range box.
ƒ If you selected to print By Segment, the from and to segment and network numbers can
be entered. Each segment’s starting network will always start with 1.
ƒ If Continuous by Segment radio button is selected, only from and to segment numbers
can be entered. The first network in the first segment is numbered 1. All other networks
are numbered continuously. The first network of the next segment is numbered 1 plus the
preceding segment’s last network number.
ƒ If Continuous radio button is selected, only from and to network numbers can be
entered. The first network in the first segment is numbered 1. All other networks are
numbered continuously. The first network of the next segment is numbered 1 plus the
preceding segment’s last network number.

36
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

ƒ When selecting Networks per Page as Single or Multiple, use the following information:
When printing Single Networks per Page, each network begins on a new page. When printing
Multiple Networks per Page, as many networks that can fit on a single page will be printed.
However, if the network is not the first network on the page and the network is broken across
more than one page but can fit on a single page and if it would start a new page, then the network
begins on a new page. The intent is to keep the entire network on one page whenever possible.
ƒ To change the Tag, Description, and Comments printed font of the active program, click
the Doc Font button. (See Configuring Documentation Font.)
NOTE: The print selection options are stored when saving a program.

Print PLC Configuration

Click the Configuration check box from the Print dialog to print the following:
ƒ PLC Configuration
ƒ Traffic Cop
ƒ ASCII Ports
ƒ Modbus ports
ƒ Configuration Extensions
ƒ Segment Scheduler
ƒ Segment Summary
To change the PLC Configuration properties click the PLC Configuration button on the Print
dialog box. The Print PLC Configuration dialog box appears.

Click the Print All check box to print the entire range of items. To print a selection, deselect the
Print All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box.
To change the Tag, Description, and Comments printed font of the active program, click the Doc
Font button. (See Configuring Documentation Font.)
NOTE: The print selection options are stored when saving a program.

37
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Print Registers
Click the Register check box from the Print dialog box to print the following:
1. 0x, 1x, 3x, 4x and/or 6x
To change the Register properties:
1. Click the Register button on the Print dialog box. The Print Register dialog box appears.

2. Click the All check box to print the entire range of items. To print a selection, deselect
the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box.
3. The tags and descriptions can be individually turned on or. To include with the Register
print out select the appropriate check box under Include.
4. To change the Tag, Description, and Comments printed font of the active program, click
the Doc Font button. (See Configuring Documentation Font.)

NOTE: The print selection options are stored when saving a program.

Print Documentation
Click the Documentation check box from the Print dialog box to print the following:
ƒ 0x, 1x, 3x, 4x and/or 6x Documentation
ƒ Register Tags, Descriptions, Comments, and Values
To change the Documentation properties:
1. Click the Documentation button on the Print dialog box. The Print Documentation
dialog box appears.

38
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Click the register check box to print the entire range of registers.
The Register Tags, Descriptions, Comments, and Values can be individually turned on and off.
To include with the Documentation print out select the appropriate check box under Include.
The sort order for documentation print can be based on Address, Tag, or Description. To
change the Documentation print sort orders select the appropriate check box under Sort Order.

NOTE: The print selection options are stored when saving a program.

Print Cross Reference

Select the Cross Reference check box within the Print dialog to print the following.
ƒ 0x, 1x, 3x, 4x and/or 6x
ƒ Tags, Descriptions, and Comments
ƒ Coils Used
To change the Cross Reference properties:
1. Access the appropriate Print dialog by selecting either Print or Print Preview from the
File menu or by pressing [Ctrl+P].
2. Click the Cross Reference button within the Print dialog. The Print Cross Reference
dialog appears.

3. Configure the following options for the Cross Reference printout.

To print the entire range of items, click the All check box. To print a selection, deselect the All
check box and enter a range in the associated edit box.
To include Tags, select the Tags check box within the Include group box.
To include Descriptions, select the Descriptions check box within the Include group box.
To print address documentation in a single line with the Address, select the Print Doc in a single
line check box.
Click the Include button to select addresses located in other parts of the program.

39
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

To include the Addresses Used Table with the Cross Reference printout, select the Addresses
Used check box. Click the Include button to select addresses located in other parts of the
program.
To include the Coils Used Table with the Cross Reference printout, select the Coils Used check
box.
To change the Tag, Description, and Comments printed font of the active program, click the Doc
Font button. (See Configuring Documentation Font.)
NOTE: The print selection options are stored when saving a program.

Print to a Text File

1. To print to a text file, select Output To Text File from the File menu. The Print
Output to Text File dialog box appears.

See Printing Logic Programs for dialog box selections.

2. Once selections are made select OK.
3. Enter a file name to save to and select OK.

Print Disabled States

Click the Disabled States check box from the Print dialog box to print the following:
ƒ 0x and/or 1x disabled states
To change the Disabled States print properties:
1. Click the Disabled States button on the Print dialog box. The Print Disabled States
dialog box appears.

40
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

2. Click the All check box to print the entire range of items. To print a selection, deselect the
All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box.
The following can be individually turned on and off to be included with the Disabled States
printout:
ƒ Tags
ƒ Descriptions
3. To change the Tag, Description, and Comments printed font of the active program, click
the Doc Font button. (See Configuring Documentation Font.)
NOTE: The print selection options are stored when saving a program.

Print ASCII Messages

To print ASCII messages:
1. Click the ASCII Messages check box from the Print dialog box.
2. To change the ASCII Messages print properties click the ASCII Messages button on the
Print dialog box. The Print ASCII Messages dialog box appears.

3. Click the All check box to print the entire range of items. To print a selection, deselect
the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box. Selecting the Playback
Format check box can also print the playback format.
4. To change the Tag, Description, and Comments printed font of the active program, click
the Doc Font button. (See Configuring Documentation Font.)

NOTE: The print selection options are stored when saving a program.

Configuring Documentation Font

Font, font style, and font size for documentation (tags, descriptions, and comments) can be
customized.
To change the documentation font:
1. Access the appropriate Print dialog by selecting either Print or Print Preview from the
File menu or by pressing [Ctrl+P].
2. Click the Logic, Configuration, Data Registers, Disabled States, Cross Reference, or
Documentation button to access the applicable dialog.

41
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

3. Click the Doc Font button. The Font dialog appears.

4. Configure font options.

NOTE: The print selection options are stored when saving a program.

Editing Features
PLC WorkShop uses a number of timesaving editing features to help you complete your
programming tasks. These include:
ƒ Cut
ƒ Copy
ƒ Paste
ƒ Paste With Rewire
ƒ Replace Table
ƒ Undo
ƒ Clear
ƒ Delete
ƒ Insert
The most frequently used editing features are Cut, Copy, and Paste. Use these commands to
quickly copy logic and documentation to either another location in the same program or another
program. The list below describes Cut, Copy, and Paste differences.

Window Feature Function

Cut Removes the selection from the program and
places it on the clipboard.

42
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Copy Copies the selection and places it on the

clipboard.
Paste Inserts clipboard contents into the program at
the cursor location.
Paste With Rewire Inserts clipboard contents into the program at
the cursor location and allows the user to re-
address any addressable items contained in the
clipboard.
Replace Table Replaces addresses and discrete instructions with
alternate addresses
Undo Resets the networks/addresses in a segment to
their original data.
The clipboard referenced is the standard Windows clipboard. Refer to your Windows User’s Guide for
more information.
To select the information to be cut or copied, click, hold and drag the pointer over the desired area.
Selected items are highlighted with a different color than your normal workspace color. Select the
appropriate check box to include Address Documentation or Ladder Symbols.
If you want to select all logic in the current window, select the Edit / Select All menu item.
Each of three editing commands, described in detail in the following paragraphs, can be accessed
several ways.

Cut
To use the cut feature:
1. Select the information you want to cut by highlighting the instruction, group of
instructions or networks to be cut.
2. Click and hold down the left mouse button on the item, or network lines to be cut, then
drag the mouse to the end of the item range or network lines to cut.
3. Cut your selection to the clipboard with one of the following:
ƒ Click on the toolbar or
ƒ Select Cut from the Edit menu
ƒ Press [Ctrl+X]
NOTE: If the start and ending network number is known then the cut from and cut to range
can be entered directly into the Cut dialog box. If a partial network is selected, the Cut
dialog box is not displayed. The items selected are cut without warning.

43
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

4. Select OK. The range of networks/addresses displayed are cut out of the program and
placed into the clipboard.

Copy
To use the copy feature:
1. Select the information you want to copy by highlighting the instruction, group of
instructions or networks to be copied.
2. Click and hold down the left mouse button on the item, or network to be copied, then
drag the mouse to the end of the item range or network to copy.
3. Copy your selection to the clipboard with one of the following:
ƒ Click on the toolbar or
ƒ Select Copy from the Edit menu
ƒ Press [Ctrl+C]
NOTE: If the start and ending network number is known then the copy from and copy to
range can be entered directly into the Copy dialog box. If a partial network is selected,
the Copy dialog box is not displayed. The items selected are copied without warning.

4. Click OK. The range of networks/addresses displayed are copied and placed into the
clipboard.

Paste
To access the paste feature:
1. Move the cursor to the desired location.
2. Paste clipboard contents into the new location with one of the following:
ƒ Click on the toolbar
ƒ Select Paste from the Edit menu
ƒ Press [Ctrl+V]

Paste With Rewire

Paste With Rewire provides you with a number of time-saving editing features. These include:
ƒ Paste multiple copies
ƒ Paste with address offset

44
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

ƒ Include tags and descriptions in the paste

ƒ The ability to Rewire (change address) on an individual basis
To access the rewire feature:
1. Move the cursor to the desired location.
2. Paste clipboard contents into the new location by:
o Selecting Paste with Rewire from the Edit menu. The Paste With Rewire
dialog box appears.
o Choose the appropriate options.
o Click OK.

NOTE: When pasting, clipboard contents are inserted before existing items. For example, if
you are pasting a network and the cursor is positioned at Network 002, click paste and
the clipboard contents become Network 002. The previous Network 002 becomes
Network 003.
If the Copy/Cut buffer was copied with ladder symbols then rewire will enable the ability to paste
symbols to for the rewired address. A check is done before the actual paste of the rewired network
to see if any symbols being written to already have a ladder symbol. If a Symbol exists for any
rewired address the user is warned:

Abort ends the rewire.

45
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Special Paste

The regular Paste command does not paste Address Documentation or Ladder Symbols. If the
Copy/Cut buffer was copied with Ladder Symbols and/or address documentation, then Special
Paste can paste them.
Paste of address documentation has two checks. If any tags exist for the pasted address
documentation then the user is given a warning:

Replace Table
Replace Table allows up to 24 ranges of 0x, 1x, 3x, and 4x addresses and Contact and Coil
instructions within a ladder program to be replaced. This is an offline feature and only available in
unedited (entered and validated) programs.
For example, every address from 000012 through 000016 could be replaced with addresses 000100
through 000104. This means the Replace Table replaces every occurrence of the discrete address as
follows:
000012 is replaced with 000100
000013 is replaced with 000101
000014 is replaced with 000102
000015 is replaced with 000103
000016 is replaced with 000104

Similarly, specific instructions within a range of addresses can also be replaced.

For example, every Normally Open (N/O) Contact whose address is within 101023 through
101027 can be replaced with a Normally Closed (N/C) Contact from 000566 through 000570. This
means the Replace Table replaces every occurrence as follows:
N/O Contact 101023 is replaced with N/C Contact 000566
N/O Contact 101024 is replaced with N/C Contact 000567

46
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

N/O Contact 101025 is replaced with N/C Contact 000568

N/O Contact 101026 is replaced with N/C Contact 000569
N/O Contact 101027 is replaced with N/C Contact 000570

When replacing instructions within an address range, only addresses used in the selected instruction
type are replaced. Occurrences of addresses within the specified range are not replaced if they are
not used in the selected instruction type.
For example, when replacing Normally Open Contacts that use addresses 101023 through 101035,
address 101023 used in a Move instruction is not replaced because a Move instruction is not a
Normally Open Contact instruction.
Similarly continuing the example above, a Normally Open Contact whose address is 101022 is not
replaced because address 101022 is outside the specified replace range.
NOTE: Addresses within Configuration, Configuration Extension, and Traffic Cop are not
replaced.
To use the replace feature, select the Edit/Replace Table menu item. The Replace Table dialog
appears.

The Replace Table dialog allows up to 24 separate address or instruction/address groups to be

replaced at one time. Replacements are performed from the top to the bottom of the left column
followed by the top to the bottom of the right column.
NOTE: While WorkShop is running, the Replace Table settings are saved and restored for
each program. When the dialog is displayed, selections made the last time it was used are
automatically restored. These settings are cleared when WorkShop is terminated.

47
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Replacing an Address / Address Range

To replace an address range:
1. Use the default setting of None in the REPLACE instruction combo box.
2. Enter the address / address range to be replaced in the from address and to address edit
boxes. These addresses must be of the same type and within the Configured Quantities
shown in the PLC Configuration dialog, which is accessed through the PLC Utilities /
PLC Configuration menu item. If both the REPLACE to address and WITH from
address edit boxes are empty when a REPLACE from address is entered, the
REPLACE from address is copied into the REPLACE to address and WITH from
address edit boxes by default.
3. Use the default setting of None in the WITH instruction combo box.
4. Enter the replacement starting address in the from address edit box. 0x and 1x address
types may only be replaced with 0x and 1x address types. Likewise, 3x and 4x address types
may only be replaced with 3x and 4x address types. The WITH to address, containing the
ending address of the range, is automatically calculated based upon the number of
addresses in the REPLACE from address and to address range.
5. Click the Replace button to start the replacement process.

Replacing an Address / Address Range associated with an Instruction

To replace an instruction:
1. Select an Instruction Type, for the instruction to be replaced, from the REPLACE
instruction combo box by selecting the instruction’s corresponding mnemonic. Choices
include:
Coil: -( )-
Latched Coil: -( L )-
Normally Open Contact: -] [-
Normally Closed Contact: -] / [-
Up-Transition Contact: -] ^ [-
Down-Transition Contact: -] v [-
2. Enter the address range to be replaced in the from address and to address edit boxes.
Only 0x and 1x addresses may be entered. These addresses must be of the same type and
within the Configured Quantities shown in the PLC Configuration dialog, which is
accessed through the PLC Utilities / PLC Configuration menu item. If both the
REPLACE to address and WITH from address edit boxes are empty when a
REPLACE from address is entered, the REPLACE from address is copied into the
REPLACE to address and WITH from address edit boxes by default.
3. Select an Instruction Type, for the replacement instruction, from the WITH instruction
combo box by selecting the instruction’s corresponding mnemonic.
4. Enter the replacement starting address in the from address edit box. 0x and 1x address
types may only be replaced with 0x and 1x address types. The WITH to address,
containing the ending address of the range, is automatically calculated based upon the
number of addresses in the REPLACE from address and to address range.

48
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

5. Click the Replace button to start the replacement process.

Limiting Replacements to Specific Segments or Networks

To limit replacements to specific segments or networks:
1. Enter the starting segment/network to be replaced in the Perform replacements From
Seg/Net edit box.
2. Enter the ending segment/network to be replaced in the Perform replacements To Seg
/Net edit box.
NOTE: Neither value may exceed the total number of segments / networks contained in the
program.

Address Documentation
To copy or move address documentation associated with addresses that have been replaced, select
the appropriate option from the Address Documentation combo box, within the Additional
selections for all replacements group box.
Move: The Tags, Descriptions, and Description Comments from the original REPLACE
addresses are copied to the WITH addresses, and the documentation of each REPLACE address
is deleted from the address documentation database.
Copy: The Descriptions and Description Comments from the original REPLACE addresses are
copied to the WITH addresses, and the documentation of each REPLACE address remains
unchanged in the address documentation database. Tags are not copied since every Tag must be
unique in the address documentation database.
Ignore: Existing address documentation of both the REPLACE and WITH addresses remains
unchanged in the address documentation database.
NOTE: Address documentation is copied or moved during a separate operation only after all
addresses and/or instructions have been replaced in the logic.

Confirmation
To confirm replacements, select the appropriate option from the Confirm each replacement
combo box, within the Additional selections for all replacements group box.
Yes: Requires user confirmation before replacing any address or address/instruction combination.
No: Replacements are made without requesting user confirmation.

Error Acknowledgement
To acknowledge errors, select the appropriate option from the Acknowledge errors combo box,
within the Additional selections for all replacements group box.
Yes: The Replace Table displays messages regarding any errors encountered during the replace
process and waits for user confirmation.
No: The Replace Table ignores any errors encountered during the replace process and continues
until all replacements are complete.
NOTE: Any replacement that causes an error is not performed.

49
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Discrete Address States

To manipulate discrete address states associated with addresses that have been replaced, select the
appropriate option from the Discrete States combo box, within the Additional selections for all
replacements group box.
Move: The states of the original REPLACE addresses are copied to the WITH addresses, and the
states of the REPLACE addresses are zeroed.
Copy: The states of the original REPLACE addresses are copied to the WITH addresses, and the
original REPLACE states remain unchanged.
Ignore: Existing states of both the REPLACE and WITH addresses remain unchanged.
NOTE: Discrete states are copied or moved during a separate operation only after all addresses
and/or instructions have been replaced in the logic.

Register Addresses
To manipulate register addresses associated with addresses that have been replaced, select the
appropriate option from the Register Contents combo box, within the Additional selections for
all replacements group box.
Move: The register contents of the original REPLACE addresses are copied to the WITH
addresses, and the register contents of the REPLACE addresses are zeroed.
Copy: The register contents of the original REPLACE addresses are copied to the WITH
addresses, and the original REPLACE register contents remain unchanged.
Ignore: Existing register contents of both the REPLACE and WITH addresses remain
unchanged.
NOTE: Register contents are copied or moved during a separate operation only after all
addresses and/or instructions have been replaced in the logic.

Forced / Disabled Address States

To manipulate forced/disabled address states associated with addresses that have been replaced,
select the appropriate option from the Forced / Disabled combo box, within the Additional
selections for all replacements group box.
Move: The forced/disabled states of the original REPLACE addresses are copied to the WITH
addresses, and the forced/disabled states of the REPLACE addresses are zeroed.
Copy: The forced/disabled states of the original REPLACE addresses are copied to the WITH
addresses, and the original REPLACE forced/disabled states remain unchanged.
Ignore: Existing states of both the REPLACE and WITH addresses remain unchanged.
NOTE: Forced/disabled states are copied or moved during a separate operation only after all
addresses and/or instructions have been replaced in the logic.

Undo
Use Undo to reset networks in a segment to their original data. Any modified or inserted rung can
be reset. Deleted rungs cannot be reset.
To access the Undo feature:

50
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

1. Select Undo from the Edit menu or press [Ctrl+Z]. The Undo Logic window
appears.

2. Select the segments to reset and press OK, or press Undo All to reset all networks
displayed.
3. Click Cancel to close the window.

Clear
Use Clear to clear an item without removing the space it occupies. Access Clear from the Edit
menu using the Logic Editor in either offline or online mode. Clear can also be accessed from the
Data Window.
To clear items:
1. Select the item or items you want to clear by clicking, holding, and dragging the pointer
over the desired logic.

2. Select Clear from the Edit menu or press the [Delete] key. The Clear dialog box
appears.
3. Click the items you want to clear.
4. Click OK or press [Enter]. The selected items are cleared.

51
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

The following table describes the clearing items.

Item Function
Ladder Removes all networks from the block displayed.
Network Removes all logic from the network at the cursor
position.
Instruction This option is available if the cursor is positioned
at an instruction. When cleared, the instruction is
removed; however, attached branches are not
affected.
Branch This option is available if there is a branch to the
right of the instruction with the cursor. Clearing
removes the branch to the right of the cursor.
Row This option is available when an instruction is
selected. Clearing removes instructions from the
row where the cursor is positioned. Branches in
this row are cleared only if the resulting logic
contains branches unconnected to logic at one or
both ends.
Column This option is available when an instruction is
selected. Clearing removes instructions and
branches from the current column.

Logic Editor - Online

Using Clear in the Logic Editor while online works the same as in offline mode. However, row and
column cannot be cleared while online.

Data Window
While working in the Data Window, you can use Clear to clear all rows or one row at a time. Clear
is accessed through the Edit menu or by pressing the [Delete] key.

Delete
Use Delete to delete an item and remove the space it occupies. Access Delete from the Edit menu
using the Logic Editor in either offline or online mode. Delete can also be accessed from the Data
Window.
To delete:
1. Select the item or items you wish to delete.
2. Select Delete from the Edit menu. The Delete dialog box appears.

52
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

3. Click the items you want to delete.

4. Click OK or press [Enter].

The following table describes the deletion items.

Item Function
Network Deletes a network or a range of networks. To delete a
range of networks, enter the number of the first network
to delete in the From box. Then enter the number of last
network to delete in the To box.
Row/Line In Ladder, selecting a row deletes all instructions and
branches from the row where the cursor is positioned.
Logic below the deleted row(s) moves up. When box
instructions prevent a deletion, an error message
appears.
Column Deletes instructions and branches from the column
where the cursor is positioned. Logic to the right of the
deleted column(s) moves left. When box instructions
prevent a deletion, an error message appears.

Logic Editor - Online

Using Delete in the Logic Editor while online works the same as in offline mode. However, a row
or column cannot be deleted unless it is empty.

Data Window
While working in the Data Window, you can use Delete to clear all rows or one row at a time.
Delete is accessed through the Edit menu.

Insert
Use Insert to insert a selected object (network, instruction, row, or column) at the point of the
current cursor position. Access Insert from the Edit menu using the Logic Editor in either offline
or online mode.
To insert an object:
1. Select Insert from the Edit menu. The Insert dialog box appears.

2. Click on the object you want to insert.

3. Click OK or press [Enter].

53
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Logic Editor - Offline

Item Function
Network Adds a new network before the current network where
the cursor is positioned.
Row/Line Adds a new row is before the row where the cursor is
positioned. If box instructions prevent insertion, an
error message appears.
Column Adds a new column before the column where the cursor
is positioned. If box instructions prevent insertion, an
error message appears.

Logic Editor - Online

Insert is accessed in the same manner online as offline. However, only a network or column can be
inserted while working online.

Item Function
Network With the cursor positioned at a network, Insert places a
new network before the current network.
Column A new column is inserted before the column where the
cursor is positioned. If box instructions prevent
insertion, an error message appears.

Merge
The program merge allows a user to merge all or parts of a program into another program. Both
programs must be loaded into WorkShop because the program being merged cannot be read from
a disk file. The target program (the one receiving the data) must have its configuration setup
complete, have no unverified edits, and be in offline. The source program is unchanged during the
merge process.
The user starts by loading the source program into PLC WorkShop, then configuring the target
program. Next, the Merge Program option is selected from the File menu. This brings up the
Modicon Program Merge program dialog box. Selecting the merge button closes the Pick dialog
box and brings up the Merge Program choice dialog box. This presents the user with the PLC type
and configured quantities of the source and destination programs. In this dialog, the user can
choose what parts of the program to merge. Since both programs are available to this dialog,
specific errors are displayed if the user chooses to merge a part that cannot be merged without
corrupting the target program. Finally, the user picks a name and directory of the Error text file and
presses the start button.
A meter window is used to show progress of the merge process until it is complete. The final
window shows the result window which displays the total errors and warnings found during the
merge. The user can then examine the log file for information on improving or cross- checking the
merge.

Merge Program Procedure

Merge can be used to copy a part of a program just like copy and paste. However, its main purpose
is to support configuration changes that would clear the program or transfer logic from an older
PLC to a newer one. The following is an example of how to merge an existing program to a new
program.

54
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

1. If the source program has any loadables, they should be saved to individual *.DAT or
*.EXE files using the Loadable dialog in the PLC configuration dialog. This must be
done since merge does not copy loadable data to the target program.
2. A new program should be created for the PLC type wanted.
3. PLC configuration should be set for the values wanted. Once the merge begins, this
cannot be changed.
4. Any loadable that was previously saved should be merged using the Loadable dialog.
5. Now the merge can begin. Load into offline the program you want to use as the source
program (if it is not already loaded).
6. While in the source program, pick merge from the File menu. The Modicon Program
Merge Pick Target dialog is displayed. Pick the Target program from the drop down list
box. This program must be offline and have no edits. Press the merge button to
continue.
7. The Merge Program Choice Dialog appears. As this dialog is displayed, both programs
are examined and defaults are placed in the check boxes and ranges. Each section
defaults are explained in the Choice dialog section.
8. The Error file text name must be entered before the actual merge can proceed. Once
this is done, press the start button to start the merge.
9. Once the merge is complete, a dialog is displayed with the number of errors and
warnings found during the merge.
10. Error text file: This file directs the user to any area that had trouble being merged. Each
section is explained below what gets placed in the file.

Pick Destination Merge Program Dialog

The user should be in the source program to bring up this dialog from the File Menu. The source
program cannot have any edits and must be an offline program. All offline programs that have no
edits, except the source program, are placed in the drop down list box. The user can pick any one
of these programs for the target of the merge.

Cancel - Exits without changing the target program.

Help - Brings up help.
Merge - Closes this dialog and brings up the Merge Program Choice dialog.

55
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Merge Program Choice Dialog

The Choice Dialog allows the user to choose which parts of the source program they want to copy
to the target program. The top of the dialog displays the PLC Type, 0x, 1x, 3x and 4x register for
each program. Each check box is explained below.

4x Range – Brings up 4x-range dialog.

6x Range – Brings up 6x-range dialog.
Ladder Range – Brings up the Ladder Range dialog.
Browse – Brings up the Common Open dialog.
Cancel – Exits without changing the target program.
Help – Brings up help.
Start – Begins the merge process that will change the target program.

Merge 4x Check Box

This check box is initially checked and the range is 400001 to 4x maximum. Merging of 4x data is
destructive to the target program because all copied values overwrite current values in the range.

56
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

4x Range
This dialog allows the user to specify a range of 4x registers from the source program in the source
group. The Target group box holds the first 4x register to be overwritten. This will continue for the
length of registers specified in the source group.

Merge 6x Check Box

This check box is initially unchecked and the range is 600000 to 6FXXXX where maximum file (F)
and last file size (XXXX). The range can cross-file boundaries. Merging of 6x data is destructive to
the target program because all copied values overwrite current values in the range.

6x Range
This dialog allows the user to specify a range of 6x registers from the source program in the source
group. The Target group box holds the first 6x register to be overwritten. This will continue for the
length of registers specified in the source group. The range does cross-file boundaries.

Merge ASCII message Check Box

The configuration of both programs is used to determine if the ASCII check box is checked or
grayed. If the target program does not have any ASCII configured, then the checkbox is grayed.
The merge of the ASCII message does not touch configuration in the target program, so the user
must have it properly configured.
If the following is true, then the check box is checked:
1. The source Total Words Used must be <= Words Available in target.
2. The Highest Message Used in source is <= the target Total Messages.
If either of these is NOT true, then the box is unchecked. If the user tries to check the box, an
error message is displayed: “ASCII Message cannot be merged, either, not enough words available
in target, or not enough messages.”

57
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Merge of ASCII is destructive to the target because it overwrites existing messages if the message
numbers are the same in the source. The merge copies all messages, at a specific message number,
to the same number in the target.

Merge Traffic Cop Check Box

The type of Traffic cop in both programs determines if the check box is checked or unchecked. If
source PLC and target PLC are the same type and basic form, the target TCOP size is large enough,
and depending on the PLC if the drops number are the same in both Programs, then the check box
can be checked.
The check box is unchecked if it is not possible to merge the Traffic Cop. If the user tries to check
the box, one of three error messages is displayed
1. “Traffic Cops are not compatible, unable to merge to target.”
2. “Source Traffic Cops size used is larger then target Traffic Cop size.”
3. “The number of drops in source does not match drops in Target.”
Merging of Traffic Cop is destructive to the target program; all existing drops are removed.
The merge is all or nothing. If there is a single error, the merge of TCOP is aborted. After the
merge is started, checks are done. The following are the possible errors:
1. Too many modules in drop 1 of 480, 485, 485E (max 21 not 32).
2. Processor position in drop 1 not free.
3. Illegal address in module.
On an error, the merge continues but the TCOP is not merged, and the error that caused the abort
is written to the Error Log Text File.

Merge Configuration Extension Check Box

The type of PLC and configuration extension size in both programs determines if the check box is
checked or unchecked.
If the source PLC and target PLC are NOT the same type, or if the Source Extension words used is
> the size of the Extension in the Target PLC, then the check box is unchecked. If the user tries to
check the box, one of two error messages are displayed:
1. “Configuration Extensions are not compatible, unable to merge to target.”
2. “Target Configuration Extension size is too small.”
The merging of Configuration Extension is destructive to the target program because existing
Extensions are removed.
Configured quantities are not checked on a merge and are the responsibility of the user to check. A
warning is placed in the log file if the extension is merged:
“Warning: Merging of Configuration Extension may have included invalid registers.”

Merge Solve Table Check Box

The type of Solve Table and number of drops and segments in both programs determines if the
check box is checked or unchecked.
If source and target Solve Tables are NOT the same type, or the number of segments and drops are
not the same, then the check box is unchecked. If the user tries to check the box, one of two error
messages are displayed:

58
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

1. “Solve Tables are not compatible, unable to merge to target.”

2. “The number of Drops and/or Segments are different, unable to merge to target.”
Merging of Solve Table is destructive to the target program; the previous Solve Table is replaced.
Configured quantities are not checked on a merge and are the responsibility of the user to check. A
warning is placed in the log file if the Solve Table is merged:
“Warning: Merging of Solve table may have included invalid 0x or 1x registers.”

Merge Ladder Check Box

This check box is initially checked and the default range is the minimum number of segments for
both programs and maximum networks, for each segment, in the source program. The first
network in the target program segment is defaulted. The Ladder Range dialog exists to change these
defaults.
The Ladder merge is non-destructive; no existing ladder is deleted. Networks can only be added to
existing segments. The first part of the ladder merge is for a DX instruction difference table to be
written to the log file. Then the segments are examined in order, and the network ranges picked are
copied to the target program. The following items are checked as the network is copied.
1. New rung fits into the new program memory.
2. Each instruction in the network is checked for validity. This includes valid instruction
and valid addresses.
3. Coils for each instruction are checked so that they are not duplicated.
If the program runs out of memory, the merge stops. If a network is invalid or coil is duplicated,
then the network is skipped and the log file is updated with:
“Error: Source Network xxxx in Segment xxxx did not merge.”
The specific error is then added to the error file. Merging of Ladder will invalidate the cross-
reference.

Ladder Range
The Merge Ladder Range dialog has a list box which lists the networks within each segment from
the source program that are merged into the targets segment at a starting network. A Line in the list
box looks like this:

This implies that the source segment 1 networks 1 to 5 will be merged into the target at segment 1
network 1 to 5.
OK – Enters the new ranges in List box.
Cancel – Does not enter any changes to the range.

59
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Edit Segment Range – Allows changing an exist range in the List box.
Add Segment Range – Allows adding a new segment range in the List box.
Delete Segment Range – Removes an existing highlighted segment range in the list box.

Merge Ladder Symbols

If the source program has graphical Symbols within it, this checkbox ensures that the symbols and
library are merged with the target program. This creates a new library within the source program.

Error Checking on Edit or Add:

A segment number in the source can only be used once. Also, a segment number in the target can
only be used once. The segment number cannot exceed the existing segment for the specific
program.
Network number in the source cannot exceed existing networks. Network number in the target
cannot exceed the maximum existing networks in segment plus 1 (i.e., if target has 4 networks,
source network 1-5 can be copied to starting network 1 to 5.)

DX Table
The purpose of the DX difference table is to inform the user that some instructions may not be
supported in the new PLC or that converted logic may be incorrect.
Each DX instruction is read out of the source program and checked with each in the target
program.
If the DX is supported with same name and same opcode, then nothing is written to the log file.
If the DX is not supported (Name missing from target), then it is written to the log file: “XXXX
instruction is not supported.” Any network with this instruction in it will not merge. But, if the
Name is missing but the opcode is used by another instruction, the “XXXX instruction has been
replaced by XXXX instruction” is written to the log file.
If the DX name is the same but opcode is different, then it is written to the log file: “XXXX
instruction has different opcode.” The user must manually update any network with this instruction
in it.

Merge Logic Headers Check Box

This check box is initially checked. Merging of header is destructive to the target program because
all existing headers are overwritten. Only Segment headers for Segments that are merged get copied
to the target program according to the ladder range. Also, only network headers for copied
networks are merged.

Merge Address Documentation Check Box

This check box is initially checked. Merging of Address Documentation is destructive to the target
program because all duplicate addresses in target are overwritten. All addresses in the source that
have documentation are merged to the target program.

Error Log Text File

The Error Log file name and path must be entered before starting the merge. The user can type the
name and path in the edit box or use the browse button. The browse button opens up the
Windows common open dialog.

60
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Using WorkShop with FTVersionTrak

PLC WorkShop integrates seamlessly with FTVersionTrak, FasTrak's powerful file change
management software.
FTVersionTrak safeguards your valuable work in progress, preserves previous versions of files, and
stores files in a safe place. If for some reason you lose a file or it becomes corrupt, you can retrieve
a previous version of the file from the FTVersionTrak repository. FTVersionTrak also details
version histories, allows electronic signatures, organizes files, and more.
You can be sure no one else is editing a file when you store it in FTVersionTrak because only one
person at a time can check out the file, making it read-only to other users. You can view checked
out copies of files by getting them from FTVersionTrak.
FTVersionTrak recognizes whether or not a file is being edited and by whom, so team members
can work on a program concurrently without overwriting each others' work. As long as each
programmer is using the same FTVersionTrak database, all team members can see each other's
changes in a program.
Programmers in a single-user environment can also benefit from using FTVersionTrak. Using
FTVersionTrak is beneficial for single users who want to centralize their programs onto a secure
server. FTVersionTrak also provides revision tracking and file state transitioning throughout the life
of the program, which is beneficial to both single-user and team programming environments.
If you are not currently using FTVersionTrak to safeguard your PLC programs, visit www.fast-
soft.com to download a demo or contact Sales at [email protected] for more information.

61
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Getting Started with FTVersionTrak

If you are using FTVersionTrak to protect and manage your WorkShop files for the first time,
follow these steps to begin.
To get started using FTVersionTrak with WorkShop:
1. Check with your network or systems administrator to address issues such as access rights,
user accounts, etc. If you are the network or systems administrator, review the
Administrator Guide in the FTVersionTrak manual.
2. One user adds an existing program (or creates a new program and adds it) to the
FTVersionTrak repository by clicking the icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar.
3. Other users get the file from the repository by launching FTVersionTrak, highlighting the
file, and either selecting the Version \ Get Latest Version or clicking the toolbar
icon.
4. If multiple programmers will be working on the same programs at the same time, see Tips
and Strategies for Team Programming. These strategies will help everyone involved use
FTVersionTrak in the same way.
5. Begin using WorkShop like you normally would, by opening, editing, saving, and closing
the program files. FTVersionTrak's seamless integration automates the version control
process.
6. Read FAQs about FTVersionTrak and Using FTVersionTrak in WorkShop for more
information. Also see Operation Modes in FTVersionTrak.

62
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Using FTVersionTrak in WorkShop

Certain aspects of the WorkShop environment are different when your WorkShop program is being
protected by FTVersionTrak. Most differences occur automatically when opening and closing
WorkShop files. All other version control features can be accessed using the FTVersionTrak
toolbar.
You can change the way FTVersionTrak behaves within WorkShop by selecting the Options \
Application Setup WorkShop menu item. The Application Setup dialog lists options specifically
for FTVersionTrak in the FTVersionTrak Options group box.

Select the Ask to Check In File After Save check box to prompt the user to check in a program
whenever the file is saved. See Saving WorkShop Files for more information.

Select the List Files Checked Out on This Computer at Startup check box to display a list of
files checked out whenever you launch WorkShop.

63
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

FTVersionTrak Toolbar
The FTVersionTrak toolbar displays a row of icons that represent version control options available
in WorkShop. View the FTVersionTrak toolbar by selecting the View \ Toolbars \
FTVersionTrak Toolbar menu item.

Icon Function

Connect to FTVersionTrak repository

and add active program

Get a version of active program file and

place it into your working directory

Check out active program

Check in active program

Undo checkout of active program

Compare working copy of active

program to version in repository

View version history of active program

Electronically sign active program

Launch FTVersionTrak

64
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Adding Files to the FTVersionTrak Repository

Before FTVersionTrak can begin securing your program files, they must be added to the
FTVersionTrak repository. The repository is a secure, compressed database that exists apart from
you local file system. This database keeps track of any changes made to the files added to it, as well
as securing them from accidental or unauthorized deletion or removal.
To add a WorkShop file to the FTVersionTrak repository:
1. Open the program file in WorkShop.

2. Click the icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar. The Bind File to Repository dialog
appears.

3. Click the Browse button in the Repository group box. The Browse for Repository
dialog appears.

65
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

4. If an FTVersionTrak database exists on the local machine, it appears in the Server text
box. If this is the database you would like to use, skip to Step 6. If no database exists, or
to select another database, click the Browse button. The Browse for Server dialog
appears.

5. Click the Find button to search for all available database servers. Select the desired
database from the list and click OK to return to the Browse for Repository dialog. If
you still cannot find the database you are looking for, see you system administrator or
consult the FTVersionTrak manual.
6. Select the Login to Server Manually check box to force a manual login to the server. Use
this option if a different user usually logs in automatically and the login needs to be
changed.
7. Select the repository you want to add the file to from the list of Available Repositories
and click OK. If the desired repository does not appear in the list, click the Find button
to search for all repositories available in the selected database. If you still cannot find the
repository you are looking for, see your system administrator or consult the
FTVersionTrak manual.
8. After selecting the repository, the Repository Login dialog appears.

66
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Select the preferred authentication type from the Authentication combo box:
ƒ Windows Authentication - This option utilizes the local Microsoft Windows user
accounts to log on to the server. If this option is selected, the user currently logged
in to Windows will appear in the Username text box. No password is necessary,
and the login information cannot be edited.
ƒ SQL Authentication - This option uses the login information located on the
server itself. Selecting this option will prompt for both a username and password.
See your system administrator for more information.
Click OK to continue.
9. Click the Browse button in the Location group box. The Select Repository Folder
dialog appears.

10. Select the repository folder you would like to add the program file to and click OK to
return to the Add File to Repository dialog.
11. Click OK in the Add File to Repository dialog. The file is added to FTVersionTrak.

67
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Getting Versions of a File

The Get action retrieves a version of the active program from the repository and places it in your
working directory as a read-only copy to review or check out.
To get a version of the active WorkShop program:

1. Click the icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar. The Get dialog appears.

2. Select the options of the version you would like to get in the Version group box:
ƒ Selecting the Latest Version radio button places the latest version of the file into
your working directory.
ƒ Selecting the Version radio button allows you to choose the version you would
like to get.
ƒ Selecting the Latest Version of State radio button allows you to choose a version
with a particular repository file state.
ƒ Selecting the Labeled Version radio button allows you to choose a version with a
particular label.
2. In the To: text box, enter the directory in which to place the working copy or click
Browse to locate the desired directory. If a working directory has been set, it appears in
the text box. If a working directory has not been set, the text box appears as blank.
3. Select the Overwrite working copies check box to automatically overwrite any files
located within the directory assigned in the To: text box with the Get target files of the
same name.
4. Select the Make Writable check box to remove the read-only status from the program file.
NOTE: Making working copies writeable is not recommended for files you wish to keep under
version control. Do not select this option if you plan on checking out and editing the
file.
5. Click OK when finished. A version of the file is placed in the selected directory.

68
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

NOTE: If the path selected in the To: text box is the same as the path of the active program
file, the active file will be overwritten even if the Overwrite working copies check box
is not selected. If you proceed to overwrite the active program file, the program will exit
and any existing changes will be lost. You must open the program again to continue.

69
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Checking Out Files

To make changes to your WorkShop program using FTVersionTrak, it must first be checked out.
Checking out a file places a writeable copy of the file within the user's working directory. If the file
is already present in the working directory (following a Get action, for example) then
FTVersionTrak removes the read-only status on the file while it is checked out.

1. Click the icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar. The Check Out dialog appears.

2. In the To: text box, enter the directory in which to place the working copy or click
Browse to locate the desired directory. If a working directory has been set, it appears in
the text box. If a working directory has not been set, the text box appears as blank.
3. Select the Do not get local copy check box if you do not wish to get the version of the
repository file while checking the file out.
NOTE: Using the Do not get local copy option only checks out the file. This is helpful if
your working copy is different than the latest version within FTVersionTrak.
4. If desired, enter a comment about the check out within the Comment text box. This
comment may be edited when the file or folder is checked in. Click OK when finished.
After checking out a file or folder, the following options are available:
ƒ Check In the file or folder to write any edits to FTVersionTrak and create a new
version.
ƒ Undo the Check Out to cancel any changes made to the file or folder.

70
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Checking In Files
Check in the program file to write changes to the master copy located in the FTVersionTrak
repository. After you check the file in, other users will be able to Get the modified file, view the
changes you have made to the file, and check out the file to work on it as well.

To check in the active WorkShop file:

1. Click the icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar. The Check In dialog appears.

2. In the Comment text box, type a comment for the check in (optional). If a comment was
entered during checkout, it will appear by default in the text box. Select the Use
Checkout Comment check box to use this comment.
3. The From: text box will display the local path that the new version will be written from
(usually the working directory). Click Browse to navigate to a different directory.
4. Select the Keep checked out check box to write any changes to the repository but keep
the program checked out to you.
5. Select the Delete local copy check box to remove the working copy on your local system
after the check in.
6. Click the Compare button to compare the difference between the version being checked
in and another version in the repository.
7. Click OK when finished to check in the items.

71
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Undoing a Check Out

Undo the check out if you decide not to save any changes to the repository or create a new version
of the WorkShop program. Undoing a checkout leaves the file in the state it was in before you
checked it out. No new version is created, and no record of the checkout will be left.

To undo a check out of the active WorkShop program:

1. Click the icon in the FTVersionTrak toolbar. The Undo Check Out dialog appears.

2. Select a Local Copy option:

ƒ Select Replace to replace the local copy of the checked out file with the latest
version within the repository.
ƒ Select Leave to leave the existing copy of the checked out file on your local
system.
ƒ Select Delete to delete the local copy from the location of the check out. If the file
was checked out to a location other than the working directory, the location
indicated at check out will be deleted and any other copies will be retained.
3. Click OK when finished to return to the main window.

72
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Comparing WorkShop Files

One of the most useful features of FTVersionTrak is the ability to compare the contents of two
WorkShop files to each other. Within WorkShop, you may compare two different versions of the
same WorkShop program to each other, or compare a version in the FTVersionTrak repository to
the working copy on your local hard drive.
To compare the working copy of the active WorkShop program to the latest version in the
repository:

1. Click the icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar. The Compare Files dialog appears.

2. Click OK to view the file compare results. See the FTVersionTrak documentation for more
information on file compare results.
To compare the difference between two version of the active WorkShop program:

1. Click the icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar. The History dialog appears.

2. Highlight the first version of the file you would like to compare. Hold down the [Ctrl] key
and select the second version of the file you would like to compare. Click the Compare
button. The Compare Files dialog appears.

73
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

ƒ The check box options apply only to text file comparison and can be ignored when
comparing WorkShop files.
3. Click OK to view the file compare results. See the FTVersionTrak documentation for more
information on file compare results.
NOTE: Clicking the Compare button without selecting more than one version will compare
the selected version to the working copy. Clicking the Compare button without
selecting any version will compare the latest version to the working copy.

74
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Viewing File History

Each WorkShop file that is managed by FTVersionTrak is given its own history. As you check out,
edit, and check in your programs, the history is updated to reflect these changes. Viewing history is
the best way to get a clear picture of the changes a program has gone through.
To view the active WorkShop program's version history:

1. Click the icon in the FTVersionTrak toolbar. The History dialog appears.

2. The History dialog displays all the version information of the selected file. Each version
displayed in the History dialog contains the following information:
ƒ Version - The version number of the listed version.
ƒ Username - The name of the user that created the listed version.
ƒ Date - The date and time the listed version was added to the repository.
ƒ State - The version state of the file when it was added to the repository.
ƒ Comment - The contents of the optional comment created when the file was
checked in.
3. The following two optional version histories may be viewed by selecting the appropriate
check boxes at the bottom of the History dialog:
ƒ Show Labels - Select this option to display any associated labels with the
repository file. Each label will appear as a separate version of the file, with the tag
"Label" substituted for the version number.
ƒ Show Electronic Signatures - Select this option to display any associated
electronic signatures with the repository file. Each signature will appear as a
separate version of the file, with the tag "Signature" substituted for the version
number.
4. The buttons on the right side of the History dialog are used to manage a file's history:
ƒ Close - Closes the History dialog and returns to the main window.

75
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

ƒ Compare - Selecting a version and clicking the Compare button will compare the
selected version with the copy in the user's working directory. Selecting two
versions and clicking the Compare button will compare the two versions to each
other.
ƒ View - Launches the application associated with the selected version, and opens
the version of the file within the application as a read-only document.
ƒ Get - Retrieves the selected version of the file to the user's local working directory.
ƒ Report - Generates a history report of the selected repository file.
ƒ Rollback - Reverts the most recent version of the repository file to the selected
version. Rollback is only available if the file has more than one version, and can
only be selected when a version other than the latest version is selected.
ƒ Sign - Electronically signs the selected version of the file, and allows the option to
change the version state.
ƒ Properties - View the properties of the selected version, and allows the option to
change the version comment.

76
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Electronically Signing WorkShop Files

Electronic signatures can be used as an approval method to verify that a certain user has seen a
selected version of a repository file, and can also be used to advance the version state of the
repository file. FTVersionTrak's electronic signatures are approved by portions of the 21 CFR Part
11 Standard.

To electronically sign the active WorkShop program:

1. Click the icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar. The Sign Document dialog appears.

2. The File and Username text boxes are filled with the selected file and current user,
respectively. Type the current user's password in the Password text box.
3. Select the current version state of the file from the State combo box and type any
comments in the Comment text box (optional).
4. Click OK when finished to return to the main window.

77
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Launching FTVersionTrak
Some version control tasks cannot be performed using the FTVersionTrak toolbar. These tasks
may include:
ƒ Getting repository files for the first time
ƒ Renaming repository files
ƒ Deleting repository files
ƒ Moving and sharing repository files
ƒ Setting up server and repository security
ƒ Setting up and viewing audit logs
ƒ Scheduling automated tasks
You must perform these types of functions in the stand-alone FTVersionTrak application.
To launch FTVersionTrak from within WorkShop:

1. Click the icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar. The FTVersionTrak application

appears.

2. Connect to an FTVersionTrak repository by selecting the File \ Connect to Repository

menu item or by clicking the toolbar icon.
3. See the FTVersionTrak documentation for more information about FTVersionTrak's
advanced features.

78
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Opening WorkShop Files

Once a WorkShop file has been added to the FTVersionTrak repository and the latest version
placed in your working directory, FTVersionTrak's seamless integration automates the version
control process. Follow this simple procedure when opening WorkShop files protected by
FTVersionTrak for best results:
1. After launching WorkShop, open the program by selecting the File \ Open menu item or

by clicking the toolbar icon. The Open Program dialog appears.

2. Click the Browse button and browse for the file. The file should be located in the directory
specified in the get operation. Select the file and click Open. Click OK in the Open
Program dialog. A repository login dialog appears.

3. Enter your login information (the administrator will provide you with this information, if
needed) and click OK.

79
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

4. FTVersionTrak compares your version of the program with the version stored in the
repository. If a newer version of the program is available, a message appears, allowing you
to get the latest version.

Click Yes to get the latest version. Click No to open the older version of the program.
5. FTVersionTrak then verifies the check out status of the file. If the file is checked out to
you, it opens normally. If not, a message appears, allowing you to check out the file.

Click Yes to check out the file. Click No to open the file without checking it out. The
program opens in WorkShop.
NOTE: If the program is already checked out by another user, FTVersionTrak will prevent you
from checking out and editing the program. The program will open in a read-only state
and changes will not be saved.
6. After the program opens, the FTVersionTrak toolbar becomes active. The actions available
using the FTVersionTrak toolbar pertain to the active program.

80
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Saving WorkShop Files

Edits to WorkShop files protected by FTVersionTrak are not complete until they have been saved
and checked in. WorkShop automates this process to prevent accidental loss of changes to the
program. The process below illustrates the various scenarios a user encounters when attempting to
save a WorkShop file protected by FTVersionTrak.

Saving a WorkShop File That Has Not Been Checked Out

If you attempt to save a file that is tracked by FTVersionTrak, but not checked out, then you will be
prompted to check out the file.

Clicking Yes displays the Check Out dialog. After the file is checked out, WorkShop saves the file.
NOTE: Depending on the FTVersionTrak Options set in WorkShop, available by selecting
the Options \ Application Setup WorkShop menu item, you may be prompted to
check in the file after it has been saved. Otherwise, you can check in the file by clicking
the icon in the FTVersionTrak toolbar.
If you click No, the Save As dialog appears. If the file is not checked out, you must save the file
with a different filename to keep any changes made to the file.

Saving a WorkShop File That is Currently Checked Out

When you choose to save a program that is checked out to you, WorkShop can also check in the
file for you automatically. Selecting the Options \ Application Setup menu item in WorkShop
displays the FTVersionTrak Options available in WorkShop. Selecting the Ask to Check In File
After Save check box displays the following message after each save:

Clicking Yes displays the Check In dialog. After the file is checked in, WorkShop keeps the file
checked out to you so that you may continue editing the program. Clicking No saves the working
copy on your computer but does not write any changes to the FTVersionTrak repository. The file
can be checked in manually by clicking the icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar.

81
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Closing WorkShop Files

The procedure to close a WorkShop file is slightly different when the file is protected by
FTVersionTrak. Depending on the file's status, FTVersionTrak offers a number of different
options to the user to prevent the loss of data.

Closing Programs that are Checked Out

If the program file being closed is checked out to the current user, FTVersionTrak displays a
prompt suggesting the file be checked in.

Click Yes to display the Check In dialog. After the file is checked in, the file closes normally. Click
No to close the file, leaving it checked out.
NOTE: If the file contains edits that have not been saved, WorkShop will prompt the user to
save file before continuing.

Closing Programs that are Checked In

If a program file being closed has been checked in and no edits remain pending, the file closes
normally. However, if the file being closed is checked in (or has not yet been checked out) and edits
have been made to the program that have not yet been saved, WorkShop will not immediately close
the program.
WorkShop first prompts the user to save the file.

Click No to lose any unsaved changes and close the program. Click Cancel to cancel the save and
keep the program open. Click Yes to save the file. WorkShop then prompts the user to check out
the file.

82
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Click No to display the Save As dialog and save the file to another file name. Click Yes to display
the Check Out dialog. Once the file has been checked out, Workshop prompts the user to check
the file back in to the repository.

Click No to close the program without writing any changes to the repository. The file is still
checked out to the user. Click Yes to write changes to the repository and close the program.

83
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Operation Modes in FTVersionTrak

There are three distinct modes in which WorkShop can operate in regards to the FTVersionTrak
functionality.
ƒ Not Tracked – The file is not tracked by an FTVersionTrak repository.
ƒ Connected – The file is tracked by an FTVersionTrak repository, and a connection to the
repository is maintained by WorkShop.
ƒ Disconnected – The file is tracked by an FTVersionTrak repository, but the connection is
unavailable.
Following is a table that lists the available functions in the FTVersionTrak toolbar based on the
operation mode of an active WorkShop file.

Operation Not Tracked Connected Disconnected

Add to Repository -- --

Get Latest Version -- --

Check Out File --

*

Check In File -- --

Undo Check Out -- --

Compare Files

View History -- --

Electronically Sign -- --

Launch
FTVersionTrak

*Disconnected files can still be checked out to a user and edited even if a connection to the
repository cannot be made. As long as the file was checked out by the user at a time when the user
could connect to the repository, the file remains checked out to the user in disconnected mode. The
file can be edited as if it were checked out, and can be checked in once a connection to the
repository can be established.

84
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

FAQs about FTVersionTrak

What do I need to do to get started?

See Getting Started with FTVersionTrak for more information.

How does FTVersionTrak's version control work?

FTVersionTrak integrates seamlessly with WorkShop to track who is editing program files. When
you want to work on a program (and another user isn't working on it), the program file is checked
out from FTVersionTrak. You can also simply view programs in WorkShop without checking them
out and get the latest changes from other users.

When you are done working on a program, you can check the file into FTVersionTrak manually or
allow WorkShop to check in the program file when you close the program. Once your changes are
checked in to FTVersionTrak, other users can get or check out the file and access your changes.

What can you do with programs under version control?

ƒ Check out and edit program files without worrying about concurrent or overwritten
changes.
ƒ View the latest version of a program file while another user has it checked out.
ƒ Get the latest changes to program files made by other users after they check in their files.
ƒ Set version control options from within WorkShop and perform other version control
tasks, such as viewing version history. (Performing version control tasks on your programs
outside of WorkShop is possible but not recommended.)
ƒ View the version control status of any program file, such as whether the file is checked out.

How do I use FTVersionTrak with multiple programmers working on the same program?

See Tips and Strategies for Team Programming for more information.

85
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Can I use FTVersionTrak for single-user programs?

Yes. We recommend that single-user programs utilize FTVersionTrak's version control features
even if they are not programming in a team environment. Using FTVersionTrak is beneficial for
single users who want to centralize their programs onto a secure server. FTVersionTrak also
provides revision tracking and file state transitioning throughout the life of the program, which is
beneficial to both single-user and team programming environments.

Where can I set options for how FTVersionTrak works with WorkShop?

Select the Options \ Application Setup menu item in WorkShop to view the available options for
changing the way FTVersionTrak behaves in WorkShop.

Do I ever need to open the FTVersionTrak application outside of WorkShop?

Yes, if you are using FTVersionTrak for the first time and need to Get the latest version of a
WorkShop file from the FTVersionTrak repository. Also, to set up security, rights, and audit logs,
you or your administrator need to do so from within the FTVersionTrak application (see the
FTVersionTrak manual for more information). You can launch FTVersionTrak from within
WorkShop by clicking the icon in the FTVersionTrak toolbar.

Do I need to check out the program file to open the program?

There is no need to check out the file to simply view the program in WorkShop. However, the
program file must be checked out to you if you plan on making any changes to the program.

How do I make sure I'm working on the latest version of a program?

Once the file has been checked in, you can get the latest version of a program when you open the
program in WorkShop. You can also get the latest version of any specific program manually by
clicking the icon in the FTVersionTrak toolbar.

86
 3 – PLC WorkShop Basics

Tips and Strategies for Team Programming

When working in a team environment, creating a strategy that every team member is comfortable
with is necessary to produce the most effective results. For successful team programming, use these
example strategies along with the steps outlined in Getting Started with FTVersionTrak to develop
your own team's version control strategies. Advantages and disadvantages of each strategy are
given. Use some or all of these strategies together, along with your own, to achieve your team's
goals.
ƒ Create and manage user accounts, access rights and repository security. A system
administrator or team manager can implement this strategy to prevent access conflicts and
overwritten changes. This strategy takes advantage of the multiple levels of security
FTVersionTrak has to offer.
ƒ Create repositories for specific users. This strategy assures consistent usage and access
among team members. The advantage of this strategy is that it is clear which files each
team member is responsible for. Team managers can oversee the changes made by each
user by accessing that user's repository.
ƒ Develop a task checklist. Create a daily, weekly, or monthly task list that outlines specific
version control tasks to be accomplished, such as checking in files, getting the latest
version, and electronically signing documents, as well as standardizing steps for audits and
reviews of changes made. The advantage of this strategy is that all team members will
have a good idea of what kinds of changes are being made, so it is less likely that
undesired changes will occur.
ƒ Keep critical programs checked out. Keeping a file checked out prevents all other users
from being able to make changes to the file. Use this feature to your advantage with your
most sensitive programs by keeping them checked out to a privileged account or user.
Any necessary changes must be made by that account, and can be written to the
FTVersionTrak database without checking the file back in. Other users can view the latest
changes at any time but are unable to make changes themselves.

87
4 - PLC WorkShop Setup
Overview
This chapter covers:
Program Setup Customize the way PLC WorkShop handles a PLC program
Application Customize several features of PLC WorkShop that apply
Setup regardless of the PLC program
Communications Tell PLC WorkShop how the computer is connected to the PLC
Setup
Printer Setup Select and configure the printer
Page Setup Configure the layout of each page of a report
Fast PLC Setup Set up communication parameters for the Fast PLC Connection
function

Program Setup
Program Setup reveals different sets of tabs governing a project’s layout and appearance.
These settings are saved with the program; thus, each time the program is opened, preferences do
not need to be reset.

89
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Application Setup
The Application Setup dialog allows you to configure several parameters that are not tied to any
one PLC program.
To configure the Application Setup parameters:
1. Select the Options/Application Setup menu item. The Application Setup dialog
appears.

Number of Backup Files Saved: Configure the number of backup files to keep.
Application Ladder Symbol Library: Select the symbol library to be used when displaying or
printing ladder logic. See the section entitled Symbols for details.
Automatically Check for Software Updates at Startup: If this box is checked, and there is an
open Web connection, when WorkShop opens it checks the FasTrak SoftWorks website for new
versions of WorkShop.

90
 4 – PLC WorkShop Setup

Enable Fast PLC Connection: If this box is checked, the toolbar icon and the File/Fast
PLC Connect and File/Fast PLC Setup menu items are enabled. If this box is not selected,
online access without a file will be denied from the Open dialog.
FTVersionTrak Options: Options related to using PLC WorkShop with FTVersionTrak file
change management software.
Online Access Mode: Select the default access mode, which controls whether logic in the PLC
can be edited or only viewed.
Floating Documentation Window: If the box is checked, the floating documentation window
shows documentation (Description, or Tag, Description, and Comment depending on the option
selected) for the address on which the cursor is located.
Force File Associated Communications Settings: This setting forces the user to connect to the
PLC using the communication settings associated with the file. See the section titled File Associated
Communication Settings for more information.

Communications Setup
The Communications Setup dialog allows you to configure the way your computer is connected
to PLCs.
To access the Communications Setup dialog:
1. Select the File/Communications Setup menu option.

2. Select the option button for the PLC communication method to be used.
3. Configure the details for that communication method by clicking the appropriate button.
NOTE: The settings for the Fast PLC Connection function are set using the Fast PLC Setup
dialog. Changing the settings here has no effect on the Fast PLC settings.

Serial or Modem Communication

To configure your serial port or modem connection with a PLC:

91
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

1. From the Communications Setup dialog box, click the Serial Ports button, and the
Settings for Serial Ports and Modem dialog box appears.

2. Select the appropriate setting for each option in the dialog box.
o Serial Port: Specifies the computers serial port for PLC communications
(COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4).
o Protocol: Specifies the transmission mode. The communications mode
toggles between RTU and ASCII.
o Response T.O. (sec): Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the
software waits for a response from the PLC before returning a time-out
error. Any whole number between 5 and 25 can be used.
o Retries: specifies the number of times the software will try to re-establish
communications with the PLC after a time-out error. Any whole number
between 0 and 10 can be used. Use 0 for no retries.
o Baud Rate: Is the rate of communications between the computer and
PLC.
o BM85-Network: Select NO if you are not communicating via a BM85
Bridge/MUX or modem. Select YES to set a two-minute response timeout
for applications using a Bridge/MUX or modem.
o Dial Modem: Is checked if the selected form of serial communications is
through a modem. The modem parameters must be set to exactly the same
communication parameters that you will use. Use the following modem
parameters: eight bits, no parity, one-stop bit, and the highest baud rate that
your equipment will support.
o Terminal Mode: This mode is specified in the serial communication setup
under the modem group box. This mode exist for a user who need to
converse (communicate back and forth) to a modem device before the PLC
can be accessed. The “Attach Terminal Mode” check box can only be
accessed if the “Dial Modem” check box is checked.

92
 4 – PLC WorkShop Setup

The dialog comes up on an online attach when Attach Terminal Mode has been checked in
the Serial Port settings. Text typed in to the Send Text edit box is sent to the modem after an
Enter or carriage return.
Currently:
The sent text is not displayed (echoed) in the list box, only responses from the modem.
All carriage returns from modem cause a new line in list box.
All line feeds are ignored in text to list box.
For text from modem to be displayed it must end in a carriage return.
Pressing the End Terminal Mode button ends the mode and attempts to attach to the PLC
previously chosen.
Telephone Dialing: Specifies which type of dialing to use. Specify pulse dialing only if this is the
only type your phone line supports.
Initialization Command: Are initialization commands sent to the modem. Consult your modem
manual for a list of appropriate commands.
Number to Dial: Specifies the phone number to be dialed. The number format can be dashes
(262-238-8088), spaces (262 238 8088), periods (262.238.8088) or none (2622388088). Commas (,)
can be used if a pause is needed to gain access to an outside line before the number is dialed.
Example. If 9 is used to gain access to an outside line and there is a pause between the time 9 is
pressed and a dial tone. The number entered should be 9,262-238-8088.
Path Description: Specifies a 32-character alphanumeric label for the controller Modbus address.
To enter a Modbus address and a Path Description, click the ADD button and entering a Modbus
address (1-247) and a 32-character alphanumeric label/path description.
3. Click OK or press [Enter] to accept the settings. Click Cancel to disregard changes
and return to the Communications Setup dialog box.

Interface Boards
To configure a SA85 interface board for communication with Modicon PLCs:
1. From the Communications Setup dialog box, click SA85 and the Settings for
Interface Boards dialog box appears.

93
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

2. Select the appropriate setting for each option in the dialog box.
NOTE: This number must correspond to the value specified for the SA85 board in the DOS
operating system CONFIG.SYS file.
o Response T.O.: The response timeout is the amount of time the PLC
WORKSHOP program waits for a response from the controller before returning a
timeout error. Valid values range from 0 to 25 seconds.
o BM85-Network: Select NO if you are not communicating via a BM85
Bridge/MUX or modem. Select YES to set a two-minute response timeout for
applications using a Bridge/MUX or modem.
o LAN Adapter: Specifies the Local Area Network (LAN) adapter number assigned
to the SA85 board you are using. If you have multiple SA85 boards installed, each
must have a unique LAN adapter number. Valid values range from 0 to 9.
o Routing Path: Specifies the network location of the PLC you want to
communicate with. Each set of three integers can be a value from 1 to 247 and
identifies a Modbus Plus address. The last address specified is the PLC selected for
communications. Any preceding addresses specify the communications path that
leads to the desired PLC. To access the routing path, click the ADD button and
entering a routing address (0-247in the form of X.X.X.X.X) and a 32-character
label/path description.
NOTE: This number must correspond to the value specified for the SA85 board in the DOS
operating system CONFIG.SYS file.
3. Click OK or press [Enter] to accept the settings. Click Cancel to disregard changes
and return to the Communications Setup dialog box.
4. Click Close in the Communications Setup dialog box when you are finished to return
to the active logic window.
NOTE: The communication setup options for each communication port are stored in the
FASTRAK.INI file located in your Windows directory.

Connect Your PC to Ethernet

Your system administrator must determine what type of cable is best suited for your installation
because it affects your choice of Ethernet card for your PC.
In order to communicate to a Modicon PLC, which is connected to a TCP/IP network, a TCP/IP
stack needs to be installed on your Windows machine. Windows 95 and Windows NT ship with a
TCP/IP stack - WINSOCK.DLL.
If TCP/IP is not listed under the protocol section of your network settings, it needs to be added.
You may be asked to insert a Windows disk or CD-ROM. After it has been added, click on
properties and enter an IP address, subnet mask, and possibly a default gateway. See your network
administrator for more information on these fields if you are not sure what to enter. Every machine
on your network must have a unique IP address.

94
 4 – PLC WorkShop Setup

TCP/IP Communication Settings

To configure your interface board port for communication with a PLC:
1. From the Communications Setup dialog box, click the TCP/IP button and the
TCP/IP Setup dialog box appears.

2. 2. From the Communications Settings section of the TCP/IP Setup dialog box, click
the Modify button. The Communication Settings dialog box will appear.

3. Enter a unique IP Port protocol number, the response Timeout, and number of Retries.
Then click the Accept button.
o IP Port: Any number is acceptable as long as it does not interfere with
other protocol numbers.
o Response T.O. (sec): Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that
the software waits for a response from the PLC before returning a
time-out error. Any whole number between 5 and 25 can be used.
o Retries: Specifies the number of times the software will try to re-
establish communications with the PLC after a time-out error. Any
whole number between 0 and 10 can be used. Use 0 for no retries.

95
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

IP Addresses
1. From the IP Addresses section of the TCP/IP Setup dialog box, click the ADD button
to enter a new IP address, or select an existing IP address and click the Modify button to
change the IP information. The IP Addresses dialog box appears.

NOTE: The PLC WorkShop allows 1,000 different IP Addresses and Path Descriptions.
2. Enter the IP Address for the associated Interface Board. An IP Address is a 32-bit value
that is divided into four 8-bit fields; each separated by a period. For example, 192.3.2.1 is
an IP Address. Each computer on a network has a unique IP Address. You should
consult your network administrator for the correct IP Addresses for your computer and
board.
3. Enter the IP Address Path Description. A Path Description is a 32-character
alphanumeric label for the IP Address.
4. Enter the Bridge MBP Index as described in the Modicon Modbus plus to TCP/IP manual.
5. Click OK or press [Enter] to accept the settings. Click Cancel to disregard changes
and return to the TCP/IP Setup dialog box.

Network Scan
The Network Scan function finds controllers, bridges, bridge multiplexers, and other devices
attached to Modbus, Modbus Plus, TCP/IP or Applicom network. PLC WorkShop displays the
devices it finds by their address number, and also shows their type and mode status.
To scan the network for devices:
1. From the Modbus Comm, TCP/IP, SA85, or Applicom Access dialog box, click Net
Scan. WorkShop begins to search for devices. While WorkShop is scanning, you can:
o Click Stop to stop the scan when WorkShop finds and displays the device
you want.
o Type in a Channel number, then press Scan to start a scan at a particular
Channel number.
o Click Scan to rescan the network.
2. To select a device, double-click its image, or select the image and then click the Attach
button.
You can see between 10 and 15 devices in the Net Scan dialog box at any given time. If there are
more than 15 devices you can use the scroll bar to view the rest. To see the leaves of a branch
network double click on the branch and the leaves will appear.

96
 4 – PLC WorkShop Setup

Fast PLC Setup

The Fast PLC Setup dialog allows the computer/PLC connection to be configured for use with
the Fast PLC Connection function.
To set up the Fast PLC Connection:
1. Select the File/Fast PLC Setup menu item. The Fast PLC Connection Setup dialog
appears.

2. Select the option button for the PLC communication method to be used.
3. Configure the details for that communication method by clicking the appropriate button.
The connection options for Fast PLC Connection are stored in the system registry. If Fast PLC
Connection is attempted, and the Fast PLC setup has not been configured, the Fast PLC
Connection Setup window will automatically display before continuing. To prevent connection by
Fast PLC, this dialog may be disabled by deselecting the Enable Fast PLC Connection check box
in the Application Setup dialog. The Application Setup dialog is accessed through the Options /
Application Setup menu item.
NOTE: The settings for the Open function are configured using the Communications Setup
dialog. Changing the settings for Fast PLC Connection has no effect on the Open settings. Files
cannot be loaded with Fast PLC Connection. To load a file online, use the Open Program
dialog, which is accessed through the File menu.

File Associated Communications

When a file is successfully loaded online in WorkShop, the communication settings are associated
with the file so the next time a user wishes to go online with the same file, WorkShop will default to
these settings. Communication settings associations are made by writing a block of data to a binary
file with the extension *.FTRF (FasTrak Route Format), located in the same folder as WorkShop.
The next time a user loads a WorkShop program file, the associated communication settings appear
in the Open Program dialog.

97
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Select the Use File Associated Connection Settings check box to accept the connection method
associated with the file, or click Setup to view or edit Communication Settings.
NOTE: Selecting Force File Associated Communications Settings in Application Setup will force
the user to connect with the saved settings.

98
 4 – PLC WorkShop Setup

Printer Setup
Use Print Setup to select a printer and determine where and how your printouts appear.
To access the Print Setup:
1. Start or open a logic program.
2. Select Print Setup from the File menu. The Print Setup dialog box appears.

3. Choose a printer or device from the drop down box.

4. Additional setup options may be available depending on the printer you selected. If a
Properties button is available, click it and another dialog box appears. Make your
selections and select the OK button to return to the Print Setup dialog box.
5. Other options in the Print Setup dialog box include Orientation and Paper Source. Click
the desired settings.
6. Click OK in the Print Setup dialog box to save your settings and return to the active logic
window.
NOTE: The print setup options can also be accessed from the Print box that appears after
selecting Print from the File menu.

99
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Page Setup
Use Page Setup to select page margins, starting page number and whether to include a Title page in
your printout.
To access the Page Setup:
1. Start or open a logic program.
2. Select Print or Print Preview from the File menu. The Print or Print Preview dialog
appears.
3. Click the Page Setup button. The Page Setup dialog box appears.

4. Enter the desired margins in inches.

5. If you would like to start your printout with a page number other than 1, change the
Starting Page number.
6. To include a title page, showing the program name, date, and time, select Yes in the Print
Title Page drop-down list.
7. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog.

100
 4 – PLC WorkShop Setup

Page Setup for Output to Text File

Use Page Setup to define the page size and printer codes, starting page number and whether to
include a Title page in your text file output.
To access the Page Setup for Output to Text File:
1. Start or open a logic program.
2. Select the File/Output to Text File menu option. The Print Output to Text File dialog
appears.
3. Click the Page Setup button. The Page Setup dialog box appears.

4. Set the parameters:

o Print Title Page - To include a title page, showing the program name, date,
and time, select Yes.
o Carriage Width - Select 80 or 132 characters from the drop-down list. These
are the standard carriage widths. Other carriage widths may be typed.
o Extended ASCII - Select No to use standard ASCII, Yes to use extended
ASCII. The main difference is that standard ASCII does not include line-
drawing characters, and uses ‘-‘, ‘+’, and ‘|’ instead.
o Print Form Feed - Select Yes to use a form feeds to end a page. Select No to
use carriage returns.
o Starting Page - Enter the page number for the first page in the report. Must
be a number greater than 0.
o Lines per Page - Enter the number of lines per page. This number
determines how much information can be printed on a page. If Print Form
Feed is set to No, this number must be precise because it is also used for page
alignment. This number includes lines for page headers and footers.
o Printer Codes - Enter the printer-specific codes for each function. Refer to
your printer manual for details.

101
5 - FasTrak Authentication and NT Security
Overview
The WorkShop Password Security feature allows one or more security administrators to maintain
a list of users and their access privileges. Access privileges restrict which functions of the
application (such as online and offline editing, I/O forcing, loading, saving changes to disk, and so
on) that individual users can perform.

Choosing a Security Type

PLC WorkShop for Modicon 32-bit offers two unique security systems for use. To activate the
security features of PLC WorkShop, select the Options/Security/Administrator Options menu
item as illustrated below.

If PLC WorkShop is running under Windows 95, 98, or ME, the Password Required dialog
appears as illustrated below. This dialog appears after having chosen a security type for the first
time and allows the user to become the first security administrator.

If the computer on which PLC WorkShop is installed is running under Windows NT, 2000, or XP,
PLC WorkShop determines if the user currently logged in to the operating system is an
administrator (or belongs to the Administrator group). If the user already belongs to the
Administrator’s group, then the fields above are filled in and the dialog is used to verify the user’s
password. Clicking OK launches the Security Type Selection dialog, seen below.

103
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Click on Enable Password Security to enable security type selection, and choose from either
FasTrak Authentication or NT Authentication.
FasTrak Authentication: The application itself regulates user access to password-protected areas.
Management takes place on the local computer only. More information on FasTrak
Authentication appears in the next section.
NT Authentication: When enabled, PLC WorkShop requests permission to access password-
protected areas from the FasTrak Security Server. This server is a separate application, which can
be installed on the local computer or on any other computer running under MS-Windows, NT,
2000, or XP. This server is capable of managing multiple computers from a single, central location.
See NT Authentication Security for more information.

104
 5 – FasTrak Authentication and NT Security

FasTrak Authentication Security

FasTrak Authentication Security Configuration Dialog
Access the Authentication Security Configuration dialog by clicking the Configure button within
the Security Type Selection screen.

In addition to controlling user access, this security mode can also record each attempt made by a
user to perform the tasks displayed above. To enable this feature, click on the Enable Security
Audit check box.
NOTE: If the Enable Security Audit check box is checked but the security log has not been
set up, when this dialog is exited, PLC WorkShop will warn the user that no log file had
been configured, and the check box selection will not be retained.

FasTrak Authentication Security Audit Setup

The following dialog is launched from the FasTrak Authentication Security Audit Setup dialog
by clicking Audit Setup.

105
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

To write the local security log to a Microsoft Access database file, select the Microsoft Access
radio button. Enter the name of the Access file or browse to select a file and select a file format
from the drop-down menu.
To write the local security log to an SQL database file, select the Other Database radio button.
Enter the file Connection String in the text box.

Data Link Properties Dialog

If choosing a database other than Microsoft Access and you have no Connection String, click the
Select button, and the Data Link Properties dialog opens. This dialog is the first in a series of
tabbed dialogs that help users create the necessary string of the local security log file.

Password Security Setup

Password security in WorkShop is disabled by default. Without password security enabled, any user
may access any portion of the programming package.
Before the password security feature can be used, a security administrator must be established by
selecting the Options/Security/Administrator Options menu item.

The User Options menu item allows users to change their own passwords or allow other users to
enter their password without having to exit and restart WorkShop.

106
 5 – FasTrak Authentication and NT Security

The Administrator Options menu item allows the security administrator to add, edit, and delete
users and specify their access privileges to specific features in WorkShop.

Administrator Options
By default, there is no security administrator, and the password security feature is not enabled.
Therefore, the User Options menu item is disabled until a security administrator is established.
Select the Options/Security Setup/Administrator Options menu item to establish a security
administrator. The Password Required dialog appears.

1. Name: The security administrator is required to enter a name, which can be up to twenty
characters long.
2. Password: The security administrator is required to enter a password, which can be up to
fourteen characters long. Both alphanumeric characters as well as other keyboard-entered
characters such as !, @, #, $, and % are valid.
3. Verify password: The first time a security administrator is established, the password must
be entered twice. This original security administrator can add other security administrators
through the FasTrak Authentication Security Configuration dialog discussed below. If a
security administrator has already been established, the password does not need to be
entered a second time for verification. When a security administrator exists, the Verify
password field is disabled.
4. Click OK. If the two passwords match, the FasTrak Authentication Security
Configuration dialog appears.

107
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Security Administration Dialog

Security administrators control the password security feature of WorkShop through the FasTrak
Authentication Security Configuration dialog.

The security feature can be enabled and disabled and the places at which user passwords are
requested can be specified through this dialog. The list of users and their rights to access specific
features within WorkShop can be managed within this dialog.

Enable Password Security

The password security feature is disabled in WorkShop by default. The security administrator can
turn this feature on by checking “Enable password security”. When this box is checked, users are
requested to enter their passwords either once each time WorkShop is started or each time they
attempt to enter a password-protected section of the application.
The current security mode is indicated in the status bar at the bottom of the WorkShop window as
seen in the example below. Security: Enabled appears when security is enabled. Security:
Disabled appears when security is disabled.

Inactive Passwords Timeout in N Minutes

Once users enter their passwords, they can operate PLC WorkShop indefinitely (within their access
privileges). However, if PLC WorkShop runs unattended for a designated number of minutes
without user interaction, the password under which the application is running can be timed-out.
Click Inactive passwords time-out after N mins to activate this feature. Enter the number of
minutes PLC WorkShop may remain inactive before the current password times-out. The default
number of minutes is 30 but the valid range is 1 to 999.

108
 5 – FasTrak Authentication and NT Security

Request User Password

Once password security is enabled, PLC WorkShop requests users to enter their passwords at
various times to operate the software.
Passwords can be requested each time users attempt to enter a password-protected portion of the
application. Alternately, passwords may be requested only once when WorkShop is first started.

At Each Control Point

Password control points are designated as “privileges” within the User Security Settings group
box illustrated in the following pages. Specifying that passwords be requested at these control
points requires users to enter their name and password every time they attempt to use these
features.
The advantage of this selection is that multiple users can operate WorkShop without having to exit
and restart the application under another user name and password. Once a user has completed a
password-protected operation and exits that function, other users can access password-protected
operations by entering their own user names and passwords.
The disadvantage of this selection is that it requires users - even the same user - to re-enter user
names and passwords each time they attempt to access one of the password-controlled features.
For example, saving a program to disk is one of these control points. Assume a user edits a ladder
program. The user then selects Save from the File menu to write the changes to disk. The
Password Required dialog box, pictured here, appears requesting the user name and password to
access the save feature.

Upon entering a valid user name and password (and the security administrator has given this user
privileges to this feature), the user is granted access to the save feature. After saving, the user
immediately returns to the program, makes another change, then selects Save from the File menu
again. Even though the user was just granted access to the Save feature, the Password Required
dialog reappears requesting the user name and password.

Once At Startup
Alternately, user name and password can be requested once when WorkShop is started – or after
selecting Switch user in the User Security Setup dialog, illustrated later in this document. Upon
entering a valid user name and password, the new user can access each password-controlled feature
(to which the security administrator has granted privileges) without having to re-enter the user
name and password.
The advantage of this selection is that users enter their names and passwords once at startup and
are not required to re-enter them each time they choose a password-controlled feature.

109
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

The disadvantage of this selection is that one user can start WorkShop with a correct name and
password but another operator can continue to use the application with all the original user’s access
privileges.

Adding Users
Click the Add User button to add a new user to the list. The dialog controls for a new user are set
as illustrated below.

User names can be up to twenty characters long. Passwords can be up to fourteen characters long.
Valid characters for both fields are alphanumeric and the other keyboard-entered characters ( ! @ #
$ %, etc.).
Enter the user name then enter and re-enter the password.
All privileges are initially checked for new users. Check/uncheck the privileges appropriate for the
user.
Security administrators can create other security administrators. Check the Security Administrator
box to grant the new user all administrator rights and privileges.
Click Save Settings. The list of existing users is checked to assure the new user name is not a
duplicate. If the new user name is unique, the two password entries are compared. Finally, the new
user name is added to the User List box.

Editing Users
There are two ways to select an existing user to edit. Either double click a user name from the User
List box or highlight a user name in the User List box and click the Edit User button.
By default, Retain existing password is checked and the password edit boxes are disabled. This
allows the security administrator to modify privileges without needing to re-enter the user identity
information (the user name and password).

110
 5 – FasTrak Authentication and NT Security

To change the user name, type an alternate entry in the User Name edit box.
To change an existing user password, uncheck Retain existing password to enable the password
edit boxes. Enter and verify a new password. Both password entries must match in order to save
the new password.
Security administrator rights may be granted to or revoked from the user by checking or un-
checking Security Administrator.

Deleting Users
To remove a user, highlight a name in the User List box and click the Delete User button. A
verification message appears which asks to confirm the deletion. Click OK and the user is removed.

User Security Setup

User Security Options Dialog

Once the security administrator adds users, their initial passwords and access privileges, the User
Options item of the Security Options menu (as illustrated earlier) is enabled. Users can select this
menu item to change their passwords through the User Security Options dialog below.
If the security administrator elects to request user passwords once at startup, the Switch User radio
button is enabled. Otherwise, if passwords are requested at password control points, this radio
button is disabled.

Changing the User’s Password

Users may change their own passwords. Security administrators may also change their passwords.
Click the Change user password radio button and the dialog controls are set as illustrated below.

Enter the user name and current password. Then enter and verify the user’s new password and click
OK.
If the entered user name is in the list of users previously added by the security administrator, the
Enter current password is compared to the password already associated with that user.
If the Enter current password matches the existing password for that user, the Enter new
password and Verify new password are compared with each other. If the two new passwords
match, then the new password replaces the current.

111
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Switching the User

If user passwords, specified by the security administrator, are requested only once when WorkShop
is started, the password entered at startup (and the access privileges associated with it) is in effect
until WorkShop is exited. Another password is not requested until WorkShop is restarted.
However, the Switch user name and option allows another user to enter another password without
requiring the application be exited and restarted.
Enter the user name and password of the user who will assume operational control of WorkShop.
If a valid user name and its matching password are entered, the security access privileges are reset to
those of the new user.

112
 5 – FasTrak Authentication and NT Security

NT Authentication Security
Overview
The FasTrak NT Authentication Server uses Windows NT security. NT Security is a feature that is
part of the Windows NT Operating System and is also found in Windows 2000 and XP. The
server must therefore be installed on a machine running Microsoft Windows NT (3.1 or later),
Windows 2000, or Windows XP. The following hardware requirements are recommended.
A personal computer with an Intel Pentium 100 processor or higher.
32 MB or more of RAM.
An 800 X 600 VGA monitor with at least 256 colors.
100 MB free disk space on your hard drive.
NOTE: Both the FasTrak Security Server (FTSecSvr.exe) and the FasTrak Security
Configurator (FTSecCfg.exe) must be installed and configured prior to activating and
utilizing these features.
The Security Server Application (FTSecSvr.exe) handles all client requests to access secured
FasTrak features. The server grants or denies access to a feature request depending on the
configuration provided by FTSecCfg. When security is enabled for FasTrak applications, all secure
features are inaccessible unless security is configured via FTSecCfg and the security server is
running. All NT auditing including security and application audits are handled by the server.
Security audits are configured in FTSecCfg and application audits are configured in the FasTrak
applications that support security. The Security Configurator (FTSecCfg) is an application that is
used to set up user privileges within the client.
Breakdown of steps for installation, configuration, and use:
1. Installation: The procedure for installing both the Security Server and Configurator on
local and remote machines (the Server must be installed regardless of operating system and
whether it is ran locally or remotely)
2. WorkGroups and Domains: Details to how both relate to NT Security
3. Configuring Users and Groups: Procedures for adding and setting up groups for the
variety of supported Operating Systems
4. Configuring User’s Rights and Audit Policy: Instructions for configuring specific user
rights and audit policy on the machine to which the server will be running from
5. DCOM (Distributed Component Object Module) Configuration: Instructions for
configuring DCOM on the available variety of Operating Systems and how to setup the
Security Administrator
6. Security Configuration: Specific instructions for how to setup, configure, and launch the
Security Configurator. Also, instructions for configuring the users, groups and auditing
features as well as the Event Viewer, used to view generated logs.

Installing the Security Server

If the FasTrak client applications are installed on a machine other than the one FTSecSvr is running
on (remote security), users may want to install FTSecCfg on the client machine(s) as well as the
server machine so that the server can be configured locally or from the client machine.

113
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

FasTrak security must be installed on a machine running Windows NT (3.1 or later), 2000 or XP.
Two applications get installed to a user-selected directory on the local machine. These files are
FTSecCfg.exe and FTSecSvr.exe. If running Windows XP, FTSecSvr.exe can only be installed on
the Professional version and not on the Home version. Regardless of the operating system being
used, the server (FTSecSvr.exe) must still be installed locally on the client machine as well as on the
remote machine. This is true even if the client machine is a non-NT type machine. By default, all
“checkable” items get installed including FTSecSvr.exe (under NT Security\Server) and
FTSecCfg.exe (under NT Security\Configurator). If installing to Win9x or Me, NT
Security\Configurator is not listed and therefore FTSecCfg.exe does not get installed.

Installing and Running the Server on a Local Machine

If the user wishes to install the Security Server locally, this may be achieved by installing from off of
CD or from a self-extracting executable file available from FasTrak’s Website (http://www.fast-
soft.com).
A CD installation requires only that all items for security be checked during the InstallShield
process. If a client software application has been previously installed, and it supports NT Security,
then re-inserting the installation CD or running the self-extracting executable and un-checking the
client during the InstallShield process is all that is required.

Installing and Running the Server on a Remote Machine

Installation begins with the installation of the client (i.e. PLC WorkShop) to a local, or client,
machine. In this case, installing the Security Configurator is an option.
After this installation is complete, the user must install to the machine that will act as the remote
server. Installation is identical to the above with the exception that the client need not be installed
and therefore may be unchecked from InstallShield. It is recommended that both the Security
Server (FTSecSrv) and Configurator (FTSecCfg) be installed.
If a client software application is already installed to the machine that the user wishes to run as the
remote security server, installation of security is identical to installing to a local machine, in the
above section.

Installation Dialogs
The following dialog is an example of what a user should expect to see during installation. Below is
the dialog whereby the user selects to install the client application, security, or both.

Select or deselect security components, with the NT Security check box selected, and click on the
Next button.

114
 5 – FasTrak Authentication and NT Security

Workgroups and Domains

Workgroups
NT security works slightly different in workgroups than in domains. This difference becomes a
factor when using the security server remotely. When a computer is part of a Workgroup and a user
enters their user name and password to log onto the operating system, the user name they logged in
as, the rights they have, and groups they belong to are known only to the local computer.
When a local computer (running a client application such as PLC WorkShop) connects to a remote
computer running the security server, it tries to log on to the remote computer with the same user
name and password. If the exact user name and password cannot be found on the remote
computer, the client (local computer) gets logged onto the remote computer as “Guest”. For this
reason, a guest user normally has minimal rights. This account is disabled by default. If a guest
account is enabled, anyone can log on to the computer because a password is not required for this
account. In general, when using workgroups, all users that need to get security clearance from
FasTrak’s security server must exist on the server machine. The rights a user has on the local
machine may differ from the rights they have on a remote machine. Similarly, the groups a user
belongs to on the local machine may differ from the groups they belong to on a remote machine.

Domains
When a computer is part of a Domain and a user logs onto any computer that is a member of the
domain, the user name and password they supply is stored on the domain controller vs. the local
machine. There is no “re-logging” when connecting to a remote machine on a domain. The rights a
user has and the groups they belong to are the same amongst all the machines on the domain. This
eliminates the need to declare users twice: once on the local machine and once on the remote
machine. When setting up a server on a domain, its important to choose the domain controller
machine because this machine holds all the domain users and groups.

Adding Users and Groups to the Operating System

Configuring users and groups differs depending on the operating system being used. Because NT
Security is based on Users and Groups, the following steps must be taken.

Adding Users for Windows 95, 98, and ME

In Windows 9x and Me, users may log on to the system to get their unique user profile, but they do
not have any rights since the operating system is unprotected and they do not belong to any groups.
A user can be created simply by entering a unique user name and password when logging on to the
OS. A user may skip the login procedure altogether, in which case they become the Guest user.

115
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Adding Users for Windows NT

In Windows NT, users and groups can be created by entering Administrative Tools from Control
Panel and selecting User Manager. This is shown in the figure below.

Adding Users for Windows 2000 and XP

In Windows 2000 and XP, users and groups can be created by entering Administrative Tools
from Control Panel and selecting Computer Management. Within the Computer Management
application, users and groups can be created by right clicking on the corresponding folders under
the Local Users and Groups tree item as illustrated in the following figure.

116
 5 – FasTrak Authentication and NT Security

Adding Users and Groups on a Domain Controller

If on a domain controller, select the Administrative Tools/Active Directory Users and
Computers menu item. From the tree control, right-click on the Users folder to add users and/or
groups.

Configuring User Rights and Audit Policy

Correctly configuring specific user rights and audit policy on the server machine is essential for
proper security and for the server to operate correctly. The following user rights need to be
configured:
Access this computer from the network: Enter all users/groups that will need to access this
computer from the network. These users will represent the server’s clients that need to request
security clearance.
Deny access to this computer from the network: Make sure that any user/groups that are listed in
the above right are not listed here.
Generate security audits: A user with administrative rights should be added here. This should be
the same user that the server is launched under. See DCOM in the Centralized Security Server- Server
Configuration of this manual. This right should be configured even if security audits are not used.
This Administrator will be referenced later in this manual, in the section dealing with DCOM.
Manage auditing and security log: A user with administrative rights should be added here. This
should be the same user that the server is launched under. See DCOM in the Centralized Security
Server- Server Configuration portion of this manual. This right should be configured even if the logs are
not used. Note: this is the same Administrator as mentioned in the above point.
Configuration location differs depending on the operating system you are on. In Windows NT,
enter the User Manager and choose the Policies / User Rights menu item. If interested in
generating security audits, select the Policies / Audit menu item in the User Manager. From this
dialog, check the Success and Failure buttons next to File and Object Access.
In Windows 2000 and XP, users rights can be modified in the Administrative Tools Control
Panel, under Local Policies. While on a domain controller, users rights may be modified in the
Administrative Tools under Domain Controller Security Policy. From either application, right-
click on the User Rights Assignment to list all user rights.
To enable security audits, click on Local Policies / Audit Policy from within Local Security
Policy. Double-click on the Audit Object Access policy and check both Success and Failure
boxes. The computer’s operating system must have the latest service pack installed as this fixes
auditing problems with earlier releases.
The following table may assist a user in determining what rights must be given to a user on the
machines involved in FasTrak’s NT Authentication Security.
Remote Server Machine Local Server Machine Client Machine
Access this computer from Generate Security Audits N/A
the network
Generate Security Audits Manage auditing and
security log
Manage auditing and
security log
NOTE: It is mandatory that you reboot the machine for the new user rights to take effect.

117
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Configuring DCOM for NT Authentication Security

The machine that the user wishes to run FTSecSvr (FasTrak Security Server) on must be configured
for proper server/client communication. Below are the needed steps for configuring the server.

Configuring DCOM on Windows 9x, 2000, and NT

DCOM enables FasTrak clients, such as PLC WorkShop for Modicon to communicate with remote
security servers. The dialog window, shown below, is launched by running dcomcnfg.exe from a
DOS prompt or by clicking on the Windows Start button followed by clicking Run. Changes
made in DCOM are applied immediately and there is no need to reboot the PC.

Instructions for Configuration

1. In the Applications list box, scroll down and select FTSecSvr. If this item is missing, it
was not properly installed; refer to earlier sections in this manual.

2. Click the Properties button. The Properties dialog window opens.

118
 5 – FasTrak Authentication and NT Security

3. Click the Security tab.

4. Under Security, choose the Administrator (See Configuring User Rights and Audit Policy)
who will have access permission. The following affects both the areas of Access and
Launch. For Custom security for Launch and Access Permissions, follow these steps.
a. While in the Properties dialog, with the Security tab active, click on Edit.
b. Click Add and choose the Administrator.
5. Click the Identity tab and click the this user radio button.

6. Browse and select the Administrator. Click OK to return to the main dialog.

119
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

7. Finally, click the Default Properties tab and choose connect for Default Authentication
or impersonate for Default Impersonation.

8. If the server is on a remote machine, repeat Step 7.

Configuring DCOM for Windows XP

Configuring DCOM under Windows XP begins with launching the application, dcomcnfg.exe,
from a DOS prompt or the Run dialog, just as in the previous instructions. The following dialog
launches.

120
 5 – FasTrak Authentication and NT Security

Using the tree structure in the left-most pane, expand the selection of Component Services to
Computers and then to My Computer, as illustrated in the following dialog.

Right-click on My Computer and select Properties. In the Default Properties tab, select the
default authentication and impersonation levels. This dialog resembles the dcomcnfg interface of
Windows NT and 2000, from above.
To set the security and identity properties for FTSecSvr, select DCOM Config under My
Computer. The available registered COM applications will be displayed. Scroll and select
FTSecSvr.

121
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Open its properties by right-clicking on it. The dialog is shown below.

Security Configurator
The Security Configuration Application (FTSecCfg.exe) allows users with administrator rights to
configure their centralized server based security. This file will reside on the same machine and
directory as the server. Users will also be able to install FTSecCfg on client machines running
Windows NT (3.1 or later)/2000/XP so that they can configure their security server remotely. The
following features are supported.
a. Ability to configure which users and/or groups have access to various FasTrak features.
This includes users and groups from the machine running the server. Separate secure
features will exist for individual FasTrak applications including programming packages as
well as ControlShop applications.
b. Security Auditing can be configured for each specific feature on an individual or group
basis. Audit information will be logged to the Event Viewer in the Security Log section.
c. A link to the Event Viewer will be provided allowing quick access to the Security Log.
The event viewer can also be accessed under Administrative Tools in Control Panel.

Launching the Security Configurator

The Configuration Application may be launched by either clicking the Start button in Windows and
going to the Programs menu or from within WorkShop.

122
 5 – FasTrak Authentication and NT Security

The Security Configurator application will launch and (if the user is not in the client), at the same
time, the Security Server Location dialog may open. Both are shown below.
When launched from the Start menu, the Security Server Location dialog will prompt the user to
select the machine that the server will run on.

123
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Configuring Users, Groups, and Security Audit

After security has been configured and a server location selected, individual users, groups of users,
and permissions may be set from within the FTSecCfg utility.
To access the FTSecCfg utility within WorkShop, select the Options / Security / Administrator
Options / Configure menu item. To access the FTSecCfg utility from the Start menu, select Start
/ Programs / FasTrak SoftWorks / NT Security / FTSecCfg. In either case, the FTSecCfg
dialog appears.

The selected server machine appears in the status bar in the lower right portion of the application
window.
In the left pane, the WorkShop application for which the permissions will apply may be selected.
In the Users and Groups list box, two names (System and either the administrators group or the
current user) will exist by default with access to all features. The list box is sorted with groups listed
first followed by users. A group is identified with the two-person icon to the left while the user is
identified with the one-person icon. A combination of approximately 16 users and groups can be
configured for an application. Users and groups that are not displayed in the list box are
automatically denied access to all features.
Adding Users and Groups
To add users and groups:
1. Select PLC Workshop-32 for Modicon from the list in the left pane. The users
previously added to WorkShop appear in the Users and Groups list box.
2. Click the Add button.

124
 5 – FasTrak Authentication and NT Security

Removing Users and Groups

To remove a user or group:
1. Select PLC Workshop-32 for Modicon from the list in the left pane. The users
previously added to WorkShop appear in the Users and Groups list box.
2. Highlight a name within the Users and Groups list box.
3. Click the Remove button.
Setting Permissions
To set permissions for a user or group:
1. Select PLC Workshop-32 for Modicon from the list in the left pane. The users
previously added to WorkShop appear in the Users and Groups list box.
2. Select the desired user from the Users and Groups list box.
3. Within the Permissions list box:
Select the applicable Allow check boxes to allow the server to provide access when requested by the
client (for example, PLC WorkShop).
Select the applicable Deny check boxes to prevent access by the server when requested by the
client.
In cases where a user has conflicting rights on a permission, the denied permission will always take
precedence and the user will not be able to access the feature. For example, a user may be allowed
access to a specific permission but a group he belongs to is denied access to the same permission. If
neither box is checked, the user will not be granted access to the feature unless one of the groups
he belongs to has access to the feature.
Setting Inactivity Timeout
To set the inactivity timeout for a user:
1. Select PLC Workshop-32 for Modicon from the list in the left pane. The users
previously added to WorkShop appear in the Users and Groups list box.
2. Select the desired user from the Users and Groups list box. The user’s security
privileges appear in the Permissions list box.
3. Click the Inactive passwords timeout after check box beneath the Permissions list
box to enable the minutes edit box.
4. Enter the number of minutes WorkShop may remain inactive before the user must re-
enter his Windows user name and password. The inactive timeout period may range from
1 to 999 minutes.
NOTE: A user is not required to re-enter his Windows user name and password as long as
password protected activity occurs in WorkShop within the timeout period.

Security Audits
Security audits for individual features can be performed on users and groups. These audits will
appear in the security log on the server machine and can be accessed using Microsoft’s Event
Viewer. (See Event Viewer for more details.) A Success audit will appear in the security log when a
user is given access to a secure feature, and the Audit Success box is checked for that feature. A
Failure audit will appear in the security log when a user is denied access to a secure feature, and the
Audit Failure box is checked for that feature.

125
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

To perform a security audit on a user or group for an individual feature:

1. Select PLC Workshop-32 for Modicon from the list in the left pane. The users
previously added to WorkShop appear in the Users and Groups list box.
2. Select the desired user from the Users and Groups list box.
3. Within the Permissions list box:
Select the applicable Audit Success check boxes to enable Success Audits for the selected features.
Select the applicable Audit Failure check boxes to enable Failure Audits for the selected features.
NOTE: All security changes in FTSecCfg are accumulated and do not get committed to the
server until confirmation upon exit of FTSecCfg.

Event Viewer
The Event viewer is a Windows application for displaying application, security, and system logs.
FasTrak uses and writes to this log to hold audits. It is launched from within the Security
Configurator.
To launch the Event Viewer, select the View / Event Viewer menu item as illustrated below. The
Event Viewer is also accessible from the Administrative Tools of the Windows Control Panel.

The following window opens. Double-clicking an entry in the right-most pane above will display
more information for the item.

126
 5 – FasTrak Authentication and NT Security

From this application, the user may view the Security log. If running the Security Configurator
from a different machine than the security server (FTSecSvr), then the security server’s machine
name must be specified in the event viewer to view the security log entries referring to FasTrak
security. This can be accomplished by highlighting the Event Viewer in the tree control and then
selecting the Action / Connect to another computer menu item as illustrated below.

The Select Computer dialog appears.

Use the Browse button for searching for and selecting another computer.
Click OK to accept the selection.

127
6 - PLC Configuration
Overview
This chapter outlines how the Modicon PLC is set up and configured. The PLC must be configured
before ladder logic programs can be created. Configuration is part of the program; it performs the
important function of relating the hardware components to the logic components.
The setup and configuration process is completed in two steps in recommended order:
PLC Type Setup: Available in offline mode only, PLC Type Setup allows the specific
Modicon processor for which a logic program is being created / edited to be selected.
Options include:
ƒ PLC Type
ƒ Memory Size
ƒ Other options depending on PLC type
PLC Configuration: Configuration is the process in which PLC system components,
such as the number of segments, drops, ASCII ports, and I/O modules, are assigned. The
locations of modules in the racks are specified and addresses are assigned to the modules.
The configuration information is saved along with the ladder program. Configuration
options include:
ƒ Configuration screen options
ƒ Modbus Ports
ƒ ASCII Ports
ƒ Traffic Cop
ƒ Configuration Extensions
ƒ Loadables
ƒ Set Clock

PLC Type Setup

The setup and configuration process begins with PLC Type Setup. The PLC must be configured
before ladder logic programs can be created.
To set up the PLC for a new program:

1. Select the File / New menu item or click the toolbar icon. The PLC Type Setup
dialog appears.

129
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

2. Select the appropriate PLC Type, PLC Memory Size, and for some models, Enhanced
Execs and 484 Emulation.
3. Click OK or press [Enter] to save your settings and return to the active logic program.

Changing PLC Types

You can change PLC types after you begin programming.
To change PLC type for an existing program, select the PLC Utilities / PLC Type Setup menu
item. The PLC Type Setup dialog appears.
NOTE: Various error or warning messages can occur if changing the PLC type would cause
program or configuration information to be truncated or incorrect.

PLC Configuration
The next step is to tell PLC WORKSHOP which PLC to connect to. The next pages describe the
configuration procedures for the Modicon 984 family processors. It is suggested that the PLC be
configured in the following order:
1. Configuration screen options
2. Modbus Ports
3. ASCII Ports
4. Traffic Cop
5. Configuration Extensions
6. Loadables
7. Set Clock
Some of configuration options listed above are not available or necessary for all processors. The
configuration for your 984-family PLC is detailed in the pages following.
PLC configuration can be completed online or offline. However, if the processor is in Run mode,
stop the processor before you begin online configuration.
While online, accessing the Configuration screen will display the processor’s current configuration.
Offline the Configuration screen is used to configure the system for programming the logic
program.
The Configuration screen is divided into several areas, including:
ƒ Processor
ƒ Configured Quantities
ƒ ASCII
ƒ Miscellaneous
ƒ PLC Clock and Calendar
ƒ Option buttons
All or some of the areas listed above may appear on your configuration screen. Which options
appear is dependent of which processor you selected in the PLC Type Setup earlier in this
chapter. The option buttons displayed on the right side of the Configuration screen also depend on
which processor is selected.

130
 6 – PLC Configuration

EEPROM / Flash Memory

Certain Modicon processors support the use of either EEPROM or Flash memory for the loading
or storing of a PLC’s operating program. When a PLC receives power, it first checks for a valid
memory configuration. If none is found, the controller will then load the contents from either
EEPROM or Flash memory. The list below specifies which PLCs are supported.
984 Compacts: A141, 145, A145, 120, A120, A13X, 130, E241, E245, E251, E255

984 Micros: 311, 411, 512, 612

984 Momentums: M1, M1 Mag.

984 32-bit Compacts: E258/E275, E265, E285

NOTE: The Quantum 434/534 is not supported.

131
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

NOTE: The ability to back up user memory by writing it to Flash RAM is a standard feature of
all Micro PLCs, except the 612-04. Because of limitations of Flash storage capabilities in
612-04, a battery is the only method available to backup user memory. Memory backed
up in Flash remains completely volatile over time.
Depending on the current processor, the following dialog windows will be available. This window
displays when selected from the PLC Utilities menu and choosing PLC Operations. The menu
option will not be available when the PLC is in Run mode. The dialog allows for the selection of
the power-up state and the selection of whether 4x registers should be written (depending on
chosen processor type).
NOTE: 32-bit Modicon Compact PLCs can have retries on clearing or writing of EEPROM.

Error Messages
When the pushbutton is pressed from the dialog, an attempt is made to write to the PLC. A
number of conditions may generate errors at this point. (See the GS-COMMS for Modicon -
Compact specification entitled EEPROM Support for more details on each error.
No EEPROM card is detected in the PLC slot.
Processor is in Optimize mode. Cannot write to EEPROM.
Attempt to write to EEPROM was unsuccessful.
Cannot modify EEPROM. Power must be cycled.
Processor error. Cannot write to EEPROM.
Control is returned to the PLC Operations window when any of these errors is cleared.

Flash RAM
The Flash RAM pushbutton is displayed whenever supported by the current processor. Pressing
the Flash RAM pushbutton on the PLC Operations Window displays a dialog box allowing the
power-up state of the Flash RAM program. The Flash RAM pushbutton is grayed if the processor
is in RUN mode. (See fig. 6.1b)
The default value for power-up state is Run.

132
 6 – PLC Configuration

Configuring the Modicon 984 Family Processors

The PLC Configuration dialog box on your screen may be different than the example above.
However, many of the configuration options are the same. Following is a listing of PLC
Configuration dialog box options for all processors.
Screen Area Description
Processor
Type Displays the type of
processor selected. See PLC
Type Setup in this chapter.
Total Logic Words Displays the total number of
words that are available for
logic programming. The
number is set automatically
and is dependent on the PLC
type and size selected in PLC
Type Setup. You cannot
change this value.
Total Config. Ext. Words Allows an area for options
available under
Configuration Extensions.

133
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Total TCOP Words Displays the number of

memory words assigned to
the Traffic Cop. Can be
configured for Quantum,
Momentum, and 32-bit
Compact PLCs.
DX Modules Displays the number of
modules available for Data
Transfer options. You
cannot change this value.
Segments Enter the number of
segments.
I/O Drops Enter the number of I/O
Drops to be configured
within Traffic Cop. The
maximum number is
dependent on the PLC
Type and the number of
Segments set above.
I/O Modules Enter the number of I/O
Modules to be configured
within Traffic Cop. The
maximum number is 32
times the number of I/O
Drops. However, for 984-
48x processors the
maximum number is 21 in
the first drop and 32
thereafter.
Channels Enter the number, of I/O
984A-S901, 984B-S901 processors only channels, available to the
program. The value must be
an even number between 2
and 16.
Configured Quantities
Discrete Outputs (0x) Enter the number of logic
coils available for the
program. The number must
be divisible by 16 with the
maximum number
dependent on PLC type and
state table size.
Discrete Inputs (1x) Enter the number of discrete
inputs available to the
program. The number must
be divisible by 16 with the
maximum number
dependent on PLC type and

134
 6 – PLC Configuration

state table size.

Input Registers (3x) Enter the number of input
registers available to the
program. The maximum
number is dependent on
PLC type and state table
size.
Holding Registers (4x) Enter the number of
output/holding registers
available to the program.
The maximum number is
dependent on PLC type and
size.
ASCII
Total Message Words Enter the number of
memory words to set aside
for ASCII message storage.
The value is dependent on
PLC size.
Maximum Messages Enter the number of ASCII
messages to be stored in
memory. The number varies
depending on PLC type and
memory.
ASCII Ports Enter the number, between
0 and 32, of RS-232C ports.
There are remote I/O ports
included in the system for
ASCII communications.
There are two ASCII ports
for each configured I/O
Remote Drop. Configure the
Traffic Cop before you
configure the ASCII Ports
by clicking the ASCII Ports
option button. See ASCII
Port configuration later in
this chapter.
ASCII Output (4x) Enter a reference number
984A and 984B series processors only for the holding register (4x).
This number indicates the
first register of a group of 32
registers reserved for simple
ASCII. The first register is
the control register.
ASCII Input (4x) Enter a reference number
for a simple ASCII holding
register (4x).

135
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Miscellaneous*
Skips Select Yes if the Skip
instruction is permitted in
the logic program.
Battery Coil Enter the location of the
battery coil through the
reference number (0x).
When this coil is used in a
ladder logic program, it
reflects the status of the
battery back-up system. A
zero setting indicates no
battery coil is available.
Timer Register (4x) Enter the location of the
timer register through the
reference number (4x). This
is a holding register set aside
to hold the number of 10
millisecond clock cycles. A
zero setting indicates no
timer registers are available.
Watchdog Tmr (x10ms) A zero (0) setting equals 250
milliseconds—the maximum
value. Enter values between
1 and 25. That value is the
number of milliseconds
times 10. For example, if you
enter 8, the number of
milliseconds is 80.
DCP Drop ID Enter a drop number when
the processor is part of a
D908 distributed control
system. This option is
available only for those
processors that can act as
drops in a DCP system. The
value must be between 0 and
32; zero indicates no DCP
Drop.

PLC Clock and Calendar

Clock Register (4x) Enter the location of the
time of day clock through a
reference number (4x). The
clock uses 8 registers, 7 +
the one register you specify.

136
 6 – PLC Configuration

A zero setting indicates no

clock registers are available.
Month, Day, Year, Displays the PLC’s current
Hour, Min., Sec date and time

*Additional Miscellaneous section options for B984-100 and B984-102 processors only

Module Type Select either B884 or B886.

Input Select Latched or Unlatched.
Group 1 Enter a value from 0 to 99.
Group 2 Enter a value from 0 to 99.
Group 3 Enter a value from 0 to 99.
Group 4 Enter a value from 0 to 99.

Modbus Ports
Continue configuring your PLC by completing the configuration of the Modbus ports.
To access the Modbus port configuration:
1. Click Modbus Ports in the PLC Configuration dialog box. The Modbus Ports dialog
box appears.

2. Select the appropriate settings for each port.

3. Move from port to port by clicking the Next Port or Prev Port buttons.
4. Save changes to all ports by clicking OK. To disregard changes and return to the PLC
Configuration dialog box, click Cancel.
NOTE: You are unable to enter values in Device Address and Delay Time when ASCII
mode is selected.

137
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

ASCII Ports
After you have completed configuration of the Traffic Cop, the next step is to configure the ASCII
ports. However, some processors do not support ASCII messages. If you do not see the ASCII
Ports button on the right side of your PLC Configuration dialog box, your processor does not
support ASCII messages.
To access the ASCII Ports dialog box:
1. Click ASCII Ports in the PLC Configuration dialog box. The ASCII Ports dialog box
appears.

2. Select the appropriate settings for each port.

3. Move from port to port by clicking the Next Port or Prev Port buttons.
4. Save changes to all ports by clicking OK. To disregard changes and return to the PLC
Configuration dialog box, click Cancel.
Default settings for each port are:
Baud Rate: 1200
Parity: Even
Stop Bits: 1
Data Bits: 8
Keyboard Device: Yes

138
 6 – PLC Configuration

Micro Modbus Ports

The Modbus ports for Micro-984 controllers are configured using the PLC Configuration dialog
found under the PLC Utilities menu.
Depending upon the chosen mode (Single, Parent, or Child), the Ports Configuration will
change. This configuration as well as the communication setup for the ports is accessible by click
on the Modbus Ports dialog button. The following window opens.

The combo box in the window’s upper half can be expanded by using the drop-down button.
Toggling between available ports is done by clicking on the Next Port and Prev Port button. To
accept the changes made, click on OK; to quit without saving changes, click Cancel.
The port configuration information is included when the Configuration is printed. For more
information on printing the configuration, see Print PLC Configuration.
NOTE: The Port configuration always displays the second port even if it does not exist for a
PLC.
Supported PLC types include: 311/00, 01, 02, 03; 411/00, 01, 02, 03; 512/00, 01, 02, 03; 612/00,
03, 04

139
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Traffic Cop
Every PLC system will have a certain number of inputs and outputs, whether they be Discrete
(on/off) or Analog. Each physical input and output is wired to a terminal on an I/O module. This
module may only be a small part of a series of I/O that must all work together within the same
environment and parameters. Some of these modules may be attached directly to the main PLC
rack (local I/O), while others may be located elsewhere (remote I/O).
The PLC must be able to recognize and manage the various I/O and direct the flow of data
between the physical connection points and the logic program. The Traffic Cop is the link between
the references used in the logic program and the physical I/O.
Once Modbus Ports settings are completed, configuring Traffic Cop is the next step in PLC
Configuration. Here you may reconcile the physical parameters of your various I/O modules and
your PLC.
This diagram illustrates the Traffic Cop configuration process.

The Traffic Cop organizes I/O into groups, called drops (or channels, depending on the PLC
Type). A drop can be multiple racks of remote I/O, which must be managed by the Segment
Scheduler to be scanned, or it can be a single module on the local rack. Each drop contains a
certain number of slots, which are single instances of input or output and contain specific I/O
modules.
Every I/O module belongs to a certain family of Modicon I/O. There are several families of
Modicon I/O available; each I/O family has its own Traffic Cop. The Traffic Cop you see will
depend most upon the PLC Type selected.

140
 6 – PLC Configuration

Configuring Traffic Cop for 800 Series I/O

Before configuring Traffic Cop, verify that the settings within the PLC Configuration dialog are
correct. Configure I/O Drops and Modules ( and Total TCOP Words for Quantum,
Momentum, and 32-bit Compact PLCs) within PLC Configuration to reflect the hardware to be
configured and define the size of the Traffic Cop within the program. These settings, along with the
PLC Type, will determine what information you will see when configuring Traffic Cop.
To access the Traffic Cop, click the Traffic Cop button on the left side of the PLC Configuration
dialog box. If your processor supports Remote I/O, the Traffic Cop dialog appears.

The above dialog shows that four drops have been configured for this PLC. This information was
entered in the PLC Configuration dialog into the I/O Drop text box. If more than one drop can
be configured, the first drop will always contain the local I/O. Subsequent drops can contain
Remote I/O.
Certain PLC processors can support Remote I/O from different families. To see what families of
I/O your processor supports, click the I/O Type button. In this instance, the processor only
supports 800 Series I/O.
To edit the I/O within a specific drop, click Go To Drop. The I/O Drop Editor appears.

141
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

The above dialog displays the I/O information for the first rack (of five) within the first drop (of
four). Notice that Slot 101 and 102 are already filled. Since this drop represents the local I/O, the
PLC and its power supply are present on the first rack. As these two slots do not contain I/O, they
cannot be edited.
Add I/O to an empty slot by selecting a slot and clicking the Edit button. The Edit dialog appears.

From here you can select the appropriate I/O module by typing the module number in the
Selected Module text box or selecting it from the comprehensive list. Depending on whether the
module is an input or an output, the Input or Output Reference text box will be activated. Type
the appropriate register reference within the text box.
The following table illustrates the different register types and their associations.

Input Output

Discrete 1x 0x

Analog 3x 4x

Click OK when finished. The I/O Drop Editor appears with the newly configured module.

142
 6 – PLC Configuration

In this instance an output was configured for slot 103. Continue configuring the I/O until they are
properly represented within Traffic Cop. Further configuration options within Traffic Cop follow.
ƒ Click the Clear button to remove an I/O module from the selected slot. In some PLCs,
slots and racks can be added and removed manually to fully represent the user's hardware
configuration. For these users, clicking Delete will completely remove a slot or rack and its
contents. Clicking Insert allows you to add a new slot or rack to the drop.
ƒ Analog I/O can be set to one of two data formats, either Binary (BIN) or Binary Coded
Decimal (BCD). Click the BIN/BCD button to toggle between the two.
ƒ Hold Up Time represents the number of seconds the selected I/O drop will hold its
values if communication from the PLC is lost. The default is three seconds.
ƒ To browse another rack within the same drop, click the Next Rack and Prev Rack
buttons to navigate to the rack you want to view.
Click OK to return to the Traffic Cop dialog.
To configure the Remote I/O, select the next drop in the Drop List within the Traffic Cop
dialog and click the Go To Drop button. The I/O Drop Editor appears displaying the remote I/O
drop.

Listed above are the default modules for an 800 Series remote I/O drop. Though it appears that
the first three slots are taken by the default modules, only Slot 101 is unavailable for configuration.
Select either J890 module and click Edit to modify the module. Once the module has been
configured, the I/O Drop Editor dialog appears.

The default modules are now confined to one slot.

143
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Module Status
While online, Traffic Cop recognizes correctly and incorrectly configured I/O modules based on
the actual hardware that is connected to the PLC. When the PLC is not running (Stop Mode)
module status may be viewed in the I/O Drop Editor.

Incorrectly configured modules will appear with an asterisk ( * ) or a question mark ( ? ) directly
preceding the slot number. An asterisk signifies that while the module is physically present, is has
not been configured with address references. A question mark signifies that either the module is not
configured correctly, or is not physically present.
Module health can also be viewed from the PLC Status dialog. See Module Health for more
information.
Configure each I/O drop as above until all I/O have been entered into Traffic Cop, including
modules that work with Configuration Extensions, such as Profibus. When you are finished,
click Close in the Traffic Cop dialog to return to the PLC Configuration dialog.

Square D-SY/MAX TCOP Modules

The following SY/MAX modules and their descriptions are supported in Modicon WorkShop.
These modules are found in the Traffic Cop dialog window from within PLC Configuration.

Module Description

CRM931 DG1 Digital 1 Register Rack S908 Interface

CRM931 DG2 Digital 2 Register Rack S908 Interface

CRM931 DG4 Digital 4 Register Rack S908 Interface

CRM931 DG8 Digital 8 Register Rack S908 Interface

CRM931 RG Register Rack S908 Interface

RIM101/361 16 Point Input 120/240V AC/DC

RIM121/125 4/16 Point Input Analog

RIM123 8 Point Input High Speed Analog

RIM126 8 Point Input Analog Thermocouple

144
 6 – PLC Configuration

RIM127 12 Point Input RTD

RIM131 High Speed Counter

RIM144 Multiplexed Input BCD

RIM301 16 Point Input 85-140V AC

RIM331 32 Point Input 24V DC

RIM731 64 Point Input 24V AC/DC

ROM121 4 Point Output Analog

ROM122 4 Point Output Analog Isolated

ROM131 Stepper Motor Controller

ROM141 Multiplexed Output BCD

ROM221/431 16 Point Output 120/240V AC

ROM271 16 Point Output Relay 120V AC

ROM421 16 Point Output 35-140V AC

ROM441 32 Point Output 24V DC

ROM871 64 Point Output Reed Relay

SIM116 16 Point Input Simulator

RDI 16 - 32 Symax RDI

RD0 8 - 64 Symax RD0

RDI x32 Symax RDI 32

RIO 224 Symax RIO 224

A new drop must first be added to the Traffic Cop prior to selecting I/O type and specific module
names. From the Traffic Cop dialog, choose Insert for the Insert Drop dialog.

145
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Enter values for both the Head and Drop fields as well as selecting I/O Type Remote and
SY/MAX Series as the description.
The entry will be added to the Traffic Cop dialog as seen below. The new entry may be selected for
editing by clicking on it once.

Once selected, click on Go To Drop and the I/O Drop Editor dialog opens. Highlight the
desired slot by clicking in it once, then choose Edit from the buttons to the right, as seen in the
figure below.

146
 6 – PLC Configuration

Highlight the desired module by clicking on it once and enter valid addresses in the available fields.

NOTE: The following table is used for determining which physical module is under the TCOP
configured module. The Superset of registers has been utilized and, therefore, unused
registers will be configured.

RDI 16 - 32 RD0 8 - 64 RDI x32 RIO 224

RDI-016 RD0-408 RDI-316 RI0-244

RDI-032 RD0-508 RDI-332

RDI-116 RD0-564 RDI-432

RDI-132 RD0-616/716/816 RII-x16

RDI-164 RD0-732

RDI-216

RDI-x16

RTS-216

RTS-212

147
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Configuration Extensions
So far you have completed the PLC Configuration dialog box settings, Traffic Cop configuration,
ASCII Ports configuration, if supported, and Modbus configuration. The next step is to setup up
the Configuration Extensions.
However, you must enter a value greater than zero (0) in the Total Config. Ext. Words in the
PLC Configuration dialog box for the Config Ext. button to be an option. The Configuration
Extensions include:
Data Protection: Prevents discrete outputs(0x) and holding registers(4x) from being overwritten.
Peer Cop: Configures transfer of data between controllers on a Modbus Plus network.
S980 Station Address: Specifies the S980 Address (in hex format).
TSX QTM VME Sys Ctrl: Configures transfer of data between Quantum master/slave elements.
Quantum Hot Standby: Configures Hot Standby feature installed on select Quantum controllers.
TCP/IP Setup: Configures the controller to connect to a network through a TCP/IP connection.
SY/MAX ENET Setup: Configures SY/MAX RIO cards to operate with select Quantum
controllers.
MMS ENET Setup: Configures Quantum controllers to connect through an MMS Ethernet
module.
I/O Scanner Setup: Configures transfer of data between controllers on a TCP/IP network.
Compact Phase II: Modifies Secure Data Area Size and RTS/CTS Delay.
Profibus: Configures Quantum controllers to connect through a Profibus module.
NOTE: Some Configuration Extensions are not supported by every PLC, and will be
unavailable for selection in the Configuration Extensions dialog. Consult your hardware
documentation for further information.
To access the Configuration Extensions dialog:
1. With the PLC Configuration dialog open, enter a value greater than zero (0) in the Total
Config. Ext. Words text box.
2. The Configuration Extensions dialog appears.

148
 6 – PLC Configuration

3. Choose the Extensions to be activated by selecting the checkbox preceding the available
Extension.
NOTE: Each Extension is assigned a word value. The selected Extensions cannot exceed the
value entered in the Total Config. Ext. Words text box within the PLC Configuration
dialog. Words used for each selected Extension appear directly to the right of the
Extension under the Words Used column.
4. Selecting an Extension activates the associated button on the right side of the dialog. Click
the button to configure the Extension.

Data Protection
This extension is used to protect specific output (0x and 4x) reference data from being overwritten
by general data write commands. By default, all 0x and 4x references are unprotected.
To add the Data Protection extension:
1. Select the Data Protection checkbox in the Configuration Extensions dialog. The Data
Prot button becomes selectable.
2. Click the Data Prot button. The parameters for Data Prot appear in the Data Protection
dialog.

3. Enter the range of the 0x addresses in need of data protection by typing the starting
address in the first box and the ending address in the second box labeled Discrete
Outputs (0x).
4. Enter the range of the 4x addresses in need of data protection by typing the starting
address in the first box and the ending address in the second box labeled Holding
Registers (4x).
5. Click OK to return to the Configuration Extensions dialog.

149
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Peer Cop
This extension allows communication between controllers on a peer-to-peer network, and links
networks with the S985 (NOM-2xx-00 for Quantum) communication card. Data blocks can be
configured to transfer continuously between nodes on a Modbus Plus network. Peer Cop
configures Global I/O, which is broadcast to all nodes on a single link or head, or Specific I/O, in
which specific Modbus Plus nodes communicate one-on-one within a single link or head.
To add the Peer Cop extension:
1. Select the Peer Cop checkbox in the Configuration Extensions dialog. The Peer Cop
setup dialog appears.

2. The first Head, 0 - Internal is selected by default. Click Add Head to add another head,
or configure the current head.
3. The following can be configured for each head:
ƒ Last Value/Timeout
ƒ Global I/O
ƒ Specific I/O
Last Value determines whether or not to hold the last input data value. Select On to leave the
input data in its previous state.
Timeout specifies the amount of time a Peer Cop communication must fail before the bit is
cleared. The default is 25 X 20 (500)ms.
Global I/O broadcasts a specific range of addresses (Global Output) to many devices (Global
Input) over a Modbus Plus Network. There is only one Global Output to configure, but each
device to receive the data must be configured as Global Input.
Specific I/O communicates on a one-on-one basis in which a single device accepts an entire data
block from a single source. Multiple devices can be configured to send and receive specific blocks
of data to and from specific sources. The configured amount of data being sent from a source must
be identical to the amount of data a device is configured to accept.

150
 6 – PLC Configuration

To configure Global I/O:

1. Click the Global I/O button in the Peer Cop dialog. The Global I/O dialog appears.

2. To configure the Global Output, enter the length of the Global Output address range in
the Length text box and the starting address of the address range in the References box.
3. To configure the Global Input, select the device number of the first Global Input and
click the Edit button. The Edit dialog appears.

4. Enter the starting point of the data to read (1 to 8) in the Index text box.
5. Enter the number of words to read (1 to 32) from the Index value in the Length text box.
NOTE: The Index value and Length value cannot equal more than 33.
6. Enter the starting address to store the received data in the References text box. Click OK
when finished to return to the Global I/O dialog.
7. Each device also supports the ability to section the data into blocks using Subfields. To
configure a Subfield for a device, select a configured device and click the Subfield button
in the Global I/O dialog. The Subfield dialog appears.

151
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

8. Add subfields to a device by clicking the Insert button. Configure each subfield in the
same manner as the device, by entering Index, Length, and Reference parameters. Click
OK when finished to return to the Global I/O dialog.
9. Configure each Global Input as above. Click OK in the Global I/O dialog when finished
to return to the Peer Cop dialog.
To configure Specific I/O:
1. Click the Specific I/O button in the Peer Cop dialog. The Specific I/O dialog appears.

2. To configure the Specific Inputs, select the first Specific Input device to configure and
click the Edit button. The Edit dialog appears.

3. Enter the number of words to read (1 to 32) from the Index value in the Length text box.
4. Enter the starting address to store the received data in the References text box. Click OK
when finished to return to the Specific I/O dialog.
5. Configure each Specific Input device as above.
6. To configure the Specific Outputs, select the first Specific Output device to configure and
click the Edit button. The Edit dialog appears.
7. Configure each Specific Output device using the same steps as above. Click OK in the
Specific I/O dialog to return to the Peer Cop dialog.

152
 6 – PLC Configuration

8. Click OK to return to the Configuration Extensions dialog.

S980 Station Address

The S980 Station Address can be specified here to identify the S980 with a specific location.
To add the S980 Station Address extension:
1. Click the S980 Station Address checkbox in the Configuration Extensions dialog. The
S980 Addr button becomes selectable.
2. Select the S980 Addr button. The parameters for S980 Addr appear in the S980 Station
Address dialog.

3. If this is the first time to use the Extension, the address defaults to 000000000000, as seen
above. Enter the new address.
4. Click OK to return to the Configuration Extensions dialog.

Quantum VME Bus Configuration Extension

The Quantum VME Bus extension lets a VME-424/X card control data transfers between
elements of a master/slave
Quantum network. With a master/slave protocol, one element (the “master”) has control over
other parts (“slaves”).
As the network runs, each element can lose and gain master status, based on negotiations with
other members of the network.
To add the Quantum VME Bus extension:
1. Click the TSX QTM VME Sys Ctrl box on the Configuration Extensions dialog box.
The VME Sys Ctrl button becomes selectable.
2. Select the VME Sys Ctrl button. The parameters for VME Sys Ctrl appear in the TSX
QTM VME CE Setup dialog box.

153
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

3. In the Slave Interrupt Level field, type the appropriate value. Boards on a VME Bus can
send and respond to messages on seven interrupt levels, numbered from 1 to 7. This field
determines which interrupt level the board uses when it’s acting as a slave.
4. In the Status ID field, type a value between 1 and 255. When the VME controller receives
an interrupt while acting as a slave, this is the value it sends.
5. Select an appropriate value for Master Arbitration Type. This setting determines how the
controller will operate. Valid settings are Not System Controller, Primary Mode (PRI) or
Round Robin Mode (RRS).
6. Select an appropriate value for Master Release Mode. This field determines when a
board acting as a master relinquishes its master status. Valid settings are Release on
Request (ROR), Release When Done (RWD), Release On Clear (ROC) or Bus Capture
and Hold (BCAP).
7. Select the appropriate value for Master VMEBus Request Level. This setting determines
what priority the board has when trying to acquire master status. It can range from BR0
(the lowest) to BR3 (the highest).
8. For each interrupt level from Interrupt 1 to Interrupt 7, select whether it should be
Enabled or Disabled. These settings will only have an effect when the VME acts as a
master. If an interrupt level is enabled, the controller will respond to any messages sent
on that interrupt. If an interrupt level is disabled, the controller will ignore them.
9. Click OK.

Quantum Hot Standby

The Quantum Hot Standby extension allows additional configuration of the Quantum Hot Standby
setup.
This lets you configure the following:
1. Click the Quantum Hot Standby box on the Configuration Extensions dialog box.
The Hot Standby button becomes selectable.
2. Select the Hot Standby button. The parameters for Hot Standby appear in the
Quantum Hot Standby dialog box.

154
 6 – PLC Configuration

3. In the Command Register Address field, type the 4xxxx address of the command register
used to configure the hot standby system. This register must be transferred every scan
and cannot be in the non-transfer area. The initial command register contains the settings
that are loaded into the controller when it is started. If any changes need to be made
while running, the command register must be used, but not the initial command register.
Settings such as port address swapping, allowing an executive upgrade, setting the
standby’s mode on a logic mismatch, setting the controller’s modes, and overriding the
key switch can be changed from the command register.
4. In the Non-Transfer Start Address field, type the starting address if the range of registers
that is not to be transferred from the primary controller to the standby. This is commonly
used to reduce scan time. The first two registers are for reverse transfer. These registers
allow information to be passed from the standby to the primary controller. The third
register is the Status register, which stores the status of both controllers. This register
provides information on how the hot standby system is operating, such as the power flow
of the CHS instruction, position of the controller’s A/B switch, and whether there is a
logic mismatch between controllers. All registers following the third register are ignored
(not transferred) during the scan.
5. In the Non-Transfer Area Length field, type the length (a minimum of 4 registers to a
maximum of total registers configured in the controller) of the non-transfer register
range.
6. Select one of the following State Ram Transferred options:
7. Default (12K): All 0xxxx and 1xxxx registers (up to 8192 each) are transferred If 10000 or
fewer 3xxxx and 4xxxx (combined) registers are configured, then all are transferred If
more than 10000 3xxxx and 4xxxx (combined) registers are configured, then (up to) 1000
3xxxx registers and all 4xxxx (up to a combined total of 10000) are transferred.
8. Routine only: All addresses defined in the routine transfer table are transferred every
scan. There must be a minimum of 16 4xxxx registers to support the non-transfer area.
The Routine Transfer Table is a range of discrete and registers that must be configured as
a multiple of 16.
9. Routine and Extra: All addresses defined in the routine transfer table and in the extra
tables are transferred. The range of each extra table must be a multiple of 16. The extra
tables can be transferred over multiple scans.
10. All State RAM: All RAM configured in the controller is transferred every scan.
11. In the Max Scans to Include Additional Transfers field, type the number of scans (1-255)
needed for the primary controller to transfer the extra transfer tables to the standby.

155
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Configuring the TCP/IP Extension

The TCP/IP Extension allows a PLC to recognize its TCP/IP communication card. To configure
the TCP/IP Extension:
1. Click TCP/IP Setup box on the Configuration Extensions dialog box. The TCP/IP
button becomes selectable.
2. Select the TCP/IP button. The parameters for Hot Standby appear in the Quantum
TCP/IP Setup dialog box.

3. Using the Card Number field, select a communication card to set up by selecting the
Next or Prev button.
NOTE: Different controllers support different numbers of communication cards: Quantum
113 Rev. 2 and 213 Rev. 2 controllers support two cards, Quantum 424 Rev. 2 supports
up to six, and M1E Momentum controllers only support one card and the Head Number
is fixed at 1.
4. Type the card’s slot number (from 1 through 16) into the Quantum Backplane Slot field.
If you do not want to use an installed card, type 0.
5. Select the Framing Protocol your network uses from the Framing Type radio button.
Your network administrator determines this protocol when the network is set up.
6. Type the card’s TCP/IP address into the Internet Address field. Your network
administrator assigns this address.
7. If your network uses one, type the address of the Default Gateway into its field. Your
network administrator assigns this address
8. If your network uses one, type the address of the Sub-Network Mask into its field. Your
network administrator assigns this address.
9. Click OK.

156
 6 – PLC Configuration

SY/MAX Configuration Extension

The SY/MAX configuration extension allows you to properly access and configure up to six
SY/MAX RIO cards. This extension is only available when using Quantum Rev. 2 or later
controllers.
To configure the SY/MAX extension:
1. Click SY/MAX ENET Setup box on the Configuration Extensions dialog box. The
SY/MAX button becomes selectable.
2. Select the SY/MAX button. The parameters for SY/MAX ENET appear in the
Quantum SY/MAX Ethernet Setup dialog box.

3. Select the particular SY/MAX RIO card you want to configure by selecting the Next or
Prev button, select. The Backplane Slot, Module Drop Number, Retry Count and
Timeout change to reflect the current settings of the selected card. The actual value for
the Card Number has no effect, as long as you choose a different Card Number for each
SY/MAX RIO card you configure.
4. In the Backplane Slot, type the slot number that the RIO card inhabits on the local rack.
If set to 0, the SY/MAX extension assumes that no card exists.
5. In Module Drop Number, type the number of the drop that the selected RIO card
controls. Type –1 if the RIO card has no drop to control.
6. In Retry Count, type the number of times the controller will try to communicate with
the RIO card before it gives up.
7. In Timeout, type the number of 10s of milliseconds the controller will wait for
communications from the RIO card before it times out.
8. Click OK.

MMS ETHERNET
The MMS ETHERNET configuration extension screens provide you with Ethernet connections
through quantum MMS Ethernet modules. You are able to configure Option Module Backplane
Slot numbers, power ON, reset conditions, NSAP strings, X500 NSAP strings, and local Peer IDs.
NOTE: The Quantum 186 controllers support a maximum of two Option boards and the
Quantum 486 controllers support up to 6 option boards (any mix) in the local backplane.

157
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

I/O Scanner
The I/O Scanner extension provides data transfer between two or more M1E controllers on a
TCP/IP network. The
I/O Scanner allows you to simultaneously configure up to 128 communication transactions.
Because the TCP/IP connection is established only once and remains connected during an entire
session, it makes this type of I/O Scanner communication very efficient.
The I/O Scanner extension also provides:
Quantum NOE 771 support.
Link Client / Link Server support.
Support for up to 6 NOE 771 modules consisting of 128 transactions each.
To configure the I/O Scanner extension:
1. Click I/O Scanner Setup in the Configuration Extensions dialog box. The I/O
Scanner button becomes selectable.
2. Select the I/O Scanner button. The parameters for the I/O Scanner appear in the I/O
Scanner Setup dialog box.

3. Enter the Locale Device IP Address.

4. In the Health Block field, type a 1xxxxx or 3xxxxx address.
NOTE: All 1xxxxx addresses are based on a 16-bit boundary. For example, 100001, 100017,
100033, etc.

158
 6 – PLC Configuration

5. Double-click on any transaction or select the Edit button to add a new transaction or
double-click on an existing transaction select the Edit button to edit it. The Edit I/O
Scanner Transaction dialog box appears.

Below are the added features to the Configuration Extensions dialog box if you are using a
Quantum NOE 771 module:
If you are connected to an M1E controller the Card Number spin button is not accessible because
only one module is allowed for the M1E controllers.
If you are connected to a Quantum PLC with the NOE 771 module, the Card Number spin button
allows a valid range of 1 to 6 (inclusive). Each card number has an associated 128 I/O Scanner
transactions.
The Head Number text box replaces the former Master IP Address (Slot) text box. This is the value
of the slot in the local rack where the NOE card is located. For M1E controllers, this will always be
set to 1.
If you are connected to a Quantum PLC with the NOE 771 module, the Master IP Address text
box displays the IP Address of the Quantum controller. This text box only accepts the standard
X.X.X.X IP Address format. This feature is not accessible if you are connected to an M1E
controller.

Transaction Properties:

Server IP Address
Displays the address of the remote device that you are communicating with.

Unit ID
Contains the value of the destination Unit ID. This is an identifier for a pair of transactions
(specifically Link Client/Server transactions). The transaction pair must have matching Unit ID’s.

159
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

An example situation would include a single Server Write sends data to 3 matching Client Reads in
a remote device. All 3 Client Read transactions will accept the data sent from the single Server
Write transaction as long as the Unit ID’s match.

Health Timeout
Displays a value in milliseconds that represents the length of time to wait for a reply for each
transaction.

Repetition Rate
Displays a value in milliseconds that represents the length of time to wait before repeating the
transaction. A value of 0 indicates the shortest length of waiting time.

Function
Supports the following function types:
Read: A unilateral read in which a local device reads data from a remote device.
Write: A unilateral write in which a local device writes data to a remote device.
Read/Write: A unilateral read/write in which a local device reads data from and writes data to a
remote device.
NOTE: With respect to the unilateral function types, there is no intervention required for the
remote devices. They will respond to any Read or Write without the need to setup an
I/O Scanner transaction in them.
Link Client Read: A bilateral function type in which a local device responds to a write transaction
from a remote device that must have a matching server write.
Link Client Write: A bilateral function type in which a local device writes to a remote device that
must have matching server read and write.
Link Client Read/Write: A bilateral function type in which a local device reads and writes data to
and from a remote device that must have a matching server read.
Link Server Read: A bilateral function type in which a local device initiates a read from a remote
device. The remote device must have a matching client write.
Link Server Write: A bilateral function type in which a local device writes to a remote device. The
remote device must have a matching client read.
Link Server Read/Write: A bilateral function type in which a local device reads and writes data to
and from a remote device that must have a matching client read/write.

Fallback Value
Zero: Select to reset the data values for the selected transaction (upon a power loss) to zero.
Hold Last: Select to retain and make the last data values for the selected transaction (upon a power
loss) available at restart.

Read Ref Local

Represents the local data address that receives data from the remote controller.

Read Ref Remote

Represents the remote address where the read data is coming from.

160
 6 – PLC Configuration

Read Count
Represents the number of sequential registers to read. There are up to 125 registers allowed.

Write Ref Local

Represents the local data address that sends data to the remote controller.

Write Ref Remote

Represents the remote address where the write data is going.

Write Count
Represents the number of sequential addresses to write. There are up to 100 addresses allowed.
The Compact Phase II dialog is accessed through the Configuration Extension dialog. The
Compact Phase II is available for 984-E258/E275, E265, E285 processors.

Compact Phase II Configuration

The Compact Phase II dialog allows the SDA Size, RTS and CTS Delays to be modified both
online and offline.
The valid SDA Size range is 0 to 128.
The valid RTS Delay and CTS Delay ranges are 0 to 50.
The Clear Password push button is enabled only when online with a PLC in which the Compact
Phase II is defined and contains a password.
NOTE: A password can ONLY be removed. It cannot be reentered or replaced.

Attaching to Processors which contain the Compact Phase II Configuration Extension

Processors containing the Compact Phase II configuration extension with a password require the
password to be entered before logging in to the PLC. However, users can choose to attach to the
PLC without logging in or entering a password through the PLC Password dialog below.

161
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

To log in to the PLC, select the Attach with Login radio button and enter the Compact Phase II
password in the edit box.
To attach to the PLC without logging in, select the Attach without Login radio button to proceed
online with the PLC without logging in.

Special Considerations Regarding the Compact Phase II Configuration Extension and

Loading Programs into Processors
Programs with or without the Compact Phase II configuration extension can be loaded into a PLC
with or without its own Compact Phase II. The following rules determine how the Compact Phase
II is loaded from a file into the PLC.
1. If a program file contains the Compact Phase II configuration extension and the PLC
does not, all the Compact Phase II settings from the file are loaded into the PLC except
for the password. The Compact Phase II in the PLC will not include the password from
the file.
2. If a program contains the Compact Phase II configuration extension and the PLC already
contains its own Compact Phase II configuration extension, all the Compact Phase II
settings from the file will be loaded into the PLC except for the password. The PLC will
retain its original password (or no password if none was originally present in the PLC).
3. If a program does not contain the Compact Phase II configuration extension and the
PLC does contain its own Compact Phase II, the warning below appears.

Click the Yes button to transfer the program in the file to the PLC and eliminate the Compact Phase
II from the PLC.
Click the No button to terminate the transfer of the program from the file to the PLC. The original
program and Compact Phase II configuration extension in the PLC remain unchanged.

162
 6 – PLC Configuration

Profibus
This extension allows Quantum Revision 2.xx controllers to connect to a Profibus network. To
accomplish this, first verify that you have the following software (included with the Profibus
module as Profibus DP Configuration Pack for CRP 811, Modicon Part # 332SPU83301) installed:
ƒ The Profibus DP Configurator from Softing GmbH
ƒ The SPU931 I/O Mapping Utility from Modicon
NOTE: The above utilities are not FasTrak SoftWorks, Inc. products. You are advised to use
the Profibus DP Configurator and the SPU931 I/O Mapping Utility at your own risk.
Consult each product's respective documentation for more information and support.
Next, verify that the relevant I/O modules are loaded into the Traffic Cop.

The Profibus DP module number (required to continue) is 140 CRP 811 00.
To add the Profibus extension:
1. Select the Profibus checkbox in the Configuration Extensions dialog. The Profibus
Extension setup dialog appears.

2. Set the Drive, Plant Directory, and Station Directory for use with the configuration utilities.
See Modicon's Profibus DP Configurator for CRP 811 Typ: 332 SPU 931 01 manual for more
information on directory settings.
3. Click the Export .CFG button to export a configuration file to the Station Directory.

163
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

4. Configure the Profibus modules with the Profibus DP Configurator and SPU931 utilities
using the exported *.CFG file. Consult each product's respective documentation for more
information on configuration options.
5. After completing configuration, click the Import .CFG button to import the extension to
WorkShop.
6. Click OK to return to the Configuration Extensions dialog.

Loadables
Setting up the loadable modules is the next step in configuring the PLC. The loadable modules
window displays the total number of logic words free, the number of DX modules for the current
PLC type, the currently selected path for loadable files and two list boxes.
The list box on the left displays a list of the loadables stored in the Selected Loadable file. The
loadable instruction name, PLC Type (-80, ABX or 584), loadable size and opcode are listed for
each loadable stored in the file.
The list box on the right displays a list of the loadables in the current program. The loadable
instruction name, PLC type (-80, ABX or 584), loadable size and opcode are listed for each loadable
in the current program.
NOTE: B984-100 and the B984-102 processors do not support loadable modules.
To access the loadable modules configuration;
1. From the Utilities menu, click Loadables in the PLC Configuration dialog box. The
Loadables dialog appears.

2. Click Add to add the selected loadable in the File Contents area to the Current Program
area. Be certain that the loadable is the correct type for the current program.
3. Click Delete to remove the selected loadable from the Current Program area of the
Loadables window.
NOTE: A loadable that appears in the program logic must first be removed from the logic,
before it can be removed from the configuration.
3. Click Browse to search directories and files for new loadable modules with a *.DAT or
*.EXE extension.

164
 6 – PLC Configuration

4. The Save button is only available offline. The Save button is only highlighted when a
single loadable in the right list box is selected. Click the Save button to open the Save File
dialog. This allows the user to save the loadable to a *.DAT or *.EXE file so it can be
loaded into a new or reconfigured PLC program.
5. Click OK to enter your changes. Click Cancel to disregard changes to the Loadables box
and return to the PLC Configuration box.

Set Clock
The final step in configuring your PLC is to set the PLC’s clock.
NOTE: The Set Clock configuration is not support by all processors.
To access the clock setup:
1. Click Set Clock in the PLC Configuration box and the Set dialog appears.

2. Enter the current Month, Day, Year, Weekday, Hour, Minute and Second in military time.
Clicking on the Auto Set button sets the clock to the current computer’s time and date.
3. Click Set to enter your changes. Click Cancel to disregard your changes and return to the
PLC Configuration box.

PLC Status
Use the PLC Status dialog to obtain information about operational status, configuration, error
conditions, etc. of an online PLC.
To access the PLC Status dialog, select the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item. A PLC Status
dialog similar to the following appears.

There are 20 specific PLC Status dialogs. Because no single PLC type uses them all, the ones that
do not apply to the PLC being used are disabled. In the example above of a PLC Status dialog for a
Quantum PLC, three dialogs are disabled.

165
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

To access one of the dialogs, click the applicable button on the right half of the main PLC Status
dialog. For example, when the Machine Configuration button is clicked, the Machine
Configuration dialog appears.

The Machine Configuration dialog illustrates the basic format of each PLC Status dialog.
A data WORD is read from the PLC. This WORD is displayed in binary, hexadecimal, and decimal
formats. The purpose of each bit (or group of bits) is broken out and displayed below the binary
representation. When any status dialog is displayed, the data WORD used in the dialog is read from
the PLC every half second, virtually updating the displayed information continuously.
NOTE: All of the PLC Status dialogs read data from the PLC, but no data is written to the
PLC by the dialogs.
Click the Next button to access the next status dialog offered in the main PLC Status dialog. In
the example listed above, clicking the Next button displays the 984 State dialog.

Click the Previous and Next buttons to display the adjacent status dialogs for the current PLC.
Information about the following PLC Status dialogs follows:

166
 6 – PLC Configuration

ƒ 911 Status ƒ Controller Status ƒ Number of

Segments

ƒ 984 State ƒ DIO Health ƒ Remote I/O

Timeout

ƒ 984 Status ƒ Drop ƒ Run Status

Communication
Errors

ƒ ASCII Message ƒ End of Logic ƒ S901 Status

Status Pointer

ƒ Cable A Errors ƒ Global Errors ƒ S908 Error

ƒ Cable B Errors ƒ Machine ƒ Status Pointer

Configuration

ƒ Communication ƒ Module Health ƒ Stop Code

Status

ƒ Controller State

167
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Machine Configuration
To access the Machine Configuration dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Machine Configuration button. The Machine Configuration dialog, which
varies based on PLC type, appears.

Word 61 Hex (97 Decimal)

Machine Configuration indicates the options present in the controller including:
Remote I/O (S908 processor)
Modbus II
Hot Standby
Distributed Control Processor (D908)
Coprocessors
Machine Configuration also indicates the presence of the Time of Day option and the remote I/O
adapter size.
NOTE: Some S908 remote I/O processor versions support 6 remote drops only. A ‘1’
indicates the option is present.

168
 6 – PLC Configuration

Controller State
To access the Controller State dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Controller State button. The Controller State dialog appears.

S908 or S901 Controller

Word 65 Hex (101 Decimal)
The State word contains size and state information of the controller. A state is any condition that is
set for the life of the controller (16-bit vs. 24-bit) or set by external events (memory protect).
The down size flag indicates controllers with less than 4K of logic memory.
The 16-bit user logic bit indicates controllers that support 2048 references.

S908 Controller Only

The upper bits are unused for 984/S908 or -80 -85 controllers.
Some Micro 984 controllers indicate 0 for battery failed.
NOTE: The 984B and the 780/785 are 24-bit controllers.

169
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

984 State
To access the 984 State dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the 984 State button. The 984 State dialog appears.

S908 or S901 Controller

Word 65 Hex (101 Decimal)
The State word contains size and state information of the controller. A state is any condition that is
set for the life of the controller (16-bit vs. 24-bit) or set by external events (memory protect).
The down size flag indicates controllers with less than 4K of logic memory.
The 16-bit user logic bit indicates controllers that support 2048 references.

S908 Controller Only

The upper bits are unused for 984/S908 or -80 -85 controllers.
Some Micro 984 controllers indicate 0 for battery failed.
NOTE: The 984B and the 780/785 are 24-bit controllers.

170
 6 – PLC Configuration

911 Status
To access the 911 Status dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the 911 Status button. The 911 Status dialog appears.

911 Hot Standby Status (S908)

Word 66 Hex (102 Decimal)
The Hot Standby Status is valid when a redundancy system is present.
This status reports the system presence and health. It also indicates if the unit is the primary or
secondary controller.

171
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Controller Status
To access the Controller Status dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Controller Status button. The Controller Status dialog appears.

S908 or S901 Controller

Word 67 Hex (103 Decimal)
This Status word indicates specific statuses of the controller. Statuses are any conditions that
change while the controller is running, usually from an internal event.

172
 6 – PLC Configuration

984 Status
To access the 984 Status dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the 984 Status button. The 984 Status dialog appears.

S908 or S901 Controller

Word 67 Hex (103 Decimal)
This Status word indicates specific statuses of the controller. Statuses are any conditions that
change while the controller is running, usually from an internal event.

173
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

S901 Status
To access the S901 Status dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the S901 Status button. The S901 Status dialog appears.

Word 68 Hex (104 Decimal)

This Status word indicates the remote I/O processor status.
The upper 4 bits should be zero under normal operating conditions. An error indicates a failure in
the remote I/O processor.

174
 6 – PLC Configuration

Stop Code
To access the Stop Code dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Stop Code button. The Stop Code dialog appears.

S908 or S901 Controller

Word 69 Hex (105 Dec)
The Stop Code word indicates the controller stop state, if any.
A ‘1’ in the most significant bit indicates the controller is not running. Any other ‘1’ bit indicates an
error. Multiple errors are possible.

175
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Number of Segments
To access the Number of Segments dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Number of Segments button. The Number of Segments dialog appears.

Word 6A Hex (106 Decimal)

The Number of Segments is verified when the controller is powered. This is the number of I/O
exchange nodes plus 1 (for end of logic). If this number is not verified, a stop code of 0100 would
result.

176
 6 – PLC Configuration

End of Logic Pointer

To access the End of Logic Pointer dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the End of Logic Pointer button. The End of Logic Pointer dialog appears.

Word 6B Hex (107 Decimal)

The EOL Pointer provides the hexadecimal address of the end of user logic.

177
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Remote I/O Timeout

To access the Remote I/O Timeout dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Remote I/O Timeout button. The Remote I/O Timeout dialog appears.

Word 6C Hex (108 Decimal)

The RIO Timeout word contains the Remote I/O time-out constant. The highest bit of this word
indicates if redundant cables are present.
NOTE: Cable A and Cable B are used for remote I/O communications.

178
 6 – PLC Configuration

ASCII Message Status

To access the ASCII Message Status dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the ASCII Message Status button. The ASCII Message Status dialog appears.

Word 6D Hex (109 Decimal)

This word indicates the status of the ASCII Message database. Bits in this word indicate errors
occurred while creating or editing ASCII messages.

179
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Run Status
To access the Run Status dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Run Status button. The Run Status dialog appears.

Word 6E Hex (110 Decimal)

The Run Status word indicates the operational mode of 984 controllers.
The load mode allows loading a program to the controller.
The run mode indicates the controller is operating in the optimized mode (no editing allowed while
the controller is running).
The debug mode indicates the controller is operating in the normal mode (network editing is
allowed while the controller is running).

180
 6 – PLC Configuration

Status Pointer
To access the Status Pointer dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Status Pointer button. The Status Pointer dialog appears.

The address in Word 6F Hex points to a table of pointers that is 76 words long.
NOTE: This 76-word long table is a table of address pointers for the 75-word long system
status area.

181
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Module Health
To access the Module Health dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Module Health button. The Module Health dialog appears.

S908 Controller
Module Health Status information consists of up to 160 words. A single bit is used to represent the
Health Status of a single module. A binary ‘1’ means that the module is healthy. Each drop in the
I/O sub system has five words allocated to contain I/O module status. Each of these five words
contains the I/O module status of a single rack within the drop. The most significant bit (MSB)
represents the status of the module in slot 1. Slot 2 module status is represented by the bit to the
immediate right of the MSB.
A healthy I/O module must meet the following conditions:
The specified slot must be configured in the Traffic Cop.
The slot must contain the module specified in the Traffic Cop.
Valid communication must exist between the module and the interface.
Valid communication must exist between the interface module and the controller.
On systems using J890/J892s with PROM rev 1000, slot 1 will be
the LSB. J890/J892s with PROM revs greater than 1000 will
appear as previously described. The earlier J890/J892s should be
upgraded, as they will be incompatible with any user
programming that assumes slot 1 status to be the MSB.

NOTE: The bit will be 1 if a module is configured in the Traffic Cop and active.

182
 6 – PLC Configuration

S901 Controller
The I/O Module Health Status information consists of words that represent the module health for
channel pairs.
Each word represents 2 channels. The words are also divided into input modules and output
modules. A single bit is used to represent the Health Status of a single module.
If the slot is inhibited in the Traffic Cop then the bit will be a ‘0’. If the slot contains an input
module then the bit will be a ‘1’. This will not be the case if the “Communication Status Word 2/2
(183)” indicates an error.
If the slot contains an output module and if the active light is on then this bit will be a ‘1’. If the
active light is off then this bit will be a ‘0’. It is common to set the status indicator for an output slot
to toggle between ‘0’ and ‘1’ when active and healthy.
The Upper byte contains the status of the lower channel number of the channel pair (for example,
channel 1 for channel pair 1/2). The lower byte contains the status of the higher channel number of
the channel pair. Each byte represents the status of slots 1 to 8 of the channel. The Most Significant
Bit of the channel represents slot 1 and the Least Significant Bit shows the status of slot 8.

Communication Status
To access the Communication Status dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Communication Status button. Screen 1 of 2 of the Communication Status
dialog appears.

Communication Status (S901)

The Remote I/O communication Status Word 1 shows errors and the normal operating indication
of the indicated channel pair.

183
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Under normal operating conditions, the lower byte should count. The upper portion of the byte
should match the lower portion of the byte.
Any bits set in the upper byte indicate an error condition for the indicated channel pair.
NOTE: A disconnected channel pair or a channel pair that does not exist will set the function
scheduled to 001 (Restart - communication reset).

The Remote I/O communication Status Word 2 shows errors and the retry count on lost
communications. If communication is lost with the indicated channel pair, the corresponding error
bit is set and the retry counter increments. If the retry counter counts to its maximum, other
indicators are affected. Module health is shown as ‘0’.
If communication is re-established, the error count and error word are not cleared.
The only way to clear this word is to cycle power on the controller or issue a start and stop
command.

184
 6 – PLC Configuration

S908 Error
To access the S908 Error dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the S908 Error button. The S908 Error dialog appears.

The S908 Error word contains the S908 start error code. This word is always 0000 in a running
system.
If an error occurs, the controller will not start and generates a stop code system error of 4000.

1 Bad Traffic Cop Length 23 Bad Number of Input Bytes

2 Bad Remote I/O Link Number 25 Bad First Reference Number

3 Bad Number of Drops 26 Bad Second Reference Number

4 Bad Traffic Cop Checksum 27 No Input or Output Bytes

10 Bad Drop Descriptor Length 28 Discrete Not on 16 Bit Boundary

11 Bad I/O Drop Number 30 Unpaired Odd Output Module

12 Bad Drop Holdup Time 31 Unpaired Odd Input Module

13 Bad ASCII Port Number 32 Unmatched Odd Module Reference

14 Bad Number of Modules in Drop 33 1xxxx Reference After 3xxxx Register

15 Drop Already Configured 34 Dummy Module Reference Already Used

185
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

16 Port Already Configured 35 3xxxx Module Not a Dummy

17 More than 1024 Outputs 36 4xxxx Module Not a Dummy

18 More than 1024 Inputs 40 Dummy Then Real 1xxxx Module

20 Bad Module Slot Address 41 Real Then Dummy 1xxxx Module

21 Bad Module Rack Address 42 Dummy Then Real 3xxxx Module

22 Bad Number of Output Bytes 43 Real Then Dummy 3xxxx Module

186
 6 – PLC Configuration

Cable A Errors
Cable A is the main cable connecting the remote I/O Processor to the Remote I/O Interface.
To access the Cable A Errors dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Cable A Errors button. Screen 1 of 3 of the Cable A Errors dialog appears.

Status Word 173 is the count of frame size errors and DMA overrun errors. The high order byte
represents a count of Cable A frame size errors. This indicates that the length of the data message
was incorrect. The low order byte represents a count of DMA receiver overrun counts. This
indicates that the hardware had more data to send than was required.

187
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Status Word 174 is the Cable A LAN receiver error counter and the Bad Drop reception on cable
A counter. This indicates a cable or noise problem to a drop. The “Drop Communication Errors
(173)” should be examined to determine which drop is having problems.

Status Word 175 is the last received LAN error code for cable A. The LAN hardware detected an
error in receiving a message.

188
 6 – PLC Configuration

Cable B Errors
Cable B is the secondary or redundant cable connecting the Remote I/O Processor to the Remote
I/O Interface (optional redundant cables).
To access the Cable B Errors dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Cable B Errors button. Screen 1 of 3 of the Cable B Errors dialog appears.

Status Word 176 is the count of frame size errors and DMA overrun errors. The high order byte
represents a count of Cable B frame size errors. This indicates that the length of the data message
was incorrect. The low order byte represents a count of DMA receiver overrun counts. This
indicates that the hardware had more data to send than was required.

189
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Status Word 177 is the Cable B LAN receiver error counter and the Bad Drop reception on cable B
counter. This indicates a cable or noise problem to a drop. The “Drop Communication Errors
(173)” should be examined to determine which drop is having problems.

Status Word 178 is the last received LAN error code for cable B. The LAN hardware detected an
error in receiving a message.

190
 6 – PLC Configuration

Global Errors
To access the Global Errors dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Global Errors button. Screen 1 of 3 of the Global Errors dialog appears.

Status Word 179 shows the Global Communication Status. This word stores communications
status for both cable A and cable B. Cable A is the main cable connecting the remote I/O
Processor to the Remote I/O Interface. Cable B is the optional secondary or redundant cable. The
specific information stored is shown in the following figure.
NOTE: It is possible for bits 2 and 3 to be ‘1’ and bit 1 to be ‘0’ “Cables (171)”

191
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Status Word 180 is the Global Cumulative error counter for Cable A.
High byte - Framing error count / Low byte - No response count
Errors counted here cause the error counters in “Cable A Errors (168)” to increment.

Status Word 181 is the Global Cumulative error counter for Cable B.
High byte - Framing error count / Low byte - No response count
Errors counted here cause the error counters in “Cable B Errors (169)” to increment.

192
 6 – PLC Configuration

Drop Communication Errors

Status Words 182 to 184 indicate the local drop communication errors status (when a local drop is
present). The first drop may or may not be a local drop depending upon the controller type being
used.
To access the Drop Communication Errors dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the Drop Communication Errors button. Screen 1 of 3 of the Drop
Communication Errors dialog appears.

Status Word 182 indicates the overall health and retry counter for the local drop. If the MSB is not
1, there are “Module Health (166)” errors on the local drop.

193
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Status Word 183 shows the Ourbus error count for the local drop. If the count is incrementing,
there are errors on the local drop. This may be caused by invalid information in the traffic cop, an
unhealthy module in the local drop, or a mismatch between the traffic cop and the actual module in
a slot located in the local drop.

Status Word 184 indicates the Ourbus retry count for the local drop. The All Modules Healthy bit
should be set under normal operating conditions.

194
 6 – PLC Configuration

DIO Health
To access the DIO Health dialog:
1. Access the PLC Status dialog by selecting the PLC Utilities / PLC Status menu item.
2. Click the DIO Health button. The DIO Health dialog appears.

This status is available in the Quantum series controllers only.

The Distributed I/O Health block collects health information on a specified distributed I/O
network.
The top node is a 4 digit constant that contains the head number and the starting drop. The first
two digits indicate the head number. The following two digits contain the starting drop. The
middle node contains the distributed I/O health starting at address 4xxxx. The bottom node
contains the number of distributed I/O drop on which to collect health information.
The top output passes the power of the top input. The bottom output passes power when an
invalid head or drop number is entered in the top node. Only a single network of distributed I/O
can be accessed per DIOH block.

195
7 - Programming
Overview
In this chapter you will discover how to enter and modify logic using PLC Workshop’s features.
Remember, in the Windows environment there is usually more than one way to complete a task.
PLC WorkShop provides keyboard support to access all commands. You may find that the most
efficient method of programming will be through a combination of keyboard and mouse
techniques.

Online versus Offline Programming

Before you begin programming, it is important that you understand the differences between
programming online and programming offline.
While programming online you are connected to a PLC, which may be running. Changing logic in
one network may affect logic in another network. These changes may create unexpected or
hazardous results.

Editing or modifying a program online may produce

unexpected or hazardous results.

To indicate that the Node Editor is active, Node Edit appears on the left side of the title bar of
each online logic program window. In the online mode, PLC Status and powerflow can also be
displayed. However, some editing features are not available, including Cut, Paste, and Paste with
Rewire.
How logic is validated and entered is the greatest difference between the two modes. The Node
Editor (online) transfers logic immediately (when the cursor leaves the instruction) to the PLC after
an instruction or address is inserted, replaced, or deleted. Offline, the entire segment is entered
when you click Validate and Enter Logic from the Program menu or click the “check mark” button
on the toolbar.
If you attempt to exit the Node Editor without transferring an edit to the processor, a warning
message is displayed. The same is true if you attempt to exit a segment in offline mode without
entering the changes.

197
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Using the Logic Editor

The Logic Editor is where to begin programming since it allows you to display, access, and/or
modify logic in the active logic program.
To access the Logic Editor:
1. Open or import a logic program.

2. Select the View / Logic Editor menu item or click the toolbar icon. The Logic
Editor dialog box appears.

ƒ Select a segment by clicking the segment number.

ƒ Click the All Headers button to view all segment and network headers.
ƒ Click the Single Seg button to view the networks in the selected segment.
ƒ Click the Go To... button to display the selected segment in the Ladder Editor.
ƒ Click Clear to clear logic from the selected segment.
ƒ Click Scheduler to access the Segment Scheduler dialog.
ƒ Click Close to close the Logic Editor and return to the active logic windows.
NOTE: The Copy, Cut, Paste, Insert, and Delete buttons are only enabled in the All
Headers dialog.

Using the Segment Scheduler

The Segment Scheduler allows you to control the order and method of execution for each ladder
segment. In addition, you can assign input and output drops to each segment to synchronize I/O
scanning with ladder execution.

198
 7 - Programming

The B984 processor does not support the Segment Scheduler.

To access the Segment Scheduler:
1. Select the View / Logic Editor menu item.
2. Click Scheduler in the Logic Editor dialog. The Segment Scheduler dialog appears.

To edit an entry:
1. Select the desired entry in the Segment Scheduler Table, then click the Edit button. The
Edit dialog appears.
2. Select the desired settings in the Edit box and click OK to enter the changes to the entry.
Click Cancel to disregard edits to the entry and return to the Scheduler.
To delete an entry or entries:
Select the desired entry and click the Delete button. To select multiple entries hold down the
[Shift] or [Ctrl] keys and click ([Shift]+Click or [Ctrl]+Click) or click, hold and
drag across the desired entries in the Segment Scheduler Table, then click the Delete button.
The selected entries are deleted.
To insert an entry:
1. With the cursor at the position you want to insert the new entry, click the Insert button.
The Insert dialog appears.
2. Enter the desired information in the Insert box and click OK to insert the entry. Click
Cancel to disregard the entry information and return to the Scheduler.
NOTE: When the Insert or WDT (see below) buttons are clicked, a check for available table
entries is conducted. If information exists for all 32 entries a warning message appears
stating that the maximum number of entries exists.
3. To insert a Reset Watchdog Timer, click the WDT button. A Reset Watchdog Timer
is inserted at the position of the cursor. Please note; you cannot have consecutive Reset
Watchdog Timers.
4. Click OK to enter your changes in the Segment Scheduler. Click Cancel to disregard all
changes to the Segment Scheduler and return to the Logic Editor.

199
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Using the Ladder Editor

Several logic program windows can be displayed simultaneously. However, one window is active at
one time. In the active logic window, the ladder editor allows you to enter and modify ladder logic.
To make a logic window active, simply place the pointer on the desired window and click the left
mouse button. From the keyboard, press [Alt+W] and press the number of the corresponding
logic window. You will notice that the active window comes to the front of all other windows.

Insert a New Network

In the active logic program window you can insert a new network using the mouse or the keyboard.
To insert a new network using the mouse:

1. Click the toolbar icon. Notice that the new network attaches to the pointer.
2. Bring the pointer into the active logic window. Position the pointer where you want the
new network.
3. Click the left mouse button. The new network is inserted. If the new network is inserted
on existing Network 002, for example, the new network becomes Network 002 and
existing Network 002 becomes 003.
4. Repeat Step 3 to insert additional networks.
5. Remove the new network from the pointer by clicking the arrow on the Instruction Bar.
To insert a new network using the keyboard:
1. Press [Alt+P] and the Program menu drops down.
2. Press [N] or use the down arrow key to highlight New Network and press [Enter].
The New Network dialog appears.
3. Enter the number of the network you wish to enter. If a network 002 exists and you enter
2 in the Network Number box, the existing Network 002 becomes Network 003 and the
new network becomes 002.
4. Press [Enter] and the new network is inserted.
5. Repeat Step 3 to enter additional networks.

Append a New Network

In the active logic program window you can append a new network using the mouse or the
keyboard.
To append a new network using the mouse:

1. Click the toolbar icon. Notice that icon attaches to the pointer.
2. Bring the pointer into the active logic window. Position the pointer where you want to
append a new network.
3. Click the left mouse button. The new network is appended. If the new network is
appended on existing Network 002, for example, the new network becomes 003.
4. Repeat Step 3 to append additional networks.
5. Remove the new network from the pointer by clicking the arrow on the Instruction Bar.

200
 7 - Programming

To append a new network using the keyboard:

1. Press [Alt+P] and the Program menu drops down.
2. Press [A] or use the down arrow key to highlight Append New Network and press
[Enter]. The New Network dialog appears.
3. Enter the number of the network you wish to enter. If the new network is appended on
existing Network 002, for example, the new network becomes 003.
4. Press [Enter] and the new network is appended.
5. Repeat Step 3 to enter additional networks.

Insert a New Row

You can insert a new row to a network similar to inserting a new network. In the active logic
program window, use the mouse or keyboard to place the cursor on an existing row in the network.
To enter a new row using the mouse:

1. Click the toolbar icon. Notice that the new row attaches to the pointer.
2. Place the pointer in the position where you want the new row to appear.
3. Click the left mouse button and the new row is inserted.
4. Repeat Step 3 to insert additional rows.
5. Remove the new row from the pointer by clicking the arrow on the Instruction Bar.
To insert a new row using the keyboard:
1. Press the Insert key to turn the Ins mode on. See the Status Line near the bottom of the
screen.
2. Use the arrow keys to position the parameter cursor (red or highlighted box) in the last row
of the network.
3. Press [Enter] and the new row appears as the last row.
4. Repeat Step 3 to enter additional networks.

Entering Ladder Instructions

Entering Instructions Using the Mouse and Instruction Bar

To enter instructions using the mouse and Instruction Bar:
1. Move the pointer to the Instruction Bar.
2. Click with the left mouse button on the desired instruction on the lower half of the
Instruction Bar. If the desired instruction is not displayed, click the appropriate
instruction group on the top half of the instruction bar.
3. Move the pointer over the logic program. Notice that the instruction is attached to the
pointer.
4. Position the pointer where you wish to place the instruction.
5. Click the left mouse button, and the instruction is placed in that location. If an instruction
cannot be placed in that location, an error message is displayed.

201
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

6. If the sticky cursor has been turned on in the Program Setup under General, the
instruction will remain attached to the pointer. Click the left mouse button once for each
additional instruction you want to insert. To remove the instruction from the pointer,
click the toolbar icon (Selection cursor) that looks identical to the mouse pointer.
7. If the sticky cursor has not been turned on in the Program Setup then after the
instruction has been dropped into place, the pointer returns to an arrow.

Entering Ladder Instructions Using Mnemonics

To enter Ladder Instructions using Mnemonics:
1. In the active logic program, position the cursor (by using the arrow keys) where the
instruction is to be located.
2. Type in the instruction mnemonic at the cursor location and press [Enter]. If you
forget an instruction mnemonic just enter a [?] and press [Enter]. The following
mnemonic pick list will be displayed. Pick the mnemonic you desire by double clicking on
the mnemonic or arrow to the mnemonic and press [Enter]. The mnemonic pick list
will also display if an illegal mnemonic is entered.

3. The following is a list of all Modicon ladder instruction mnemonics:

Mnemonic Instruction
AD16 16-BIT ADDITION
ADD ADDITION
AND This function performs a logical AND
operation.
BCD Converts registers from Binary to BCD or
BCD to Binary.
BLKM Block Move Function
BLKT BLOCK TO TABLE MOVE

202
 7 - Programming

BMDI Block move between normal logic and an

interrupt subroutine.
BROT BIT ROTATE
CALL The Call instruction activates an immediate
or deferred DX function from a library of
functions defined by function codes.
CKSM CHECKSUM
COMM The ASCII Communications Function
CMPR Compare
COMP Logical Complement function. When this
function is performed, a matrix is
complemented.
CONV Convert Block
CTIF The Interrupt/Timer/Counter function
DCTR Down Counter
DIOH DIOH copies the module health for
distributed drops to 4x registers.
DISA Disabled Monitor System
DIV Division
DMTH Double Precision Math
DRUM Drum block
DT Transitional (On To Off) Contact.
DV16 16-Bit Division
EARS Ears loadable.
EMTH Extended Math.
EUCA The Engineering Unit Conversion
FIN First-In Move Function.
FN10 The FN10 custom loadable is used to
communicate to the MMC188/40.
FOUT First-Out Move Function.
FTOI Floating point-to-signed/unsigned integer
conversion.
HIST The Discrete Logic Analyzer/Histogram
HLTH The 984 Health Status.
HSBY The Hot Standby Loadable (HSBY) is a
loadable DX function that manages a Hot
Standby control system.
IBKR Indirect Block Read will indirectly copy

203
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

registers to another block.

IBKW Indirect Block Write will indirectly copy
working registers to individual registers.
ICMP Input Compare compares bit for bit the
feedback data of live inputs to the expected
status of each point in its table.
ID Interrupt Disable block
IE Interrupt Enable block
IMIO Immediate I/O block
IMOD IMOD Interrupt Module Vectors
ITMR Interval Timer Interrupt block
ITOF Signed/unsigned integer-to-floating point
conversion
JSR Jump to subroutine
LAB Description the starting point of a
subroutine
LOAD LOAD block loads a block of 4x registers
(previously SAVEd) from state RAM where
they are protected from unauthorized
modification.
MAP3 The MAP3 function block allows the 984
controller to initiate communications with
MAP network nodes.
MATH MATH function
MBIT Modify Bit
MBUS The MBUS loadable function is used with
the S975 module to initiate a single
transaction with another device on the
Modbus II network
MRTM The multi-register transfer module (MRTM)
MSTR Master Block Instruction
MU16 16-Bit Multiplication
MUL Multiplication
NBIT Normal Bit sets the specified register bit to
the input power state.
NC Normally Closed Contact
NCBT Normally Closed Bit
NO Normally Open Contact
NOBT Normally Open Bit

204
 7 - Programming

OR The OR function performs a logical OR

operation on two matrices.
OTL Latch Coil
OUT Coil

PCFL Processor Control Function Library

PEER The PEER loadable function is used with
the S975 module to initiate identical message
transactions with as many as 16 devices on
the ModbusII network at one time.
PID Analog loop control provides negative
feedback (closed loop) control of a
measured process condition, in order to
eliminate error conditions.
PID2 PID2 analog loop control.
R ºT Register->Table Move Function
RBIT Reset Bit clears the specified bit of a 4X
register.
READ READ data from an ASCII device.
RET Return From Subroutine
RTTI Register to Input Table block
RTTO The Register to Output Table block
SAVE SAVE block saves a block of 4x registers to
state RAM where they are protected from
unauthorized modification.
SBIT Set Bit sets a specified register when input
power is “ON”.
SCIF SCIF is a sequential control interface
function block.
SENS The SENSE function examines and reports
the state of individual bits in a matrix.
SKIP SKIP will skip logic in a group of networks.
SRCH Search for a specified value in a table of
registers.
STAT System Status
SU16 16-Bit Subtraction

SUB Subtract
SWAP SWAP block allows the user to issue one of
three different swap commands.

205
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

TºR Table -> Register Move Function

TTR The Table to Register block
TºT Table -> Table Move Function
T.01 TIMERS – T.01 a timer with a .01 second
time base.
T1.0 TIMERS - T1.0 a timer with a 1.0 second
time base.
T0.1 TIMER – T0.1a timer with a 0.1 second
time base.
T1MS The millisecond timer (T1MS) increments at
intervals of 1 ms.
TBLK Table-to-Block Move moves a block of
holding registers from a block in a source
table to a destination block in one scan.
TEST 16-Bit Magnitude Comparison (Test)
UCTR Up Counter
UT Positive Transition Contact.
VMER VME Read block allows the user to read
data from devices on the VME bus.
VMEW VME Write block allows the user to write
data to devices on the VME bus.
WRIT WRITE data to an ASCII device.
XMRD Extended Memory Read Function
XMWT Extended Memory Write Function
XOR Exclusive Or

PLC WorkShop for Modicon – 32 incorporates use of various function key alternatives and
CTRL/ALT functions.

Windows Default Hot Keys

The following Windows Default hot keys can be automatically used:

Windows Default Hot Key Function

Ctrl A Select All
Ctrl C Copy
Ctrl D DX Zoom Screen
Ctrl F Find
Ctrl L Edit Documentation Window

206
 7 - Programming

Ctrl N New Program

Ctrl O Open Program dialog box
Ctrl P Print
Ctrl S Save Program
Ctrl T Transfer Offline to Online.
Ctrl U Address Used
Ctrl V Paste
Ctrl X Cut
Ctrl Z Undo Changes
F1 Help
F3 Insert Network
F8 Validate and Enter
F9 Branch Down
F10 Activate Menu
DEL Clear current element
END Moves to last column/row 1 of current rung
ENTER Edit: moves to next row, current rung, or to next rung
Display: moves to next row or rung
ESC Deletes current address and put you into edit mode for address
Shift F2 Trace Coil
Shift F3 Untrace Coil
TAB Deletes current address and put you into edit mode for address
? or \ List mnemonics for current field
HOME Moves to column 1, row 1 of current rung
- Draws horizontal line
PgUp Page Up
PgDn Page Down
Ctrl L Edits synonym/descriptor

WorkShop DOS Hot Keys

The following WorkShop DOS hot keys can be used. To enable use:
1. Select the Options / Program Setup menu item.
2. Select the Logic tab.
3. Select Options for General.
4. Within the Hot key options field, select FasTrak/GraySoft DOS.
5. Click OK.

207
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

6.
WorkShop DOS Hot Key Function
Alt P Print
Alt D Data Screen
Alt V Data Screen
Alt W Modify Documentation
Alt H Edit Headers
Alt L Toggle Labels off and on
Alt R Address Used
Alt Z DX Zoom Screen
F1 Normally Open Contact
F2 Normally Closed Contact
F3 Coil
F4 Help
F5 Insert
F8 Horizontal Short
F9 Vertical Branch
F10 Validate and Enter

Modsoft Hot Keys

The following Modsoft hot keys can be used. To enable use:
1. Select the Options / Program Setup menu item.
2. Select the Logic tab.
3. Select Options for General.
4. Within the Hot key options field, select Modsoft.
5. Click OK.

Modsoft Hot Key Function

/ Normally Closed Contact
" or ‘ Normally Open Contact
| or F9 Vertical Branch

= Horizontal Short
[ or ( Coil
F2 Edit mode for address
F3 Insert Row

208
 7 - Programming

Memory Usage

Coils Used
To determine which coils are used and which are unused:
1. Click the View / Coils Used menu item or press [Alt+V, C]. The Coils Used dialog
appears.

2. Click the Used radio button to view the used coils.

3. Click the Unused radio button to view the unused coils.
4. Enter the starting address to begin the search and click the Find button.
5. If a coil is used it is noted with a “C”. If it is not used it is noted with a “.”.
6. Click Close to close the Coils dialog and return to the active logic program.

209
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Address Used
To determine which addresses are used and which are unused:
1. Click the View / Address Used menu item or press [Alt+V, U]. The Coils dialog
appears.
2. Click the Address Used radio button to view the used address.
3. Enter the starting address to begin the search and click the Find button.
4. If an address is used it is noted by an “*”. If it is not used it is noted by an “.”.
5. Click Close to close the Coils dialog and return to the active logic program.

Using the ASCII Message Editor

The ASCII Message Editor gives you the ability to program and playback ASCII messages.
To access the ASCII Message Editor:
1. Click the View / ASCII Message Editor menu item or press [Alt+V, A]. The ASCII
Message Editor dialog appears.

2. Click Close to return to the active logic window.

210
 7 - Programming

To edit ASCII messages:

1. Click or use the arrow keys to highlight the desired message.
2. Click the Edit button on the right side of dialog. The Edit dialog appears.

3. Click OK to enter your changes to the ASCII messages and return to the ASCII Message
Editor dialog. Click Cancel to disregard your changes and return to the ASCII Message
Editor.
The Message Format box on the top half of the Edit dialog displays the selected ASCII message.
You can edit the message in this area. The Message Playback dialog on the lower half of the Edit
dialog displays the selected ASCII message as it will appear on the target ASCII device. Each time
an edit is performed in the Message Format box, the Message Playback box is updated.
The following option buttons are available in the Edit dialog.

Text
Click the Text button in the Edit dialog to enter an ASCII text string in the Text dialog. Click OK
to enter a new field in the Message Format box. If the text will cause the message to exceed 134
words, an error message appears advising you that the message cannot be inserted.
Example:
Enter the following ASCII text string in the Text dialog:

‘This is a text string’

The following will subsequently appear in the Message Playback box of the Edit dialog:
This is a text string

211
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Data Format
Click the Data button on the right side of the Edit dialog to allow you to enter a data value in the
Data dialog.
Select the desired data format and click OK to insert the new field. If the data format causes the
message to exceed 134 words an error message is displayed.
Example:
Data Format Text Entered Appears in Message Playback
Integer 3I4 IIIIIIIIIIII
Integer With Leading Zeros 2L8 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL
Binary 2B3 BBBBBB
Octal 305 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Hexadecimal 3H2 HHHHHH
ASCII 8A AAAAAAAA

Control Code
Click Control in the Edit box to allow you to enter a control code in the Control Code dialog box.
The control code is a value between 0 and 255. Click OK to insert the new field. If the Control
Code causes the message to exceed 134 words an error message is displayed.
Example:

Enter this Control Code Appears in Message Playback

174

Repeat
Click Repeat in the Edit box to allow you to enter a repeat count in the Repeat dialog box. Enter
the repeat count; see example. Click OK to insert the repeat count. If the repeat count causes the
message to exceed 134 words an error message is displayed. Nesting repeats is not a valid ASCII
message.
Example:
Enter this Repeat count Appears in Message Playback
3() Fields inserted between the
parentheses are repeated 3 times.

Space
Click Space in the Edit box to enter a space count in the Space dialog box. Enter the space count;
see example. Click OK to insert the space count. If the space count causes the message to exceed
134 words an error message is displayed.
Example:
Enter this Space count Appears in Message Playback
20X 20 spaces are displayed.

212
 7 - Programming

CR/LF
Click CR/LF in the Edit box to position the next field on the left side of the next row. If CR/LF
causes the message to exceed 134 words an error message is displayed.

Flush
Click Flush in the Edit box to enter a flush buffer in the Flush dialog box. Select the desired flush
buffer. Click OK to insert the flush buffer. If the flush buffer causes the message to exceed 134
words an error message is displayed.
Example:
Enter these values in Flush box Appears in Message Playback
Flush Buffer: Yes Nothing is displayed in the playback
Flush Number of Bytes: 20 box for these fields.
Flush Until Match: 100
Flush Thru Match: 50 to 10

Clear {Edit box}

Click Clear in the Edit box to clear the selected message or messages.
In addition to Edit, the following are the other option buttons available in the ASCII Message
Editor:

Clear {ASCII Message Editor box}

Click Clear to clear the Message Format and Message Playback boxes.

Copy
Click Copy to allow you to, via the Copy dialog box, copy the currently selected ASCII message to
another ASCII message. If the destination to which you are copying the message exists an error
message appears, stating the message exists and will be overwritten. Click OK to copy the message.
Click Cancel to return to the ASCII Message Editor.

Close
When you are finished editing the ASCII messages, click Close in the ASCII Message Editor to
return to the active logic window.

Finding Logic
Use Ladder Find to perform the following Search functions:
Search for a network
Search for a ladder item or reference number
Search for a specific ladder item with a specific reference number
Search for a symbol with or without an address

213
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Find a Network

1. Select the Edit / Find menu item or click the toolbar icon. The Find dialog appears.

NOTE: If Continuous is selected (in Program Setup under Network Number Mode),
networks can be found in consecutive order across segment boundaries. When By
Segments is selected networks are found based on segments, with the first network in
each segment starting with one.
2. Click the Network radio button.
3. In the Network selection box, type the number of the network you wish to find. If
there are 5 networks in the segment, you can only enter a number from 1 to 5.
4. Click the desired option in the Start At box.
5. Click OK to begin the search. If the item is found, the Find dialog disappears, and the
cursor moves to the located item.
6. Click Cancel to disregard the search and return to the active logic program.

214
 7 - Programming

Find an Address or Tag

1. Select the Edit / Find menu item or click the toolbar icon. The Find dialog
appears.
2. Click the Address/Tag button.
3. In the Address/Tag text box, type the address or tag you wish to find.
4. In the Range box, identify the range of segments you want to search. Choices include
All Segments and Current Segment.
5. Click the desired option in the Start At box. If you selected All Segments in the Range
box, the Start At box is unavailable.
6. Click OK to begin the search. If the item is found, the Find dialog disappears, and the
cursor moves to the located item.
7. Click Cancel to disregard the search and return to the active logic program.

Find a Ladder Symbol

1. Select the Edit / Find menu item or click the toolbar icon. The Find dialog
appears.
2. Click the Ladder Symbol radio button.
3. In the Range box, identify the range of segments you want to search. Choices include
All Segments and Current Segment.
4. Click the desired option in the Start At box. If you selected All Segments in the Range
box, the Start At box is unavailable.
5. Click the Browse button to launch the Symbol Library Pick window. Within this
window, choose the symbol desired.
6. Click OK to begin the search. If the item is found, the Find dialog disappears, and the
cursor moves to the located item.
7. Click Cancel to disregard the search and return to the active logic program.

Find a Ladder Item

1. Select the Edit / Find menu item or click the toolbar icon. The Find dialog
appears.
2. In the Search Type field, select the Instruction radio button.
3. In the Instruction drop-down box, select the item to be searched for.
4. In the Range box, identify the range of segments you want to search for. Choices
include All Segments and Current Segment.
5. Click the desired option in the Start At box. If you selected All Segments in the Range
box, the Start At box is unavailable.
6. Click OK to start the search.

215
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Find an Address/Tag and Instruction

1. Select the Edit / Find menu item or click the toolbar icon. The Find dialog
appears.
2. Click the Address/Instruction radio button.
3. In the Address/Tag text box, type the address or tag you wish to find.
4. In the Instruction drop-down box, select the item to be searched for.
5. In the Range box, identify the range of segments you want to search for. Choices
include All Segments and Current Segment.
6. Click the desired option in the Start At box. If you selected All Segments in the Range
box, the Start At box is unavailable.
7. Click OK to begin the search. If the item is found, the Find dialog disappears, and the
cursor moves to the located item.
8. Click Cancel to disregard the search and return to the active logic program.

Find Keyword String in a Header

1. Select the Edit / Find menu item or click the toolbar icon. The Find dialog
appears.
2. Click the Header Keyword radio button.
3. In the Header Keyword text box, type the Header text string you wish to find.
4. Click OK to begin the search. If the item is found, the Find dialog disappears, and the
cursor moves to the located item.
5. Click Cancel to disregard the search and return to the active logic program.

Find Next

Select the Edit / Find Next menu item or click the toolbar icon to find the next occurrence
of an address or tag.

Find Previous

Select the Edit / Find Previous menu item or click the toolbar icon to find the previous
occurrence of an address or tag.

Trace Coil and Untrace Coil

Trace Coil
The Trace Coil feature allows the user to find the coil of a selected address more quickly than with
the Find feature. The Trace Coil operation searches the ladder for the coil whose address matches
the selected address. When found, the section of logic that contains the coil is displayed.
Counterpart coils may also be displayed in Ladder beneath the contact instruction. (See Displaying
Traced Coils in Ladder.)

216
 7 - Programming

To locate the coil of an address:

1. Place the ladder cursor on an address in the ladder.
2. Select the Diagnostics / Trace Coil menu item, press the hot-key combination [Shift-
F2], or select Trace Coil from the right-click menu. The Trace Coil and its companion
Untrace Coil items appear.
NOTE: The ladder cursor must be positioned over an address for the Trace Coil feature to
operate. If the ladder cursor is not positioned on an address, the hot-key combination
[Shift-F2] will not operate and the Trace Coil menu items are disabled.
A rolling list of the ten most recent traces is maintained. The logic containing the coils in any of
these previous traces can be displayed.

Untrace Coil
The Untrace Coil feature can redisplay any of the previous traces up to ten.
To locate the coil found in a previous trace:
1. Select the Diagnostics / Untrace Coil menu item, press the hot-key combination [Shift-
F3] or select Untrace Coil from the right-click menu. The Untrace Coil dialog below
appears.

The list box in this dialog contains the addresses of up to ten previous traced coils. It is a rolling list
of the last ten traces. When an eleventh coil is traced, the first coil in the list is removed. Then coils
2 through 9 are moved up the list by one line. Finally, the eleventh coil is added as the tenth item in
the list.
To redisplay the ladder logic in which one of the coils is located, double-click the coil address in the
list box or highlight the coil address and click OK.
NOTE: Previous trace operations must have been performed and held in the history list for
the Untrace Coil feature to operate. If there are no items in this list, the hot-key
combination [Shift-F3] will not operate and the Untrace Coil item on the right-click
menu is disabled.

217
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Displaying Traced Coils in Ladder

As an alternative to locating address coils in the Cross Reference listing, they may be displayed in
the ladder logic beneath each corresponding contact instruction. To enable this feature select the
Diagnostics / Display Traced Coils menu item.
When Display Traced Coils is enabled, the Segment and Network numbers in which the
counterpart coil is located appear within brackets beneath the contact instruction.
In the following example, Segment 1 Network 2 contains a contact with address 000002. The
counterpart coil to this contact is located in Segment 3 Network 8.

Since the Segment and Network numbers shown by the Display Traced Coils feature originate
from the Cross Reference table, the traced coil information is only as current as the last time the
table was built. If the program’s Cross Reference table is not up-to-date, when Display Traced
Coils is turned on, the following update message appears providing the opportunity to rebuild the
Cross Reference table and make the Display Traced Coils information as complete as possible.

NOTE: The forced state of the Discrete displays next to the coil trace.

218
 7 - Programming

Using the Data Window

The Data Window menu item opens a new window and allows you to view and change the data
values of your program.
Once you display addresses in the Data Window, you can enter specific values. If monitoring data
online, you can enter a value for a particular address and send it directly to the processor.
You can also create tables of addresses, store them on a disk, and transfer them to the PLC at a
later time.
1. With a logic program open, select the View / Data Window menu option or click the

toolbar icon. The Data Window dialog appears. Use the Option / Program Setup
menu item or the right mouse menu to change which columns are displayed in the Data
Window. See Program Setup in Chapter 4.

To view or manipulate data in the Data Window:

1. Type an address or tag in the address field. Press [Enter] to accept the address/tag.
NOTE: Press [Ctrl L] on the Description or Tag column to display the Documentation
Editor.
2. The status of the register address can be turned on or off by selecting Status on/off
from the shortcut menu. To modify discrete (0x and 1x) data values, click the right
mouse button in the data field and select On or Off from the menu. To modify register
data (3x and 4x) enter data values directly into the register’s data column.
3. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each value you want to view. After entering a value, select the
Data / Next Address menu item or press [F5] to move down one cell and fill in the
next address or tag, or select the Data / Previous Address menu item or press [F6] to
move down one cell and fill in the previous address or tag.

219
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

4. Select the Edit / Clear menu item to clear a row or rows. Select the Edit / Delete
menu item to delete a row or rows; subsequent rows will move up.
5. You can disable or enable a reference that is used in your ladder program. A reference is
considered disabled when the program logic is by-passed and you control the I/O state.
To disable a discrete, click the Disable Off and Disable On buttons. To enable a
discrete, use the Enable button. Only 0x and 1x discretes can be disabled and enabled.
You can also use the pop-up menus to disable and enable states.
6. You can create tables of addresses, store them to a file, and load them again offline or
online. To save a list of addresses, select the Data / Save Template menu item. To
load a list of addresses, select the Data / Load Template menu item.
7. Double-click the Control Menu box in the upper left corner of the active window to
exit the Data Window.

Customizing the Display

The Data Window can be customized to display Tags, Description, both Tags and Description or
neither. These columns can be displayed if selected in the Program Setup.
To modify the display, select the Options / Program Setup menu item or press [Alt-O, P]. Under
the Data Window Tab, click the Tag selection box to include tags and/or click Description to
include the description. De-select both if you do not want to include Tags and Description.

Data Format
Data Format is available for 3x and 4x addresses.
To change the data format:
1. Highlight a single or group of 3x and 4x registers.
2. Select the Data / Format menu item or select Format from the pop-up menu while in the
Data Window. The Data menu is available only while in the Data Window. The Format
menu appears.

220
 7 - Programming

3. Select the desired data format and enter the number of characters to be displayed (1-64)
in the String field.
4. Click OK to accept the format and return to the Data Window.

Editing Logic
PLC WORKSHOP uses a number of timesaving editing features to help you complete your
programming tasks. These include:
ƒ Cut
ƒ Copy
ƒ Paste
ƒ Paste with Rewire
ƒ Replace Table
ƒ Insert
ƒ Clear
ƒ Delete
These editing features are accessed through the Edit menu and keyboard commands. Please see
Chapter 3, PLC WORKSHOP Basics, for a more complete description of the editing features.
Cut, Copy, and Paste are probably the most frequently used editing features. The list below
describes Cut, Copy, and Paste differences.
Cut Removes the selection from
the program and places it on
the clipboard.
Copy Copies the selection and
places it on the clipboard.
Paste Inserts clipboard contents
into the program at the
cursor location.
Paste with Rewire Inserts clipboard contents
into the program at the
cursor location and allows
the user to re-address any
addressable items contained
in the clipboard.

Cut
To use the cut feature:
1. Select the information to be cut.

2. Select the Edit / Cut menu item, click the toolbar icon, or press [Ctrl-X].

221
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Copy
To use the copy feature:
1. Select the information to be copied.

2. Select the Edit / Copy menu item, click the toolbar icon, or press [Ctrl-C].

Paste
To access the paste feature:
1. Move the cursor to the desired location.

2. Select the Edit / Paste menu item, click the toolbar icon, or press [Ctrl-V].
NOTE: When pasting, clipboard contents are inserted before existing items. For example, if
you are pasting a network and the cursor is positioned at Network 2, click paste and the
clipboard contents become Network 2. The previous Network 2 becomes Network 3.

Paste with Rewire

To access the rewire feature:
1. Move the cursor to the desired location.
2. Paste clipboard contents into the new location.
3. Select the Edit / Paste with Rewire menu item. The Paste with Rewire dialog appears.

4. Choose the appropriate options and click OK.

222
 7 - Programming

Clear
Use the Clear dialog to clear an item without removing the space it occupies.
To clear an item or items:
1. Select the item or items to be cleared by clicking, holding and dragging the pointer over the
desired logic.
2. Select the Edit / Clear menu item or press the [Delete] key.
3. Click the items you want to clear.
4. Click OK or press [Enter] and the selected items are cleared.

Editing or modifying a program online may produce

unexpected or hazardous results.

Delete
Use the Delete dialog to clear an item and remove the space it occupies.
To delete:
1. Select the item or items to be deleted.
2. Select the Edit / Delete menu item.
3. Click the items you want to delete.
4. Click OK or press [Enter].

Insert
Use the Insert dialog to insert a selected object (network, row or column) at the point of the current
cursor position.
To insert an object:
1. Select the Edit / Insert menu item.
2. Click on the object to be inserted.
3. Click OK or press [Enter].

Pop-up Menus
Menu items for editing logic are also available by clicking the right mouse within the logic window.
PLC WorkShop for Modicon – 32 incorporates use of various function key alternatives and
CTRL/ALT functions.

Windows Default Hot Keys

The following Windows Default hot keys can be automatically used:

Windows Default Hot Key Function

Ctrl A Select All
Ctrl C Copy

223
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Ctrl D DX Zoom Screen

Ctrl F Find
Ctrl L Edit Documentation Window
Ctrl N New Program
Ctrl O Open Program dialog box
Ctrl P Print
Ctrl S Save Program
Ctrl T Transfer Offline to Online.
Ctrl U Address Used
Ctrl V Paste
Ctrl X Cut
Ctrl Z Undo Changes
F1 Help
F3 Insert Network
F8 Validate and Enter
F9 Branch Down
F10 Activate Menu
DEL Clear current element
END Moves to last column/row 1 of current rung
ENTER Edit: moves to next row, current rung, or to next rung
Display: moves to next row or rung
ESC Deletes current address and put you into edit mode for address
Shift F2 Trace Coil
Shift F3 Untrace Coil
TAB Deletes current address and put you into edit mode for address
? or \ List mnemonics for current field
HOME Moves to column 1, row 1 of current rung
- Draws horizontal line
PgUp Page Up
PgDn Page Down
Ctrl L Edits synonym/descriptor

WorkShop DOS Hot Keys

The following WorkShop DOS hot keys can be used. To enable use:
6. Select the Options / Program Setup menu item.
7. Select the Logic tab.
8. Select Options for General.

224
 7 - Programming

9. Within the Hot key options field, select FasTrak/GraySoft DOS.

10. Click OK.
WorkShop DOS Hot Key Function
Alt P Print
Alt D Data Screen
Alt V Data Screen
Alt W Modify Documentation
Alt H Edit Headers
Alt L Toggle Labels off and on
Alt R Address Used
Alt Z DX Zoom Screen
F1 Normally Open Contact
F2 Normally Closed Contact
F3 Coil
F4 Help
F5 Insert
F8 Horizontal Short
F9 Vertical Branch
F10 Validate and Enter

Modsoft Hot Keys

The following Modsoft hot keys can be used. To enable use:
11. Select the Options / Program Setup menu item.
12. Select the Logic tab.
13. Select Options for General.
14. Within the Hot key options field, select Modsoft.
15. Click OK.

Modsoft Hot Key Function

/ Normally Closed Contact
" or ‘ Normally Open Contact
| or F9 Vertical Branch

= Horizontal Short
[ or ( Coil
F2 Edit mode for address
F3 Insert Row

225
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Validate and Enter Logic

While programming in Offline mode, logic must be validated and entered before it can be saved to
disk or transferred online. See Online versus Offline Programming earlier in this chapter to see the
differences of how logic is validated and entered in online and offline.
To validate and check your logic, select the Program / Validate and Enter menu item, click the
toolbar button, or press [F8]. The message, Validating Logic appears on the screen. Problems
are reported and must be fixed before the logic can be saved or transferred online. After logic is
validated and entered and, if necessary, problems fixed, the logic program can be saved or
transferred online.

Disabling/Enabling Discrete I/O

A reference is enabled when a ladder program controls it. A reference is disabled when the program
logic is by-passed and you control the I/O state. Use the Data screen to disable discrete I/O
references on or off and to enable previously disabled discrete I/O.

Disabling Data
Disabling is useful for simulating the presence of I/O devices that have not yet been installed, or
for bypassing a defective I/O device until it can be replaced.
CAUTION: Only qualified persons familiar with the operation of the PLC program and the
effects that disabling may have on it should use the disabling function. Some logic functions can
change the state of a disabled coil. All DX function blocks override the disabled status of a coil in
the destination node. This may cause personal injury if a coil, assumed to have been disabled,
changes state while a repair is being made.

To Disable an I/O Reference On

When an I/O reference is disabled on, the bit is set to 1 and remains set even though the input
status or program network controlling that bit would normally cause it to be reset. The I/O must
be enabled before the bit can be reset.

To Disable an I/O Reference Off

When an I/O reference is disabled OFF, the bit is reset to 0. The bit remains reset until enabled
and set.

To Remove the Disabling

Disabling is removed by enabling the specified reference.

To Disable a 0XXXX or 1XXXX Reference

From the Data Window:
1. Click on the right mouse button while in the Data field of a 0XXXX or 1XXXX
Reference number.
2. From the menu select the type of forcing action you would like to do. Use DISABL
ON or DISABL OFF to disable the state of the I/O.
From the Ladder Editor:
1. From the Ladder Editor select the element to force.

226
 7 - Programming

2. While on the element select the Diagnostics menu. From the menu select the type of
forcing action you would like to do. Use DISABL ON or DISABL OFF to disable
the state of the I/O.

Enabling Data
When a bit is enabled, it is once again controlled by the logic of the ladder program.

To Enable a Reference that has been Disabled

To enable a reference that has been disabled:
From the Data Window:
1. Click on the right mouse button while in the Data field of a reference number to
enable.
2. From the menu select Enable.
From the Ladder Editor:
1. From the Ladder Editor select the element to enable.
2. While on the element select the Diagnostics menu or click on the right mouse button.
From the menu select Enable.

To Enable All I/O References that have been Disabled

To enable all I/O references that have been disabled:
From the Data Window:
1. Click on the right mouse button while in the Data field.
2. From the menu select Clear All Forces.
From the Ladder Editor:
1. From the Ladder Editor select the Diagnostics menu.
2. From the menu select Clear All Forces.

Show All Forces

To show all disabled I/O:
From the Data Window:
1. Click on the right mouse button or select the Diagnostics menu while in the Data
field.
2. From the menu select Show All Forces.

DX Zoom
DX blocks are function blocks for communications, extended mathematics, and other specialty
functions. Use the DX Zoom function within a program to display information about DX blocks
on a Zoom screen.
The amount of information displayed varies with the function you select. Some functions, such as
the Search instruction, display information based upon how you configured the instruction. (See
Variable Length Functions.) Some functions, such as the PID2 instruction, display a consistent
amount of information, regardless of how you configure the instruction.

227
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

The Text Search feature allows for a search of both addresses and key words within the DX
Zoom window. For address searches, the complete address must be typed in, followed by clicking
the Find button. Should the address be found, it will be highlighted with an outline box.
Subsequent searches for the same address can be repeated by again clicking on Find. Searching
for key words is neither case-sensitive nor supports the use of wildcards (ie. *). A successful search
will be performed within the address/parameter descriptions and will highlight the corresponding
address. A search may be repeated by clicking Find for every occurrence.
To access a DX Zoom screen, press [Ctrl - D] when the cursor is on a zoomable function.

228
 7 - Programming

Using the Zoom Screen

The Zoom screen, like the Data Screen, displays data values you can change. The references can be
of two types:
Discrete data values: Displayed standard 0XXXX and 1XXXX formats.
Register data values: Displayed in standard 3XXXX and 4XXXX formats and as bit ranges.
If the PLC type is a 785L with extended memory or a 984B with extended memory, the addressing
size will change to six digits.
For example, 611234:
6 = file type
1 = file number
1234 = element number

Cursor Movement
The cursor marks the position where you can enter addresses and data values.
To move the cursor to any address position in any column, use the arrow keys on the numeric
keypad.

229
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Zoomable DX Functions

Zoomable Instructions
The following instructions are zoomable. The zoom screens for the SRCH and PID2 instructions
are illustrated and described later in this chapter.
AND
BLKM
BLKT
BROT
CKSM
CMPR
COMP
EMTH1 - EMTH38
FIN
FOUT
MBIT
MSTR
OR
PCFL
PID2
R->T
READ
SENS
SRCH
STAT
T->R
T->T
TBLK
WRITE
XMRD
XMWT
XOR

Zoomable Loadable Modules

CALL
DISA
DRUM

230
 7 - Programming

EARS
EUCA
FN10 - DELTA SYSTEMS (SUBFNT 1,5-33)
HIST
HLTH
HSBY
ICMP
MAP3
MBUS
PEER

Variable-Length Zoom Functions

If you select a variable length function, the amount of information displayed in the zoom depends
upon how you configure the instruction. A Search instruction, illustrated below, is a sample of a
variable-length instruction. The configuration of the SRCH instruction will result in the following
zoom screens.

231
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Zoom Function for PCFL Instruction (EQN Function)

The EQN function of the PCFL instruction is an example of a Zoom screen for an instruction that
makes use of bit ranges and entry of a formula string on the status line.
The instruction in Figure 16.15 will result in the zoom screens illustrated in Figure 16.16.

Entering a Formula String

To edit or create the formula displayed in the Equation dialog box, click the Enter Equation
button within the PCFL - EQN Zoom screen dialog box.

1. After pressing Enter Equation button, the cursor is placed at the end of an existing
formula or after ‘E = ‘ for a new formula.
2. Enter the string using variables (A, B, C, D) and Operator Codes (seen on page 2 of the
Zoom screen).
3. When you have completed your formula, click OK. The correct codes are entered into the
associated registers.
4. The total number of registers used in your formula (plus overhead) is displayed on page 1
of the Zoom screen. To optimize register usage, you may enter this number in the bottom
node of the associated instruction.
NOTE: If the bottom node is less then the number displayed in the Zoom screen, then the
number of registers displayed for the Formula Code and the Registers Used Table
will be incorrect.

To Select the Data Format

Data stored in holding registers (4XXXX) and input registers (3XXXX) of the processor can be
displayed in several numbering systems or formats. The default format is unsigned decimal. The
available data formats are listed below. The codes (S, U, H, O, A) identify the current format of
each reference and appear on the screen immediately after the reference value.
S Signed Decimal
U Unsigned Decimal
H Hexadecimal
O Octal
A ASCII
Binary Nothing is displayed
Float Nothing is displayed
L Long

232
 7 - Programming

To Change the Data Format of One Reference

1. On the Zoom screen use the cursor or mouse to highlight the reference whose data
format you want to change.
2. Click the right mouse and select the new format or type in the number followed by the
reference type code and press [Enter].

Using the Cross Reference Feature

In both online and offline programming, addresses or tags in a program can be tracked by viewing
the Cross Reference table.
To access the Cross Reference table:

1. Select the View / Cross Reference menu item, or click the toolbar icon. The Cross
Reference window appears.

If more than one program has been loaded, the information displayed is for the program in the
active window. The cross reference can be based on address or networks by checking the desired
radio button on the cross-reference dialog box.
NOTE: Only validated and entered logic is considered part of the current program. Thus, logic
not entered and validated will not show in the Cross Reference table. See Validate and
Enter Logic.
2. Type in the starting address in the corresponding address box or network number in the
corresponding network box if selected. Click the Build Table button. The cross reference
will build and display the selected information in the list box. The address is displayed on
the left side with the segment number and network number next to the element. To
include the address tag and description next to the address within the list box, select the
Display inline Address Documentation check box.
3. Select the logic item to view from the view window. Click the Goto button or double-click
on the item to jump to the first occurrence of the address.
If the cross reference table status is not current, the title line gives the current status of the cross
reference. Click the Build Table button to update the table.
NOTE: If the Table Update check box is selected in the Program Setup dialog, all changes
made to segments that are validated and entered are automatically updated in the Cross
Reference window.

233
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Compare

File Program Compare

The File Program Compare feature compares two PLC programs, one of which may be online.
Any or all of the following program elements may be compared:

PLC Type Segment Scheduler

Ladder Loadables
Traffic Cop Up to 7 ranges of memory:
ASCII Messages Coils Used
ASCII Ports 0x, 1x, 3x, and 4x Address
Configuration Disabled 0x and 1x Address
Configuration Extensions

NOTE: The PLC type comparison is mandatory, and if the PLC types are not identical, the
comparison is terminated.
To compare PLC program files:
1. PLC WorkShop compares the current file with a selected *.FMD file. Open the first file,
either online or offline. This file is considered to be the “after” file. That is, a network that
is in this file but not in the other is considered inserted.
2. Bring up the File/Program Compare dialog by selecting the File/File Program
Compare menu option.

3. Click the Browse button to select the PLC program file to be compared against the current
program. This file is considered the “before” file.

234
 7 - Programming

4. Set the Maximum mismatches per category. If PLC WorkShop finds that number of
mismatches in any category, it stops the comparison for that category and moves on to the
next category. If you are checking to see if the programs are identical or nearly so, set the
value low. For a more comprehensive comparison, set the value high.
5. Select the categories to compare, by checking the appropriate boxes. For the memory
ranges, select the category from the drop-down list, and enter the start and end addresses
to be compared in the fields to the left.
By default, each of the range rows has a different category selected, but each row can be set
to any memory category.
6. To save the results to a text file, click the Browse button and specify the file. If no file is
specified, the results are displayed but not saved.
7. Click OK to start the comparison.

Compare Results
The results of the comparison are displayed in a dialog, and, if you specified a results file, in a text
file.

First, the PLC types are compared. If they do not match, that fact is reported and the entire
comparison process ends.
Next, for each compared category, the information in the “before” program is compared to the
corresponding information in the “after” program. As differences are found, they are recorded in
the results:
If the number of mismatches is equal to the limit, that fact is reported, the comparison of that
category ends, and the comparison continues on the next category.
If there are no mismatches in a category, that fact is recorded in the results.

235
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Comparing Ladder Logic

Ladder logic is compared network by network. The results for each network are:
Matched - All instructions and parameters match and are in the same position. When networks
match, nothing is recorded in the results.
Moved - A network in the “after” program matches a network in the “before” program, but the
matching networks are not in the same position in their respective programs.
Changed - Half or more of the output coils match, but some instructions or parameters don’t.
Inserted - More than half the output coils in a network in the “after” program are different from
any network in the “before” program.
Deleted - More than half the output coils in a network in the “before” program are different from
any network in the “after” program.

Using the Diagnostic Features

Displaying Processor Status

You can display the status of your processor while online or offline.
To display the processor status:
Click PLC Status from the PLC Utilities menu [Alt+U, S]. Either the PLC Status for online or
offline is displayed.
Click Close to close the PLC Status box and return to the active logic program.

PLC Status online

PLC Status offline

236
 7 - Programming

PLC Operations
This menu item allows you to view and modify PLC operations while online.
To access PLC Operations:
1. Click PLC Operations from the Diagnostics menu [Alt+D, P]. The PLC Operations
dialog box appears.
2. On the left side you will see Processor Status, Login Status, and Memory Protection.
The right side contains several option buttons, which are described below.

Start Push Start and a warning

message is displayed asking
if you want to place the
processor in run mode. Click
Yes to place the processor in
run mode. If the processor is
in run mode, Start is
disabled.
Stop Press Stop and a warning
message appears asking if
you want to place the
processor in stop mode.
Click Yes to place the
processor in stop mode. If
the processor is stopped,
Stop is disabled.
Debug Press Debug and a warning
message appears asking if
you want to place the
processor in debug mode.
Click Yes to place the
processor in debug mode. If
the processor is in debug
mode, Debug is disabled.
Optimize Press Optimize and a
warning message appears
asking if you want to place
the processor in optimize
mode. Click Yes to place the
processor in optimize mode.
If the processor is in
optimize mode, Optimize is
disabled.

237
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Login Press Login and a warning

message appears asking if
you want to login to the
processor. Click Yes to login
to the processor. If PLC
WORKSHOP is logged into
the processor, Login is
disabled.
Logout Press Logout and a warning
message appears asking if
you want to logout from the
processor. Click Yes to
logout from the processor.
If PLC WORKSHOP is not
logged into the processor,
Logout is grayed. If you are
not logged on to the
processor an automatic log
on will be attempted by
those functions requiring
that PLC WORKSHOP be
logged onto the processor.
3. Click Close to close the PLC Operations box and return to the active logic program.

Debugging Logic Programs (online)

Another diagnostic feature you will find helpful is Debug, which gives you the ability to control the
scan of program logic. Debug is an online feature only.
To debug your logic:
1. Click Debug from the Diagnostics menu [Alt+D, D]. The Debug dialog box appears.

NOTE: The Debug box remains visible until you click Close. However, you are able to
continue programming with the Debug box open.

238
 7 - Programming

2. Select either Single Sweep or Constant Sweep by clicking the option circle or pressing
the Space Bar when the option is highlighted.
3. Enter the desired options for the sweep mode that you select. If you select Single Sweep,
you cannot enter options for Constant Sweep and vice versa.
4. Click Invoke Sweep to begin the logic scan. Click Cancel to stop the scan.
5. When finished debugging the ladder logic, click Close to close the Debug dialog box and
return to the active logic program.

Powerflow and Ladder Status (online)

You can display the values of your addresses and view the flow of power in the PLC by using Status
and Powerflow. Status and Powerflow are available in online only.
Status and Powerflow will continue to update when you scroll and cursor within your online
program.
To display ladder status:
1. Click Logic Status on the Diagnostics menu [Alt+D,L]. The Logic Status menu item
displays a check if Status has been turned on.
2. Ladder status is indicated by the following features:
Normally Open contacts, coils and one-shots, when On, are displayed in Red. Normally-closed
contacts are displayed in red when the status value is zero (Off).
Addresses in box instructions indicate the current value for each address.
If logic is skipped, the text “Skipped” is displayed to the right of the network header bitmap of each
skipped network.
Disabled states are displayed with the text “DisOn” or “DisOff”, for disabled on and disabled off,
respectively.
3. Click Logic Status on the Program menu to stop displaying status.
To display powerflow:
1. Click Powerflow on the Diagnostics menu [Alt+D, P]. The Powerflow menu item
displays a check if powerflow has been turned on.
2. Powerflow is indicated by the following features:
The power rail at the left is displayed in Red. Starting from the left rail and moving left to right,
instructions and connecting shorts and branches are displayed in red until the powerflow fails to
continue.
Addresses in box instructions indicate the current value for each address.
If logic is skipped, the text “Skipped” is displayed to the right of the network header bitmap of each
skipped network.
Disabled states are displayed with the text “DisOn” or “DisOff”, for disabled on and disabled off,
respectively.
3. Click Powerflow on the Diagnostics menu to stop displaying powerflow.

239
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Clearing Memory
This option allows you to clear all logic, including coils used and ASCII messages, data, tags, cross
reference, and documentation in the current program. However values set in the PLC
Configuration are not affected by using this option.
You can use clear memory in either online or offline mode. When programming offline, you clear
the entire active program. When programming online, you clear the PLC memory. However you
cannot clear memory online while the processor is in Run mode. You must first stop the processor
before clearing the memory online. Also, you cannot clear memory if your PLC has a memory
protection feature and it is turned on.
To access the Clear Memory option:
1. If you want to save the changes you’ve made to your logic and documentation, save them
before going to Step 2. Use the Save Program or Save Program As options in the File
menu.
2. Click Clear Memory from the PLC Utilities menu [Alt+U, C]. A warning message appears
stating all program logic, data values, tags, and documentation will be deleted.
3. Click Yes to clear all memory. If changes to the program were not saved another warning
message appears stating that changes to your program were not saved; do you wish to
continue with the clear memory procedure. Click Yes to clear the memory.

240
8 - Documentation
Using the Segment and Network Headers Editor

Document networks with network header comments and entire segments with segment header
comments. To open a header comment for editing, double-click the toolbar button. The applicable
header dialog displays.

Segment Headers
1. Double-click the Segment Header icon in the active logic program window. The
Segment Header dialog is displayed.

2. Type in your header. Click OK when you're finished.

To see segment headers in the active logic program:
1. Select the Options / Program Setup menu item.
2. Select General in the Options for: combo box.
3. Select the Segment Headers check box.

Network Headers
To create a network header:
1. Double-click the Network Header icon in the active logic program window. The
Network Header Input dialog is displayed.

2. Type in your header and click OK.

To see network headers in the active logic program:
1. Select the Options / Program Setup menu item.
2. Select General in the Options for: combo box.
3. Select the Show Network Headers check box.

241
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

All Headers
The All Headers dialog lists all segment and network headers in the active program. Use the All
Headers dialog to quickly manage and access segments and networks in the program.
To view all headers in the program:
1. Select the View / All Headers menu item. The All Headers dialog appears.

2. Select a segment or network by clicking the segment or network number.

3. Click the Logic Editor button to only view the segment headers within the program.
4. Click the Single Seg button to view the networks in the selected segment.
5. Click the Go To... button to display the selected segment or network in the Ladder
Editor.
6. Click Scheduler to access the Segment Scheduler dialog.
7. Click Close to close the All Headers dialog and return to the active logic windows.
NOTE: The Clear button is enabled for the Logic Editor dialog only.
The All Headers dialog also allows you to edit all network and segment headers quickly and
conveniently. To edit network and segment headers, highlight the header(s) you wish to edit and:
ƒ Click the Copy button to copy the selected header information to the clipboard. This
button is always enabled unless nothing is selected or two or more non-contiguous headers
are selected.
ƒ Click the Cut button to remove the selected header information and copy it to the
clipboard. This button is always enabled unless nothing is selected or two or more non-
contiguous headers are selected.

242
 8 - Documentation

ƒ Click the Paste button to paste the copied header information in the selected area,
overwriting any existing header information in the area. This button is disabled when the
clipboard is empty, nothing is selected, or more than one row is selected.
ƒ Click the Insert button to paste the copied header information in the selected area, moving
any existing header information in the area below the new information. This button is
disabled when the clipboard is empty, nothing is selected, more than one row is selected, or
if a segment header is selected. When a single network header is selected, the insert action
moves all headers down by one row in the segment.
NOTE: If inserting headers will result in a header being dropped from the last network, a
warning message will appear before the insert takes place.
ƒ Click the Delete button to delete the selected header information.
NOTE: Header information cut or copied from the All Headers dialog may also be pasted
into other applications, such as text editor or spreadsheets. The copied header
information is retained on the clipboard as comma-separated values (CSV) and will be
interpreted as such by applications that adhere to current CSV standards.

Using the Documentation Window

In both online and offline programming, you can view and edit tags, descriptions and comments in
your program using the Documentation Window.
The Documentation Window allows you to view, create, edit and delete tags, descriptions and
comments for the active logic program. The maximum number of characters for each item is
defined below:
Descriptions 96
Tags 32
Comments 2048
To open the Documentation Window, select the View / Documentation menu item or click the
toolbar.

The window is displayed with all of the addresses, tags and descriptions in the current program.
The first column indicates the method of sorting.

243
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

NOTE: Only 1 documentation window can be displayed per program.

The window also can be sized and moved to another location within the viewing area, using the
standard window features.
Customizing the Display

The Documentation Window can be customized to display Tags or Descriptions, or both Tags and
Descriptions. Setting options in the Program Setup can customize these. The Program Setup also
allows the sorting method to be selected: by address, tags or descriptions.
To change the display:
1. Select the Options / Program Setup menu item. The Program Setup dialog appears.
2. Within the Program Setup dialog, click the Documentation Window tab.

3. Within the Column Display group box:

ƒ Check the Include Tags check box to include tags.
ƒ Check the Include Descriptions check box to include address descriptions.
NOTE: Either Tags or Descriptions must be included.

244
 8 - Documentation

4. Within the Sort Order group box select the radio button for Address, Tag, or
Description to change the sort method. The sort order also modifies the Documentation
Window by displaying the sort order method as the first column. For example, if the Sort
Order is defined as Tag, then the first column in the Documentation Window is the Tag
column. The address column is always included in the display. See Program Setup in Chapter
4 for more information.

245
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Editing and Creating New Documentation

To create a new address tag, description and comment:
1. Select the Documentation / New Doc menu item, select New Doc from the right-
click menu, press [Ctrl-L] on an open address field, or double-click within the open
address field of the Documentation Window. The Add New Documentation dialog
appears.

2. Enter the address to document in the Address edit box.

3. Enter a new tag, description, and comment.
The Tag and Description fields are sized according to the Column Width variable in the Program
Setup. The font selected in program setup will also be used for the tag and description fields. This
will show the documentation, as it actually will be displayed in the ladder program.
NOTE: If the font and size selected in the program setup are too large to be represented in the
window, a standard font will be used. When this situation occurs, a warning message is
displayed. The tag and description will NOT be shown in its actual size in this case.

246
 8 - Documentation

To edit an existing tag or description:

1. Select the Documentation / Modify Doc menu item, select Modify Doc from the
right-click menu, or press [Ctrl-L] on an address field within the Documentation Window.
The Edit Documentation dialog appears.

NOTE: You can also edit documentation in the Data Window by double-clicking in the
description or tag columns.
2. Edit the tag, description, or comment.
Prev Doc: Click the Prev Doc button to display the previous address that has documentation
associated with it.
Prev Addr: Click the Prev Addr button to display the previous address.
Next Addr: Click the Next Addr button to display the next address.
Next Doc: Click the Next Doc button to display the next address that has documentation
associated with it.

247
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Deleting Documentation
To delete an existing address tag, description and comment:
1. Within the Documentation Window, select the address/tag/description to be deleted.
2. Select the Edit / Delete menu item or select the Delete right-click menu item. The
Delete Range dialog appears.

3. Confirm the addresses to be deleted and click OK.

Searching for an Address, Tag, Description or Keyword

Documentation associated with a specific address, tag, or description can be located by using the
Find option. To find an item:

1. Select the Edit / Find menu item, click the toolbar icon, press [Ctrl-F], press [Alt-
E, F] or select Find from the right-click menu. The Find dialog appears.

2. Enter the text to be searched for in the Find What field.

3. Select a search type of Address, Tag, Description, or Keyword. Find will try to locate the
closest match to the entered search information.
4. Select the Exact Match check box if the text in the Find What field is the entire text to
be found. If the search type is Keyword, the Exact Match check box will toggle to Match
Case. Make this selection to perform a case sensitive search on the Find What text.
Addresses, tags, and descriptions that are found will be located, displayed, and highlighted in the
Documentation Window. If a keyword is located, a similar message window appears with several
search options.

Go To - Click the Go To button to go to the address at which the keyword was found.

248
 8 - Documentation

Find Next - Click the Find Next button to look for the next occurrence of the keyword.
Find Prev - Click the Find Prev button to reverse the search direction to look for previous
occurrences of the keyword.

Documenting 4x BIT-of-WORD Addresses

4x addresses can be documented for information purposes. These BIT-of-WORD addresses are
accessed through the Documentation Window. They cannot be used or referenced in any other part
of WorkShop or the PLC.
To enter documentation for a 4x BIT-of-WORD address:
1. Access the Add New Documentation dialog.
2. Within the Add New Documentation dialog, enter the BIT-of-WORD address to
document in the Address edit box. The entire address may be entered or standard address
shorthand may be used. For example, to specify BIT 12 of address 400022, enter 4:11.12.
3. Enter the Tag, Description, and Description Comment.
The 4x BIT-of-WORD address documentation appears sorted by WORD and BIT in the
Documentation Window as illustrated in the following example:

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting 4x BIT-of-WORD Address Documentation

4x BIT-of-WORD address documentation can be cut, copied and pasted like other documentation.
However, documentation for BIT-of-WORD addresses can be cut, copied and pasted at WORD
address boundaries only.
In the example above, the documentation for addresses 40014.03 and 40014.04 cannot be cut or
copied alone. The documentation for all 40014 addresses must be cut, copied and pasted as a
group. So copying documentation from addresses 40014 to 40016, copies the documentation for
the six addresses within this range: 40014, 40014.02, 40014.03, 40014.04, 40015 and 40016.

249
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Viewing 4x BIT-of-WORD Address Documentation

When viewing the documentation of a 4x BIT-of-WORD address clicking the Prev Doc and Next
Doc buttons displays the previous and next documented address regardless of whether that address
is a 4x WORD or BIT-of-WORD address. However, clicking the Prev Addr and Next Addr
buttons displays the previous and next 4x BIT-of-WORD addresses only. The WORD of the 4x
address is not included in the next and previous address display.
In the example above, clicking Prev Addr once displays the previous BIT-of-WORD address
40014.03. Clicking Prev Addr twice more displays the BIT-of-WORD address 40014.01. Clicking
Prev Addr once more displays the previous BIT-of-WORD address 40013.16, not the WORD
address 40014.
Similarly, when viewing a 4x WORD address, clicking Prev Addr displays the previous WORD
address. If the 4x WORD address 40014 was displayed above, clicking Prev Addr once displays
the previous 4x WORD address 40013. Clicking Prev Addr twice more displays the 4x WORD
address 40011.
NOTE: The Import function will also import Taylor and Modsoft 4x BIT-of-WORD
addresses.

Documenting in Ladder
In addition to editing and creating new documentation in the Documentation Window, you can
also edit and create new documentation in the logic program as you enter and edit your logic. The
Documentation Window can also be used to help you program your logic.
In the logic editor, these features are available:
ƒ Assign Tags
ƒ Assign Addresses
ƒ Edit and Create Documentation in Ladder
ƒ Look up tags and use them in ladder
These items are discussed in the following sections.

Assign Tags
The Assign Tags option allows you to assign tags, descriptions and comments to an undocumented
address that you are currently using in your ladder program. For example, if you enter an address in
an ADD instruction, and that address does not have a tag or description, the Edit Documentation
window in Figure 7.3 will automatically appear when you move off the address. Enter a tag,
description and comment and click OK to save the documentation. This allows you to document
undocumented addresses as you program without leaving the ladder editor.
To assign tags:
1. Select the Options / Program Setup menu item or press [Alt-U, P].
2. Select Ladder in the Options for: combo box.
3. Select the Assign Tags check box.

250
 8 - Documentation

Assign Addresses
The Assign Addresses option allows you to assign addresses, descriptions and comments to tags as
you use them in your ladder program. For example, if you enter the tag NEW_TAG (and
NEW_TAG doesn’t exist), the Edit Documentation window in Figure 7.3 will automatically
appear with the tag filled in. You can enter the address, description, and comment and click OK to
save the documentation. This allows you to assign addresses to tags as you program without leaving
the ladder editor.
To assign addresses:
1. Select the Options / Program Setup menu item or press [Alt-U, P].
2. Select Ladder in the Options for: combo box.
3. Select the Assign Addresses check box.

Editing Documentation in Ladder Editor

You can automatically assign documentation and edit existing documentation by double-clicking on
an address in your ladder program. For example, if you would like to change the documentation for
the address 00001 that is used on a contact, move the cursor to that location and double-click with
the mouse. The Edit Documentation window in Figure 7.3 automatically appears. Enter the tag,
description and comment and click OK to save the documentation.

251
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Edit Title Page (Print Only)

This option allows you to display descriptive information at the beginning of your printouts.
To access the Edit Title Page option, select the View / Title Page Print Editor menu item. The
following dialog window is displayed.

Enter the text to be displayed and click OK.

252
9 - Symbols
Overview
Symbols are a graphical representation of logic instructions such as Normally Open contacts,
Normally Closed contacts, and coils. The symbols can be used to document instructions or for
programming ladder logic.
As can be seen by the provided figure to the left, a Symbol is similar to an instruction as it can be
documented as well as used for logic. And like instructions, symbols can display status and power
flow. Additionally, users can copy, merge, paste, and search for Symbols. Symbols may be animated
during an on-line running of the program’s logic. Animated symbols may also be edited.
Symbols can be a standard, such as IEEE, IEG, etc or they may be a user-defined standard.
Symbols used within a program are stored with that program.

Using Symbols and Symbol Libraries in WorkShop

Prior to beginning a new ladder logic program, the location where WorkShop references the main
symbols library may be viewed and changed. Select the Options / Application Setup menu item
to view and edit this file’s location.

Activating Symbol Toolbars

Once a new PLC program has been established, the ladder symbols must be activated to be
displayed. By default, they are not active until the user activates them.
To activate the toolbars:
1. Select the Options / Program Setup menu item.
2. Click the Logic tab.
3. Select Ladder within the Options for: drop-down menu.
4. Select the Show Ladder Symbols check box within the Individual Program Settings
group box.

Ladder Symbol Manager

The Ladder Symbol Manager allows the current library file to be changed or a new library to be
created and edited. See Accessing the Symbol Library.

253
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Using Toolbars
Once ladder symbols have been activated in the Program Setup dialog, the Symbol toolbar and pick
window are available for use. The toolbar allows for the graphical selection of Normally Open and
Normally Closed contacts and for Coils.
To view the Symbol toolbar, select the View / Toolbars / Ladder Toolbars / Symbol Popup
menu item.
Symbols may be added or deleted from the Symbol Toolbars. See Customizing the Symbol Toolbars.

Customizing the Symbol Toolbars

Symbols may be added to or deleted from each of the symbols toolbars.
To customize these toolbars, select the View / Toolbars / Ladder Toolbars / Customize
Symbol Toolbars menu item or click one of the following buttons: Norm Open, Norm Closed,
or Coils. The Customize Symbol Toolbars dialog appears.

Click the Norm Open, Norm Closed, or Coils tab to edit an instruction toolbar. Cycle between
the main symbol toolbar buttons by clicking on them or by clicking the Move Left or Move Right
buttons. Additional customized toolbar buttons may be added and then edited or deleted by
clicking the Add or Delete buttons. Additional buttons may be re-labeled by typing within the
Button Label field. The Button Tool Tip may be edited in a similar fashion.
Symbols may be added to the Current Toolbar Buttons window by clicking on them from the
Available Toolbar Buttons window and clicking the Ins-> button. Their order may be moved by
clicking to the right, on either the Move Up or Move Down buttons.

254
 9 - Symbols

The Sub Toolbar group box is for customizing the sub tool bar represented by the depressed
Main Symbol Bar button. It consists of a tree control displaying the current Application Symbol
Library and a list box representing the buttons on the sub tool bar. Highlighting the Symbol in the
Tree and pressing the Ins-> button places that symbol on the current sub tool bar. Symbols on the
sub tool bar can be removed or moved.
As an example, edit the Norm Closed button by opening the window using either of the two
methods mentioned above. The window opens with the Norm Closed button grayed and depressed
and the Button Label and Button Tool Tip field filled in. For the current application’s available
Symbols, the Normally Closed file is activated and open, ready for the user to choose Symbols.
Choose a Symbol by clicking on it and then clicking the Ins button. The Symbol is now added to
the Current Toolbar Buttons. If this step is omitted, the software will prompt with the Customize
Toolbar Buttons dialog window, for the desired symbols to be added to the toolbars. This step is
necessary for both contacts and coils.

Programming with Symbols

Logic can be programmed with symbols by using the Symbols Toolbar and the Symbol Pick
dialog window.
NOTE: Before programming can occur, the user must add desired symbols from the
Available Toolbar Buttons section of the Customize Symbol Toolbars to the
Current Toolbar Buttons section.

255
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Programming with Symbols- Using the Toolbar

Similarly to using Logic Instructions Toolbars, the desired instruction’s symbol is picked from the
toolbar and the desired cell is clicked. To establish a relationship between a chosen symbol and an
address used, the address must be entered prior to clicking off from the cell. This relationship can
be used again while programming, by choosing the symbol and its address to be used elsewhere.
This relationship can only be removed within the Edit Documentation dialog. [CTRL-L] Before
clicking off this cell, address the instruction with a valid address. If a symbol chosen no longer
exists in the Symbol Application Library, the ladder type it represents will replace it within the logic.
A warning dialog may pop up when attempting to overwrite a current relationship with a different
latter symbol. Clicking Yes will replace all occurring incidences within the logic program. Clicking
No, cancels the operation.
A second warning dialog appears when entering a symbol with the same name but with different
settings or symbol frames. Clicking Yes replaces the content with the current symbol from the
Application Symbol Library. Clicking No keeps the original symbol. However, in either case, the
symbol relationship is added to the logic program.

Programming with Symbols- Symbol Pick Dialog

Choosing and programming with Symbols can also be done through a menu item.
1. Begin by placing the cursor in the desired cell by clicking within it.
2. Select the Program / Insert Ladder Symbol menu item. The Symbol Library Pick
dialog appears.
3. Choose the symbol either by double-clicking it or by clicking it once and then clicking OK.
4. To cancel the operation, either press [ESC] or click the Cancel button. A relationship
between the address and symbol, mentioned earlier is created.
This relationship can only be removed within the Edit Documentation dialog [CTRL-L]. Before
clicking off this cell, address the instruction with a valid address. If a symbol chosen no longer
exists in the Symbol Application Library, the ladder type it represents will replace it within the logic.
A warning dialog may pop up when attempting to overwrite a current relationship with a different
latter symbol. Clicking Yes will replace all occurring incidences within the logic program. Clicking
No, cancels the operation.
A second warning dialog appears when entering a symbol with the same name but with different
settings or symbol frames. Clicking Yes replaces the content with the current symbol from the
Application Symbol Library. Clicking No keeps the original symbol. However, in either case, the
symbol relationship is added to the logic program.

Documenting with Symbols

Graphical Symbols can be assigned as program documentation (similar to a tag or a description)
within the Edit Documentation window. This window can be accessed by any of the following:
Right-click the desired cell and select the Modify Doc menu item.
Click within the desired cell and press [CTRL-L].
Click within the desired cell and select the Documentation / Modify Doc menu item.
See Edit Documentation Window for details.

256
 9 - Symbols

NOTE: Available symbols are shown depending on the available address. If no address exists,
then no symbol can be viewed or edited until an address is added.

Edit Documentation window

The Edit Documentation window allows the user to choose the addition or deletion of a graphical
symbol. This area is located at the bottom of the window.
To access the Edit Documentation window, click within the desired cell and select the
Documentation / Modify Doc menu item, right-click the desired cell and select the Modify Doc
menu item, or click within the desired cell and press [CTRL-L]. The Edit Documentation window
appears.

To Add a Symbol:
1. Click the Add Symbol button. This launches the Symbol Library Pick window
2. Select the desired symbol and click OK. If a symbol is chosen from the same library folder,
and the user clicks OK, the user is prompted with a warning to replace any existing
symbols from the same folder. The chosen symbol will then appear in the sub-window to
the right of the Add and Delete button.

To Delete a Symbol:
1. Select the desired symbol from the sub-window.
2. Click the Delete button. The user will not be prompted to confirm a request to delete.

257
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

The Symbols Library

Graphical symbols are stored in a main library file. This file is non-editable but may be copied in to
a new library file and stored wherever the user wishes. A newly created library file can be edited as
well as the symbols themselves, found within the library.

Accessing the Symbol Library

To access the Ladder Symbol Manager, select the View / Ladder Symbol Library menu item.
The Symbol Library Manager dialog appears.

The Symbol Library manager defaults to the Application Symbol Library. A non-editable main
library file (Mainlib.lib) is provided by WorkShop. Symbols used within a logic program are then
stored to a Program Symbol Library, which is portable with the logic program.
Two radio buttons at the top of the Symbol Library Manager allow the user to choose between the
Application Symbol Library and the Program Symbol Library. Other Library files may be chosen
by clicking on the browse button and using a *.LIB extension.

258
 9 - Symbols

Editing, Copying, and Storing/Porting

In order to maintain a consistent library for all users, the main library file may not be edited. When
a symbol or a category name is clicked on and an edit or delete operation is chosen, changes cannot
be saved. Only when the main library file is copied to a new library file, can these changes be made.
To copy a library file:
1. Access the Symbol Library Manager dialog by selecting the View / Ladder Symbol
Manager menu item.
2. Click the Copy Lib button. The Symbol Library Transfer dialog appears.

A new library file must first be created. Create a new library file by clicking Browse, entering a
name in the File field of the Open dialog, and clicking Open. Individual symbols and entire
categories can be chosen by clicking on them and clicking the Copy button near the bottom of the
dialog. The user is prompted to save their changes after copying. A Yes will save changes; No will
cancel the operation.
Symbols and entire categories may be deleted from the Application Symbols Library by clicking the
item and then clicking the Delete button near the bottom of the window. Likewise, new user-
specified categories can be created by clicking the Add Category button located near the bottom-
left corner of the dialog.

Adding and Editing Symbols, Animation, metafiles

New symbols can be created, and existing symbols can be edited, within the Symbol Library
Manager dialog.

259
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

To Add a New Symbol:

1. Access the Symbol Library Manager dialog by selecting the View / Ladder Symbol
Manager menu item.
2. Click the New Symbol button. The Add Symbol dialog appears.

To Edit an Existing Symbol:

1. Access the Symbol Library Manager dialog by selecting the View / Ladder Symbol
Manager menu item.
2. Select a symbol to edit.
3. Click the Edit Symbol button. The Add Symbol dialog appears.
NOTE: The Category field may not be changed, however, the specific Ladder Item (NO, NC,
Coil) may be changed.

260
 9 - Symbols

On and Off State Edits

Editing takes place on each active frame. The following list describes the functions of each control
button used for editing.
Copy: Copies the current frame to the Windows Clipboard
Paste: Pastes current Window’s Clipboard contents into the next frame from the current frame
Delete: Deletes current frame; if only one frame exists, it can not be deleted
Edit: Launches metafile editor
Add: Appends a new frame following the current frame and launches the metafile editor
Test: Runs through each frame, beginning always at the first frame
Use Ladder Line Color
Use Status Line Color

Animation Editor
The animation editor, a Window’s metafile editor, can be set up using the Edit Setup dialog The
directory of the editor and the location of the temporary, or cache, file can be changed here. Do not
rename the cache file to any existing symbol files as this file is temporary and is over-written each
time it is opened in the editor.

Zoom In/Zoom Out

WorkShop allows the user to zoom in and out of the symbols within the Symbol Library
Manager. Use the magnifying glass buttons to enlarge or decrease the size of the symbols while
viewing them. This allows for a better idea of what the symbol represents.

On-line Save By Parts

If placing a file online and editing symbols, the symbols can be saved online without having to save
the complete program.

261
10 - Relays, Shorts, and Coils
Relay Instructions

Normally Open Contacts

Ladder Representation

Description
When the coil or discrete input to which a Normally Open contact is referenced is ON, the contact
is closed and passes power. When the coil or discrete input is OFF, the Normally Open contact is
open and does not pass power.

Normally open Normally closed

contact contact
Coil or discrete Passes power Does not pass power
input is ON
Coil or discrete Does not pass power Passes power
input is OFF

Programming Example
This example illustrates a network with a Normally Open contact. When contact 00005 is
energized, it will pass power to coil 00012.

263
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Normally Closed Contacts

Description
When the coil or discrete input to which a Normally Closed contact is referenced is ON, the
Normally Closed contact is open and does not pass power. When the coil or discrete input is OFF,
the Normally Closed contact is closed and passes power. See Table 8.1.

Programming Example
This example illustrates a network with a Normally Closed contact. If contact 10016 is receiving
power, it will be open and will not energize coil 00026.

264
 10 – Relays, Shorts, and Coils

Transitional Contacts

Description
A Transitional contact is turned ON by the transition (OFF to ON, or ON to OFF) of the coil or
discrete input to which it is referenced. It is not affected by the ON or OFF state of the logic coil
or discrete input after the transition. When an OFF to ON (or ON to OFF) power transition is
sensed by the Transitional contact, the contact provides continuity for one scan. When this one
scan is complete the continuity is removed until the transition is repeated.

Programming Example
The following example illustrates the programming of the two Transitional contacts, OFF to ON
and ON to OFF.

265
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Vertical Branches and Horizontal Shorts

Description
Vertical branches and horizontal shorts are straight-line connections between instructions.
Use vertical branches to connect contacts and function blocks one above the other in a network
and to connect inputs or outputs in a function block to create either/or conditions. When two
contacts are connected by vertical branches (a vertical branch on each side) power is allowed to
pass through if either or both contacts receive power.
Use horizontal shorts in combination with vertical branches to expand logic within a network
without breaking the power flow and to create either/or conditions using basic relay contacts. For
example, if one line of logic contains three relay contacts, and the line below it only contains two
contacts, a horizontal short is placed in the lower line.

266
 10 – Relays, Shorts, and Coils

Coils

General Description
Use a coil to activate logic within the ladder program and/or to control an output circuit. It is
represented by a 0XXXX reference number. A coil can be either a Normal coil or a Latched coil. A
Latched coil implies that the power state will retain its last state after the PLC has been powered
down and subsequently powered back up again.
Each 0XXXX reference can be used as a coil only once, but can be referenced by any number of
relay contacts. Output coils are generally given the lower 0XXXX reference numbers and internal
coils are given the higher 0XXXX reference numbers. Output and internal coil reference numbers
may be intermixed since the controller is able to output any valid coil.

Displaying Coils in Ladder

Coils may be displayed in the right-most (eleventh) column or the solve column of a network. To
select a display option:
1. Select the Options / Program Setup menu item. The Program Setup dialog appears.

2. Select the Logic tab.

3. Within the Options for combo box, select Ladder.
4. Within the Show Coils in combo box, select Right-most column to display coils in the
right-most column or Solve column to display coils in the solve columns.

267
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

NOTE: Columns in which coils are displayed cannot be changed while there is logic that has
not been validated. If the Show Coils in setting is changed when all logic has not been
validated, the coil display column setting will revert to its previous selection, and a
warning message will display.
In the PLC memory, coils are actually located and solved in the column of the network in which
they were programmed. Each network can contain a maximum of seven coils.

To Enter a Coil
Insert a logic coil as you would a relay contact except the cursor does not have to be over column
11. The cursor can be directly beside the last logic element in a row. When a coil is entered, dashed
lines are inserted and the coil is placed in Column 11 or the solve column. These dashed lines do
not exist in the PLC memory.

To Avoid Assigning Duplicate Reference Numbers

When entering coils, it is helpful to check the Coils Used table in order to avoid assigning the same
reference number to different coils.
To display the table, select the View / Coils Used/Unused menu item. The Coils Used dialog
appears.

This dialog displays, in numerical order, all the reference numbers previously assigned to coils.

268
 10 – Relays, Shorts, and Coils

Normal Coil

Description
A Normal coil, also referred to as a Non-Retentive coil, is turned OFF if power is removed.
However, if a Normal coil is disabled, it will retain its disabled state if power is removed.

Programming Example

Latched Coil

Description
A Latched coil retains its previous state if power is removed. A Latched coil is also referred to as a
Retentive coil.

Programming Example

269
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Duplicate Coils
The use of duplicate coils for valid 0x registers is configured from the PLC Configuration dialog.
To access this dialog, select the PLC Utilities / PLC Configuration menu item. The PLC
Configuration dialog appears.

In the example above, the Duplicate Coil Start field is set to 000000. By default, PLC WorkShop
assigns a value of 0 to the starting register. Any value greater than zero indicates the first duplicate
coil register used. Any coils less than this value cannot be duplicated.
Clearing this field to allow for less duplicate coils will require that the ladder be cleared while offline
in addition to clearing the PLC while online.

Program Merge and Converting Programs with Cut-and-Paste

A Program Merge will support duplicate coils. Merging into a program not having duplicate coils
will skip networks that do have duplicate coils. The Merge log file is useful for analyzing what
addresses where converted. However, to convert a program having duplicate coils to that of one
without it is suggested to use a Cut-and-Paste. Following the validation of the program, then, PLC
WorkShop will alert the user to where duplicate coils are used.

Duplicate Coils and the Coils Used, Addresses Used, and Cross Reference Tables
Assuming the configuration for a processor is set to use duplicate coils, the Coils Used Table will
become invalid should a user add then delete a duplicate coil. It is suggested that either the Address
Used or the Cross Reference tables be utilized.

PLC Supported
The following PLC types are supported: 381E, 385E, 480E, 485E, 685E, 785E, 785E Quantum
TCOP, E258, E265, E275, E285, all Quantums, 424 VME and all M1 and M1E’s.

270
 10 – Relays, Shorts, and Coils

NOBIT

Description
The Normally open bit (NOBT) instruction lets you sense the logic state of a bit in a register by
specifying a bit in its bottom node. This is representative of a normally open contact.

NOBT instruction

Function Block
Top Node A 3x or 4x holding register whose bit pattern is being used to
represent the normally open contact.
Bottom Node The bit number entered indicates which one of the 16 bits is
being sensed.

271
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

NCBT

Description
The Normally closed bit (NCBT) instruction lets you sense the logic state of a
bit in a register by specifying a bit number in the bottom node. This is
representative of a normally closed contact. Power passes from the top output
when the specified bit is OFF and the top input is ON.

NCBT instruction

Function Block
Top Node A 3x or 4x holding register whose bit pattern is being used to
represent the normally closed contact.
Bottom Node The bit number entered indicates which one of the 16 bits is being
sensed.

NBIT

Description
The Normal bit (NBIT) instruction lets you control the state of a bit from a register by specifying
its associated bit number in the bottom node. The bits being controlled are similar to coils. That is,
when a bit is turned ON, it stays on until a control signal turns if off.
The NBIT instruction does not follow the same rules of network placement as 0x reference coils
do. An NBIT instruction cannot be placed in column 11 of a network and it can be placed to the
left of other logic nodes on the same rungs of the ladder.

272
 10 – Relays, Shorts, and Coils

SBIT

Description
The set bit (SBIT) instruction lets you set the state of the specified bit to ON by powering the top
input.
The SBIT instruction does not follow the same rules of network placement as 0x reference coils do.
An SBIT instruction cannot be placed in column 11 of a network and it can be placed to the left of
other logic nodes on the same rungs of the ladder.

SBIT instruction

Function Block
Top Node The 4x register number is the holding register whose bit pattern
is being controlled.
Bottom Node The bit number entered indicates which one of the 16 bits is
being controlled

273
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

RBIT

Description
The reset bit (RBIT) instruction lets you clear a latched ON bit by powering the top input. The bit
remains cleared after power is removed from the input. This instruction is designed to clear a bit set
by the SBIT instruction.
The RBIT instruction does not follow the same rules of network placement as 0x reference coils
do. An RBIT instruction cannot be placed in column 11 of a network and it can be placed to the
left of other logic nodes on the same rungs of the ladder.

RBIT instruction

Function Block
Top Node The 4x register number is the holding register whose bit pattern is
being controlled.
Bottom Node The bit number entered indicates which one of the 16 bits is being
controlled

274
11 - Timers and Counters
Timers
Timer instructions can be used to time events or create delays in an application. The two-high node
instructions are described in this section.

Description

INPUT LINES

Timing Line The top input controls the operation. When continuity exists
in the Timing line and the Timer is enabled, the Timer will
time. The Timing line controls the start/stop of the Timer.

Enable/Reset Line When continuity exists in the Enable/Reset line, the Timer is
enabled. If continuity does not exist in the Enable/Reset line,
the Timer holding register will be cleared (set to zero).

OUPUT LINES

Timer=Preset The top output passes power when the Timer’s accumulated
Decode Line value equals the preset value.

Timer<Preset The bottom output passes power when the Timer’s

Decode Line accumulated value is less than the preset value.

NOTE: Only one output passes power at a time.

275
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node represents the preset value for the Timer. It
can be a constant, up to 999 in a 16-bit processor or up to
9999 in a 24-bit processor, a 3XXXX input register
reference, or a 4XXXX holding register reference. The
content of this register is the preset value.

For example, if the preset value is 009, it is 9.0 seconds

(T1.0), 0.9 seconds (T0.1) or 0.09 seconds (T.01) depending
on the time base selected. (Hint: Take the preset value and
divide by 1, 10 or 100 to find the value it represents.)

Bottom Node The time base determines at what rate the Timer will time.
The Timer function uses any one of three clocks to record
time.

The bottom node also contains a unique 4XXXX holding

register reference. This register holds the Timer’s
accumulated value and increases in time, starting at zero and
going up to the preset value, as long as both the top and
bottom inputs are receiving power.

NOTE: The controller sets the Timer value to the preset if an attempt is made to enter a value
greater than the preset.

Programming Example
The following example illustrates a circuit that uses a Timer instruction.
When input 10010 is energized, the top input receives power, and since the bottom input is also
receiving power, the timer is enabled and register 40012 begins accumulating time in seconds.
When the value in register 40012 equals 999 (999 seconds), the top output passes power and
energizes coil 00030. The bottom input loses power when input 10011 is energized (the normally
closed contact does not pass power), and the timer holding register (register 40012) value is reset to
zero.

276
 11 – Timers and Counters

Up Counters

Description
The Up Counter (UCTR) function counts the OFF to ON transitions of the control input. This
Counter increases by one at each positive transition of the top input.

INPUT LINES

Up Count Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives a
power transition from OFF to ON, the count value increases
by one.

Enable/Reset Line When continuity exists in the Enable/Reset line, the Counter
is enabled. If continuity does not exist in the Enable/Reset
line, the Counter holding register will be cleared (set to zero)
and any transitions of the Up Count line are ignored.

OUTPUT LINES

Count=Preset The top output passes power when the Counter’s

Decode Line accumulated value equals the preset value.

Count<Preset The bottom output passes power when the Counter’s

Decode Line accumulated value is less than the preset value.

277
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

NOTE: Only one output passes power at a time.

INSTRUCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node contains the preset value for the Counter. It
can be a constant up to 999 in a 16-bit processor or up to
9999 in a 24-bit processor, a 3XXXX input register
reference, or a 4XXXX holding register reference. The
reference holds the preset value.

Bottom Node The bottom node also contains a unique 4XXXX holding
register reference. This holding register contains the count
value and increases, starting at zero, upon each OFF to ON
transition of the control input.

NOTE: The controller sets the count value to the preset if an attempt is made to enter a value
greater than the preset.

Programming Example
The following example illustrates a network using an Up Counter instruction.
When input 10040 is energized, the top input receives power, and since the bottom input is also
receiving power, the Counter is enabled and counting begins. Each time input 10040 transitions
from OFF to ON, the value in register 40041 increases by one.
When this value reaches the value in register 40040, the top output passes power. Coil 00040 is
energized and coil 00041 is de-energized. The bottom input loses power when contact 10041 is
energized (the normally closed contact does not pass power), and the Counter’s accumulated value
is reset to zero.

278
 11 – Timers and Counters

Down Counters

Description
The Down Counter (DCTR) function (Figure 9.3) counts the OFF to ON
transitions of the control input. The Counter decreases by one upon each positive
transition of the top input.

INPUT LINES

Down Count Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives power
transitions from OFF to ON, the count value decreases by
one.

Enable/Reset Line When continuity exists in the Enable/Reset line, the Counter
is enabled. If continuity does not exist in the Enable/Reset
line, the Counter holding register will be set to the preset
value and any transitions of the Down Count line are
ignored.

OUTPUT LINES

Count=Zero The top output passes power when the Counter’s

Decode Line accumulated value equals zero.

Count<=Preset The bottom output passes power when the Counter’s

279
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Decode Line accumulated value is less than or equal to the preset value.

NOTE: Only one output passes power at a time.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node contains the preset value for the Counter. It
can be a constant up to 999 in a 16-bit processor or up to
9999 in a 24-bit processor, a 3XXXX input register
reference, or a 4XXXX holding register reference. The
contents of these register references or holding registers is
the preset value.

Bottom Node The bottom node also contains a unique 4XXXX holding
register reference. This holding register contains the count
value, and decreases, starting at the preset value, upon each
OFF to ON transition of the control input.

NOTE:NOTE: The controller sets the count value to the preset if an attempt is made to
enter a value greater than the preset.

Programming Example
The following example illustrates a network using a Down Counter instruction.
When input 10042 is energized, the top input receives power, and since the bottom input is also
receiving power, the Counter is enabled and counting begins. Each time input 10042 transitions
from OFF to ON, the value in register 40043 decreases by one.
When this value reaches zero, the top output passes power. Coil 00042 is energized and coil 00043
is de-energized. The bottom input loses power when contact 10043 is energized (the normally
closed contact does not pass power), and the Counter’s accumulated value is preset to the value in
register 40042.

280
12 - Arithmetic Instructions
Arithmetic Functions

General Description
The following arithmetic functions are available: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and
Division. All four function blocks occupy three nodes in a network and place the result of the
operation in the bottom node’s holding register. The top input of each function block controls the
operation; when it is receiving power the function is performed.
If you are using a Modicon 351/455 processor in 484 mode, the sequencer instruction and the
ADD, MUL, and DIV instructions operate differently. The differences for the ADD, MUL, and
DIV instructions are identified in this chapter. Sequencers, along with information about the 484
mode.

Addition Function

Description
The Addition (ADD) function (Figure 10.1) adds two values together and places the sum in a
holding register.

281
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives
power, the value in the top node is added to the value in the
middle node and the sum is placed in the bottom node’s
holding register.

OUTPUT LINES

Sum>9999 Decode The top output passes power when the sum is greater than
Line 9999 (999 if in 484 mode); it indicates that a 1 should be
placed in front of the result located in the holding register.

NOTE: Only the top input and top output are used for this function.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node contains a value that can be a constant up to
999 in a 16-bit processor or 484 mode and up to 9999 in a
24-bit processor, a 3XXXX input register reference, or a
4XXXX holding register reference.

The middle node contains a value that can be a constant up

Middle Node to 999 in a 16-bit processor or 484 mode and up to 9999 in a
24-bit processor, a 3XXXX input register reference, or a
4XXXX holding register reference.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the 4XXXX holding register
reference. This holding register holds the sum of the top and
middle node values.

282
 12 – Arithmetic Instructions

Instruction Example
Figure 10.2 illustrates an Addition instruction. If the content of register 40010 is 9999, the result
placed in register 40010 is 0000 and the top output passes power. The top input of the second
ADD block receives power. This function adds a one to register 40009 so the sum of the two
numbers is read properly. If the content of register 40009 is greater than 9999, the top output of
the second block passes power, energizing coil 00102.

NOTE: The ADD block may give incorrect results with sums over 20,000.

Programming Example
The following programming example shows a circuit with an Addition function.
When input 10101 is energized, the top input of the first ADD block receives power and the
content of register 40010 is added to the fixed value 00001. The sum is placed in register 40010.

283
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Subtraction Functions

Description
The Subtraction (SUB) function subtracts one value from another and places the absolute value of
the difference in a holding register.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives
power, the value in the middle node is subtracted from the
value in the top node and the difference is placed in the
bottom node’s holding register.

OUTPUT LINES The use of any or all outputs is optional. Two outputs can be
connected together with vertical branches to create a greater
than or equal to function using the top and middle outputs,
or a less than or equal to function using the middle and
bottom outputs.

Top Node>Middle The top output passes power when the value in the top node
Node Decode Line is greater than the value in the middle node.

Top Node=Middle The middle output passes power when the value in the top

284
 12 – Arithmetic Instructions

Node Decode Line node equals the value in the middle node.

Top Node<Middle The bottom output passes power when the value in the top
Node Decode Line node is less than the value in the middle node.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node contains a value that can be a constant up to
999 in a 16-bit processor and up to 9999 in a 24-bit
processor, a 3XXXX input register reference, or a 4XXXX
holding register reference. The value in the middle node is
subtracted from this value when the control input receives
power.

Middle Node The middle node contains a value that can be a constant up
to 999 in a 16-bit processor and up to 9999 in a 24-bit
processor, a 3XXXX input register reference, or a 4XXXX
holding register reference. This value is subtracted from the
value in the top node.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the 4XXXX holding register
reference. This holding register contains the difference
between the top and middle node values.

Function Example
Figure 10.4 illustrates an example Subtraction function. If the value in 40001 is 9000 and the value
in 40002 is 0500, the result placed in 40003 is 8500.

NOTE: The value placed in register 40003 is the absolute value of the difference; no sign is
associated with the content of register 40003.

Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates a network with a Subtraction function.
When contact 00080 is energized, the top input of the function block receives power and the
subtraction is performed. The value in register 40002 is subtracted from the value in register 40001
and the result is placed in register 40003.

285
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

If the value in 40001 is greater than the value in 40002, the top output passes power and energizes
coil 00011. This indicates a normal Subtract function.
If the value in 40001 is equal to the value in 40002, the middle output passes power and energizes
coil 00012. This indicates a difference of zero.
If the value in 40001 is less than the value in 40002, the bottom output passes power and energizes
coil 00013. This indicates that the answer to the Subtract function is negative.

286
 12 – Arithmetic Instructions

Multiplication Function

Description
The Multiplication (MUL) function (Figure 10.5) calculates the product of two values and places
the answer in two consecutive holding registers. Two consecutive holding registers are used because
the product of two 4-digit numbers can be up to 8 digits in length.

INPUT LINE

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives
power, the value in the top node is multiplied by the value in
the middle node and the product is placed in the bottom two
consecutive holding registers.

OUTPUT LINE

Top Input The top output passes power when the top input receives
Receives Power power. This allows the function blocks to be cascaded within
Decode Line a network.

NOTE: Only the top input and top output are used for this function.

287
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node contains a value that can be a constant up to
999 in a 16-bit processor or 484 mode and up to 9999 in a
24-bit processor, a 3XXXX input register reference, or a
4XXXX holding register reference. The value of the top
node is multiplied with the value of the middle node.

Middle Node The middle node contains a value that can be a constant up
to 999 in a 16-bit processor or 484 mode and up to 9999 in a
24-bit processor, a 3XXXX input register reference, or a
4XXXX holding register reference. The value of the middle
node is multiplied with the value of the top node.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the 4XXXX holding register
reference. This holding register holds the high order portion
of the product even if it is zero. The next consecutive
holding register (4XXXX+1) holds the low order portion of
the product. For this reason, the last available holding
register cannot be used.

Function Example
Figure 10.6 is an illustration of an example Multiplication function. If registers 40005 and
40006 contain the values 2500 and 1110 the product is 2,775,000. Thus, register 40036 is
loaded with the value 0277 and register 40037 is loaded with the value 5000. The two
registers are multiplied and the product is stored every scan that input 10007 is energized.

Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates a network with a Multiplication function.
When input 10007 is energized, the top input receives power and the value in register 40005 is
multiplied by the value in register 40006 and coil 00102 is energized. The resulting product is stored
in registers 40036 and 40037.

288
 12 – Arithmetic Instructions

Division Function (DIV)

Description
The Division (DIV) function divides one value by another value and places the quotient and
remainder in holding registers. If you are in 484 mode, the remainders are discarded. Otherwise, the
remainder is stored in the register following the dividend register. If the 484 mode is off, the
destination register cannot be the last configured register.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives
power, the value in the top node is divided by the value in
the middle node and the quotient and the remainder are
placed in two consecutive holding registers.

Remainder Is The middle input, when receiving power, causes the

Decimal Fraction remainder to be a decimal fraction. If it does not receive
Line power, the remainder is a whole number. For example, 10
divided by 3 has a decimal remainder of .3333 and a whole
number remainder of 1.

OUTPUT LINES

Division Is The top output passes power when the division is successful.

289
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Successful Decode If the middle or bottom outputs pass power, the division is
Line unsuccessful and the top output does not pass power.

The middle output passes power when the quotient is greater

Quotient>9999 than 9999 (999 in 484 mode). If this output passes power,
Decode Line zeros are placed in the bottom node’s holding registers.

Middle The bottom output passes power when the divisor (middle
Node=Zero node) equals zero. If this output passes power, zeros are
Decode Line placed in the bottom node’s holding registers.

Top Node The top node is the dividend. It can be a constant, up to 999
in a 16-bit processor and if you are in 484 mode or up to
9999 in a 24-bit processor, a 3XXXX input register
reference, or a 4XXXX holding register reference. Two
consecutive registers are used and both are needed for a
double precision number. If a single precision number is
desired and registers are being used, fill the first register with
zeros. When a register reference is used, the next register is
implied; therefore, the last available register, input or holding,
cannot be used in this node.

Middle Node The middle node is the divisor. It contains a constant, up to

999 in a 16-bit processor and in 484 mode or up to 9999 in a
24-bit processor, a 3XXXX input register reference, or a
4XXXX holding register reference.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the 4XXXX holding register
reference. This holding register holds the result of the
division. The next holding register (4XXXX+1) holds the
remainder; therefore, the bottom node cannot contain the
last available holding register.

Function Example
Figure 10.8 is an illustration of a Divide instruction. If the double precision number is 1,234,567
(40090=0123, 40091=4567) and the divisor (40130) is 0236, the value 5231 is placed in register
40053 and the decimal remainder 2161 is placed in register 40054.

290
 12 – Arithmetic Instructions

Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates a network with a Divide function.
When contact 00005 is energized, the top input receives power and the contents of registers 40090
and 40091 (double precision number) are divided by the contents of register 40130. The result is
placed into register 40053 and the remainder into register 40054. Since the middle input is receiving
power, the remainder is a decimal fraction rather than a whole number.
If the middle input was not receiving power, the whole remainder 0051 would be placed in register
40054.
Coil 00035 is energized if the division is successful.
Coil 00065 is energized if the quotient is greater than 9999.
Coil 00095 is energized if the divisor (middle node) equals zero.

291
13 - Transfer and Move Instructions
Data Transfer Functions

General Description
This section describes the following functions:
Register to Table Move (R -> T)
Table to Register Move (T -> R)
Table to Table Move (T -> T)
Block Move (BLKM)
Search (SRCH)
Load Instruction Block
Save Instruction Block
A register is a location in the controller’s memory in which a numerical binary value is stored. A
table is a group of consecutive registers or discretes. Use the Move functions to copy data from
registers and/or tables. You can then examine or change the copied data without altering the
original contents.
Each Move function block except STAT occupies three nodes in an eleven-by-seven-node network
format. The function block consists of a source node, a destination node, and a node specifying
table length. The top input is the control input; when it receives power the function is performed.
The top output passes power when the top input receives power, allowing function blocks to be
cascaded within a network. The input(s) to a Move function block can be a single relay contact,
another function block, or a whole network of logic. The output(s) can be connected directly to
coils, to other function blocks, to relay contacts, or left unconnected.
The Move function blocks can perform functions with 3XXXX input registers, 4XXXX holding
registers, and 0XXXX and 1XXXX discrete references. Inputs are only allowed as the source.
Use the following guidelines if using discrete references:
1. Discretes are used in groups of 16.
2. The reference number used is the first in the group; the other 15 references are implied.
3. Only certain reference numbers are valid; the number must be divisible by 16 with a
remainder of 1. The valid reference numbers are: 00001, 00017, 00033, etc., and 10001,
10017, 10033, etc.
4. The table length value refers to the number of groups of 16 discretes (for example, 4
indicates 4 groups or 64 discretes).
5. If a 0XXXX reference is used in a Data Transfer function block as the destination, it
cannot be used anywhere else in the program.

293
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Register-to-Table Move (R ->T)

Description
The Register-to-Table (R->T) Move function copies 16 logic coils, 16 discrete inputs, one input
register, or one holding register into a single specific location within a table of registers.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it is receiving power, the
information in the source register is copied into a location in the table.

Prevent Pointer The middle input, when receiving power, prevents the pointer from
From Increasing increasing.
Line

Reset Line The bottom input, when receiving power, resets the pointer to zero. If
the top input is also energized, the source register is copied to the first
register in the table.

OUTPUT LINES

Top Input The top output passes power when the top input receives power.
Receives Power

294
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

Decode Line

Pointer=Table The middle output passes power when the pointer equals the table
Length Decode length. This indicates that the table is full (end of table).
Line

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node. It can be one of the following
references: a 0XXXX logic coil, a 1XXXX discrete input, a 3XXXX
input register, or a 4XXXX holding register. The source is a single 16-
bit location (e.g., a register or group of 16 discretes).

Middle Node The middle node is the destination node. It is a 4XXXX holding
register that holds the pointer value. The pointer value plus one
indicates the position of a register in a table (i.e., a pointer value of
three indicates the fourth position in a table). The table starts at the
next register (4XXXX+1), not at the pointer.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the table
length. This constant can range from 1 to 255 for 16-bit or from 1 to
999 for 24-bit.

Function Example
The following diagram illustrates the Register-to-Table Move function described in Programming
Example below.

Programming Example
When input 10034 is energized, the top input receives power and the contents of input register
30001 is moved into table 40101-40115. Data is moved one entry per scan. If the pointer value
equals zero when the top input receives power, the contents of register 30001 is moved into register
40101 and the pointer value increases to one.

295
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

On the next scan, provided the top input is still receiving power, the contents of register 30001 is
moved into register 40102 and the pointer value increases to two. Whenever the top input loses
power, the Move operation stops and the pointer holds its value.
Once the pointer has increased to the table size as defined in the bottom node (15), the middle
output passes power and energizes coil 00067. On the next scan, the bottom input receives power
because it is referenced to coil 00067. This input resets the pointer to zero, thereby de-energizing
coil 00067.

296
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

Table-to-Register Move (T ->R)

Description
The Table-to-Register Move function copies one register or group of 16 discretes from a table into
a single holding register.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it is receiving power, the
information in the source table’s register is copied into a single holding
register.

Prevent Pointer The middle input, when receiving power, prevents the pointer from
From Increasing increasing.
Line

297
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Reset Line The bottom input, when receiving power, resets the pointer to zero. If
the top and bottom inputs are energized at the same time, the first
register in the table is moved to the destination register.

OUTPUT LINES

Top Input The top output passes power when the top input receives power.
Receives Power
Decode Line

Pointer=Table The middle output passes power when the pointer value equals the
Length Decode table length (end of table).
Line

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source Node. It can be one of the following
references: a 0XXXX logic coil, a 1XXXX discrete input, a 3XXXX
input register, or a 4XXXX holding register. The source is a table of
16 bit locations. Its size is defined in the bottom node.

Middle Node The middle node is the destination node. It is a 4XXXX holding
register that holds the pointer value. The pointer value plus one
indicates the position of a register in a table (i.e., a pointer value of
three indicates the fourth position in a table). The next consecutive
holding register (4XXXX+1) receives the data. The pointer does not
receive the data.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains a numerical value that specifies the table
length. This constant can range from 1 to 255.

Function Example

298
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

Programming Example
When input 10054 is energized, the top input receives power and the content of the table starting at
40100 is moved into register 40201. Data is moved one register per scan. The pointer value
increases after each move.
If the pointer value equals zero when the top input receives power, the content of register 40100 is
moved into 40201 and the pointer value (register 40200) increases by one.
On the next scan, if the top input is still receiving power, the content of register 40101 is moved
into 40201 (the same register as before) and the pointer value (register 40200) increases to two. On
this second scan, the value of register 40101 takes the place of the value of 40100 in register 40201.
When input 10054 is energized, the top input receives power and the register moved is 40100 plus
the pointer value (e.g., if the pointer value in register 40200 is 32, the register moved is 40132).
When the pointer register 40200 equals 50, coil 00129 is energized. The bottom input is energized
because it is referenced to coil 00129. The pointer is reset to zero, thereby de-energizing coil 00129.

299
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Table-to-Table Move (T ->T)

Description
The Table-to-Table Move function copies discretes from one table to a table of holding registers.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it is receiving power, the
information in one register of the source table is copied into the
corresponding register in the destination table.

Prevent Pointer The middle input, when receiving power, prevents the pointer from
From Increasing increasing.
Line

Reset Line The bottom input, when receiving power, resets the pointer to zero. If
the top and bottom inputs are energized at the same time, the first
register in the source table is moved to the first register in the
destination table.

OUTPUT LINES

Top Input The top output passes power when the top input receives power.
Receives Power

300
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

Decode Line

Destination The middle output passes power when the pointer value equals the
Pointer Value Plus table length (end of table).
One Decode Line

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node. It can be one of the following
references: a 0XXXX logic coil, a 1XXXX discrete input, a 3XXXX
input register, or a 4XXXX holding register. The source is a table of
16 bit locations. Its size is defined in the bottom node.

Middle Node The middle node is the destination node. It is a 4XXXX holding
register that holds the pointer value. The pointer value plus one
indicates the position of a register in a table (i.e., a pointer value of
three indicates the fourth position in a table). The table starts at the
next register (4XXXX+1), not at the pointer.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the
length for both tables. This constant can range from 1 to 255 for 16-
bit and 999 for 24-bit.

Function Example
The following is an illustration of the Table-to-Table Move described in Programming Example
below.

301
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates a network with a Table-to-Table Move instruction.
When input 10044 is energized, the top input receives power. A register from the table which starts
at register 40110 is moved into the register at the corresponding position in the table that starts at
40031. Register 40030 holds the pointer value.
One register is moved per scan and the pointer value increases by one on each scan. The middle
output passes power when the pointer value equals the table size, 10 in this example, thus
energizing coil 00031. On the next scan, the bottom input receives power because it is referenced to
coil 00031. The pointer value is reset to zero; therefore, coil 00031 is de-energized OFF.
At the start of the move, if the pointer is at zero, the contents of register 40110 is copied into
register 40031, and the pointer increases to one. On the next scan, register 40111 is copied into
register 40032, and the pointer increases to two. If the function block stops receiving power, the
pointer holds its value and recalls it when power is returned.

302
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

Block Move (BLKM)

Description
The Block Move function copies the entire contents of a table of registers or discretes into another
table. The entire Move takes place in one scan.

303
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

IBKR

Description
The Indirect block read (IBKR) instruction allows you to access non-contiguous registers dispersed
throughout your application and copy the contents into a destination block of contiguous registers.
This instruction can be used with subroutines or for streamlining data access by host computers or
other PLCs’.

Function Block
Top Node The 4x register is the first holding register in a source table. The
registers in this table contain values that are pointers to the non-
contiguous registers you want to collect in the operation.
Middle Node The 4x register is the first in a block of contiguous destination
registers.
Bottom Node The value entered indicates the length (the number of registers in the
source table).

304
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

IBKW

Description
The Indirect block write (IBKW) instruction lets you copy the data from a table continuous
registers into several non-contiguous registers dispersed throughout your application.

Input Lines Output Lines

Function Block
Top Node The 4x register is the first holding register in a source table. The
registers in this table contain values that are pointers to the non-
contiguous registers you want to collect in the operation.
Middle Node The 4x register is the first in a block of contiguous destination
registers.
Bottom Node The value entered indicates the length (the number of registers in the
source table).

305
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Table Search Operation (SRCH)

Description
The Table Search (SRCH) function searches a table of registers for a specified value. When a
matching value is found, the operation stops and the pointer value indicates the register where the
match is located.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives power, each
register in a table is examined to see if it contains a specified value.
The search begins at the first register in a table unless the middle input
is receiving power and the pointer value is greater than zero.

Start Search at The middle input, when it receives power, begins the search operation
Pointer Register at the register whose location is specified in the pointer register, or
Line continues the search operation from the register in which the match
was found. If the pointer value is greater than zero and the middle
input does not receive power, the search begins at the first register in
the table.

306
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

OUTPUT LINES

Top Input The top output passes power when the top input receives power.
Receives Power
Decode Line

Match Is Found The middle output passes power when a match is found. If no match
Decode Line is found in the scan of an entire table, this output does not pass power
and the pointer is reset to zero.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node. It can be either a 3XXXX input
register reference or a 4XXXX holding register reference. This register
specifies the first register of a table.

Middle Node The middle node is the destination node. It is a 4XXXX holding
register, which is used as a pointer and also holds the pointer value.
This value indicates the location of the register containing a match.
The next consecutive holding register, 4XXXX+1, contains the value
being searched for. This value can be a 4-digit number up to 9999 in a
584L PC, a 3-digit number up to 999 in a 984 PC, a 16 bit binary
pattern, or two ASCII characters.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the table
length. This constant can range from 1 to 100.

Instruction Example

307
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates a network with a Table Search function.
When contact 00013 is energized, the top input receives power. The table, which starts at register
40115, is searched to see if it holds the same value as in register 40261. Register 40260 holds the
pointer value.
If a match is found, the search stops, the position number of the register is placed in 40260, and the
middle output passes power.
To search for additional matches, both the top and middle inputs must receive power. If this
condition is true, the search continues at the next consecutive register after the one containing a
match. If no match is found, the middle output does not pass power and the pointer is reset to
zero.

308
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

FIFO Move Operations

First-in (FIN)

Description
The First-In (FIN) function inserts new data into the queue. The First-In function copies data, a
register value or group of 16 discretes, into the queue table.

INPUT LINE

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives power, the
information in the source register is copied into the first location in
the queue and the pointer value is increased.

OUTPUT LINES

Top Input The top output copies the current state of the top input.
Receives Power
Decode Line

Queue Is Full The middle output passes power when the queue is full: pointer value
Decode Line equals queue length.

Queue Is Empty The bottom output passes power when the queue is empty, pointer

309
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Decode Line value equals zero.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node. It can be one of the following
references: a 0XXXX logic coil, a 1XXXX discrete input, a 3XXXX
input register, or a 4XXXX holding register. The source is a single 16-
bit location (e.g., a register or a group of 16 discretes).

Middle Node The middle node is the destination node. The 4XXXX holding register
specified in the node holds the pointer value. The data is placed in the
destination table queue starting at 4XXXX+1.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the queue
length. This constant can range from 1 to 100.

NOTE: If the pointer register is loaded with a value greater than the queue length, the
controller sets the pointer value to the queue length when the function block is solved.

310
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

First-Out (FOUT)

Description
The First-Out function removes the oldest data, a register value or group of discretes, from the
queue table.

NOTE: The FOUT function is the only function that uses the source node to specify the
pointer register. If the pointer register is loaded with a value greater than the queue
length, the controller sets the pointer value to the queue length when the function block
is solved.

311
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Logical Data Transfer Functions

Logical AND Function

Description
The Logical AND function takes the result of a mathematical operation (AND) on two matrices
and places the result in the second matrix. The value 0 or 1 of each bit in the result is determined by
the values in the two matrices. A resulting bit is a one bit (ON) if both bits, are one bits. If either
bit or both bits are zeros, the resulting bit is a zero bit (OFF).

INPUT LINE

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives power, the
Logical AND function is performed.

OUTPUT LINE

Top Input The top output copies the current state of the top input.
Receives Power
Decode Line

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node. It can be one of the following
references: a 0XXXX logic coil, a 1XXXX discrete input, a 3XXXX
input register, or a 4XXXX holding register. The source matrix is a
group of registers or discretes.

Middle Node The middle node is the second source matrix as well as the destination
node. It can be either a 0XXXX logic coil reference or a 4XXXX
holding register reference. The destination matrix is the same size as
the source.

312
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

The AND function overrides the disable state

of a coil used in the destination node of the
function block. This can cause personal injury
if the user assumes a coil has disabled an
operation and repairs are being made, because
the coil's state can change as a result of the
AND function.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the
matrix length for both matrices. This constant can range from 1
to 100. 1 equals a group of 16 bits, 2 equals a group of 32 bits,
and so on.

Function Illustration
The following programming example illustrates a network with a Logical AND function.

Programming Example
When input 10021 is energized, the top input receives power. A Logical AND operation is
performed on the bit pattern in registers 40061-40063 and registers 40091-40093. The resulting bit
pattern is placed in registers 40091-40093, thereby replacing the previous bit pattern. The source
registers (40061-40063) are not altered.
In applications in which the original information in registers 40091-40093 cannot be lost, the
information must be copied into another table before the AND operation takes place. One way to
do this is to use a Block Move function. Figure 8.30 illustrates an example Logical AND
instruction. If bits 1 through 4 in register 40061 are 0011, and bits 1 through 4 in register 40091 are
0101, the result of a Logical AND operation would be 0001 (placed in register 40091).

313
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Logical Inclusive OR Function

Description
The Logical Inclusive OR function (or simply the Logical OR function) takes the result of a
mathematical operation (OR) on two matrices and places the result in the second matrix. The value
0 or 1 of each bit in the result is determined by the values in the two matrices. A resulting bit is a
one bit (ON) if either bit or both bits, from each matrix, are one bits; if both bits are zeros, the
resulting bit is a zero bit (OFF).

INPUT LINE

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives power, the
Logical AND function is performed.

OUTPUT LINE

Top Input The top output copies the current state of the top input.
Receives Power
Decode Line

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node. It can be one of the following
references: a 0XXXX logic coil, a 1XXXX discrete input, a 3XXXX
input register, or a 4XXXX holding register. The source matrix is a
group of registers or discretes.

Middle Node The middle node is the second source matrix as well as the destination
node. It can be either a 0XXXX logic coil reference or a 4XXXX
holding register reference. The destination matrix is the same size as
the source.

314
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

The OR function overrides the disable state of

a coil used in the destination node of the
function block. This can cause personal injury
if the user assumes a coil has disabled an
operation and repairs are being made, because
the coil's state can change as a result of the OR
function.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the
matrix length in registers or groups of discretes for both
matrices. This constant can range from 1 to 100. 1 equals a group
of 16 bits, 2 equals a group of 32 bits, and so on.

OR Function Illustration
Figure 11.18 illustrates an example OR instruction. If bits 1 through 4 in register 40305 are 0011,
and bits 1 through 4 in register 40075 are 0101, the result of a Logical OR operation (placed in
register 40075) is 0111.

Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates a network with a Logical OR function.

When input 10025 is energized, a Logical OR operation is performed on the bit pattern in registers
40305-40309 and registers 40075-40079. The resulting bit pattern is placed in registers 40075-
40079, thereby replacing the previous bit pattern. The source registers (40305-40309) are not
altered.
In applications in which the original information in registers 40075-40079 cannot be lost, the
information must be copied into another table before the OR operation takes place. One way to do
this is to use a Block Move function.

315
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Logical Exclusive OR Function

Description
The Logical Exclusive OR (XOR) function takes the result of a mathematical operation on two
matrices and places the result in the second matrix. The value 0 or 1 of each bit in the result is
determined by the values in the two matrices.
A resulting bit is a one bit (ON) if either bit, one from each matrix, is a one bit; if they are both
zero bits (OFF) or both one bits (ON), the resulting bit is a zero bit (OFF).

INPUT LINE

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives power, the
Logical Exclusive XOR function is performed.

OUTPUT LINE

Top Input The top output copies the current state of the top input.
Receives Power
Decode Line

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node. It can be one of the following
references: a 0XXXX logic coil, a 1XXXX discrete input, a 3XXXX
input register, or a 4XXXX holding register. The source matrix is a
group of registers or discretes.

Middle Node The middle node is the second source matrix as well as the destination
node. It can be either a 0XXXX logic coil reference or a 4XXXX
holding register reference. The destination matrix is the same size as
the source.

316
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

The XOR function overrides the disable state of a coil used

in the destination node of the function block. This can cause
personal injury if the user assumes a coil has disabled an
operation and repairs are being made, because the coil's state
can change as a result of the XOR function.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the
matrix length for both matrices. This constant can range from 1 to
100. 1 equals a group of 16 bits, 2 equals a group of 32 bits, and so on.

Example XOR Instruction

Figure 11.20 shows an XOR instruction. If bits 1 - 4 in register 30026 are 0011, and bits 1 - 4 in
40206 are 0101, the result placed in register 40206 is 0110.

Programming Example
This example illustrates a network with a Logical XOR function.

When input 10106 is energized, the top input receives power. A Logical Exclusive OR is performed
between the bit patterns in registers 30026-30031 and 40206-40211. The resulting bit pattern is
placed in registers 40206-40211, thereby replacing the previous bit pattern. The source registers
(30026-30031) are not altered.
In applications in which the original information in registers 40206-40211 cannot be lost, the
information must be copied into another table before the XOR takes place. One way to do this is
to use the Block Move function.

317
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Logical Complement (COMP)

Description
The Logical Complement function (COMP) causes the contents of a matrix to be Complemented.
When a matrix is Complemented, all the ones are replaced with zeros, and all the zeros are replaced
with ones. The result is placed in another matrix.

INPUT LINE

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives power, the
Logical COMP function is performed.

OUTPUT LINE

Top Input The top output copies the current state of the top input.
Receives Power
Decode Line

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node. It can be one of the following
references: a 0XXXX logic coil, a 1XXXX discrete input, a 3XXXX
input register, or a 4XXXX holding register. The source matrix is a
group of registers or discretes.

Middle Node The middle node is the destination node. It can be either a 0XXXX
logic coil reference or a 4XXXX holding register reference. The
destination matrix is the same size as the source.

318
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

The Logical Complement function overrides the disable state of a

coil used in the destination node of the function block. This can
cause personal injury if the user assumes a coil has disabled an
operation and repairs are being made, because the coil's state can
change as a result of the Logical Complement function.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the
matrix length for both matrices. This constant can range from 1 to
100. 1 equals a group of 16 bits, 2 equals a group of 32 bits, and so on.

Example Instruction
Figure 11.22 illustrates an example Logical Complement instruction. If bits 1 through 4 in register
40371 are 0011, the Logical Complement, placed in register 40321, is 1100.

Programming Example
This programming example illustrates a network with a Logical Complement function.
When input 10011 is energized, the bit pattern in registers 40371-40375 is complemented. The
resulting bit pattern is placed in registers 40321-40325. The source registers (40371-40375) are not
altered.

319
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

SAVE Instruction Block

Description
The SAVE block saves a block of 4x registers to state RAM where they are protected from
unauthorized modification.

INPUT LINE SAVE has one control input that starts the operation and it should
remain ON until the operation has completed successfully or an error
has occurred.

OUTPUT LINE SAVE may produce two possible outputs. The outputs from the top
node go ON while a SAVE operation is in progress. The output from
the middle node goes ON when previously SAVED data has not been
accessed using the LOAD instruction. This prevents inadvertent
overwriting of data in the SAVE buffer.

Top Node The top node specifies a block of 4x registers to be saved to state
RAM. The 4x register entered here defines the beginning register of
the block.

Middle Node The middle node defines the specific buffer, within state RAM, where
the block of data is to be SAVED. Four 512-word buffers are allowed.
Each buffer is defined by placing its corresponding value in the middle
node, that is, the value 1 represents the first buffer, value 2 represents
the second buffer and so on. The legal values are 1, 2, 3, and 4. When
the PLC is started all four buffers are zeroed. Therefore, you may not
SAVE data to the same buffer without first LOADing it. When this is
attempted the middle output goes ON. In other words, once a buffer
is used, it may not be used again until the data has been removed

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the number of words to be SAVEd. The
range is 1 ... 512.

320
 13 – Transfer and Move Instructions

LOAD Instruction Block

Description
The LOAD block loads a block of 4x registers (previously SAVEd) from state RAM where they are
protected from unauthorized modification.

INPUT LINE LOAD has one control input that starts the operation and it should
remain ON until the operation has completed successfully or an error
has occurred.

OUTPUT LINE LOAD may produce three possible outputs. The outputs from the top
node go ON while a LOAD operation is in progress. The output from
the middle node goes ON when a LOAD is requested from a buffer
where no data has been SAVEd. Therefore, no LOAD is allowed.
This prevents inadvertent overwriting of data in state RAM. The
output from the bottom node goes ON when a LOAD request is not
equal to the registers that were SAVEd. This kind of transaction is
allowed, however, it is your responsibility to ensure this does not
create a problem in your application.

Top Node The top node specifies a block of 4x registers to be loaded from state
RAM. The 4x register entered here defines the beginning register of
the block.

Middle Node The middle node defines the specific buffer where the block of data is
to be LOADED. Four 512-word buffers are allowed. Each buffer is
defines by placing its corresponding value in the middle node, that is,
the value 1 represents the first buffer, value 2 represents the second
buffer and so on. The legal values are 1, 2, 3, and 4. When the PLC is
started all four buffers are zeroed. Therefore, you may not LOAD data
from the same buffer without first SAVEing it. When this is attempted
the middle output goes ON. In other words, once a buffer is used, it
may not be used again until the data has been removed.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the number of words to be LOADed. The
range is 1 ... 512.

321
14 - Logic Bit Instructions
General Description
The Logical DX functions use bit patterns, and can revise data, shift data, or examine data in a
matrix with or without altering the source.
Each Logical DX function block occupies three nodes in a ten by seven node network format, and
consists of a source node, a destination node, and a node specifying matrix length in registers.
The top input is the control input; when it receives power the function is performed. The top
output passes power when the top input receives power. This allows function blocks to be cascaded
within a network.
The four types of Logical Bit operations - Logical Compare, Logical Bit Modify, Logical Bit Sense
and Logical Bit Rotate - are explained in this chapter.

Logical Compare (CMPR)

Description
The Logical Compare (CMPR) function compares two matrices bit-by-bit. The contents of the
matrices are only examined, not altered. If two bits agree (both zeros or both ones) then the next
two bits are compared. If the two bits do not agree, the function stops and the pointer contains the
position of the bit that did not agree.
The result of the function, Miscompare or agreement, is indicated by the middle output. If no
mismatch is found, the function stops at the end of the table being compared.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives power, two
matrices are compared bit-by-bit.

Reset Line The middle input, when receiving power, resets the pointer value to
zero.

323
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

NOTE: The position of the matrix bit being compared at any one time is equal to the pointer
value plus one. If the pointer value is greater than or equal to the matrix length, the
controller resets the pointer value to zero before performing the function.

OUTPUT LINES

Top Input The top output copies the current state of the top input.
Receives Power
Decode Line

Miscompare The middle output passes power if a miscompare is found. This

Decode Line output does not pass power when: the top input is not receiving
power, no miscompare is found, or the end of the matrix is reached.

ON or OFF State The bottom output is controlled by the middle output. If a

of Miscompare miscompare is found, the bottom output indicates the ON or OFF
Decode Line state of the bit in the first matrix. If the bit is a one, this output passes
power. The output does not pass power if the bit is a zero.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node. It can be one of the following
references: a 0XXXX logic coil, a 1XXXX discrete input, a 3XXXX
input register, or a 4XXXX holding register. The source matrix is a
group of registers or discretes.

Middle Node The middle node is the destination node. It is a 4XXXX holding
register reference. The register holds the pointer value that controls
which bit the compare starts at, and when the compare is done, it
indicates which bit is a miscompare. The matrix is located in
consecutive registers immediately following the pointer, starting at
4XXXX+1.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the
matrix length in registers or groups of discretes for both matrices. This
constant can range from 1 to 100. 1 bit equals a group of 12 bits, 2
equals a group of 2 bits, and so on.

324
 14 – Logic Bit Instructions

Programming Example
The following example illustrates a network with a Logical CMPR function.

When input 10100 is energized, the top input receives power. Discrete inputs 10001-10005 are
compared bit-by-bit with registers 40031-40035. The registers and discretes are not altered. If two
bits, one from each matrix, do not agree, the function stops and coil 00011 is energized. Coil 00012
indicates the status of the miscompare bit in the first matrix.
If a bit in 10001 is a one bit and it is compared with a zero bit in register 40031, the bottom output
passes power and energizes coil 00012. If discrete 10001 contains a zero bit that is compared to a
one bit in register 40031, the bottom output does not pass power and coil 00012 is not energized.
In both cases, the location of the bit that miscompared is placed in register 40030 and the Compare
function continues from that point.
If a normal relay contact is used, the Compare function continues after finding a miscompare so the
pointer value changes. If the location of the miscompare is bit 5, the compare continues at bit 6.
To detect the end of the table if no miscompare has been found, a vertical branch and a normally
closed contact referenced to coil 00011 are placed beside the top output of the function block. If
no miscompare is found, coil 00011 remains OFF and therefore normally closed contact 00011
passes power and energizes coil 00013, no miscompare and end of table.

325
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Logical Bit Modify (MBIT)

Description
The Logical Bit Modify (MBIT) function alters the state of individual bits in a matrix. Only one bit
can be altered per scan; it can be set to one or cleared to zero.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives power, the bit
specified in the pointer register is either set to one or cleared to zero.

Set to One/Clear The middle input controls whether the specified bit is set to one or
to Zero Line cleared to zero. If this input receives power, the bit is set to one. If no
power is received, the bit is cleared to zero.

Increase Pointer The bottom input, when receiving power with the top input, increases
Line the pointer value. This is possible only if a 4XXXX reference is in the
top node.

NOTE: If the pointer value is increased beyond the matrix size, the controller resets the
pointer value to one before performing the function. If a pointer value is inserted which
is greater than the matrix size, the pointer value is not reset, the function is not
performed, and the bottom output passes power.

OUTPUT LINES

Top Input The top output copies the current state of the top input.
Receives Power
Decode Line

Sense Bit Decode The middle output passes power when the bit being modified is set to

326
 14 – Logic Bit Instructions

Line one. It passes power when the middle input receives power.

Pointer>Matrix The bottom output passes power if the pointer value is greater than
Size Decode Line the matrix size. In this case, no operation is performed and the pointer
value is set to the matrix size.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the pointer that controls which bit is modified. It can
be a 3XXXX input register reference, a 4XXXX holding register
reference, or a constant (up to 999 for a 16-bit processor and 9999 for
a 24-bit processor). If a holding register is used, the pointer value can
be increased by control of the bottom input.

Middle Node The middle node is the source and destination node; the revised data
replaces the original data in the matrix. It can be either a 0XXXX logic
coil reference or a 4XXXX holding register reference. If a logic coil is
used, it can only be used once in this function block. The logic coil
cannot be used in another function block or in the eleventh column of
a network; it can be used as a relay contact.

The MBIT function overrides the disable state of a coil used in the
destination node of the function block. This can cause personal
injury if the user assumes a coil has disabled an operation and
repairs are being made, because the coil's state can change as a
result of the MBIT function.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the
matrix length. This constant can range from 1 to 255 registers or
groups of discretes (16 to 4080 bits).

Programming Example
The following example illustrates a network with a Logical MBIT function.

When input 00173 is energized, the bit in matrix 40733-40735 at the location indicated by the
pointer value (register 40093), is set to one, regardless of what it was before. To clear the bit to
zero, remove the vertical connection between the top and middle inputs.

327
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Logical Bit Sense (SENS)

Description
The Logical Bit Sense (SENS) function examines and reports the state of individual bits in a matrix.
One bit is examined per scan.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives power, one bit
in a matrix is examined and its status is reported.

Increases Pointer The middle input, when receiving power with the top input, increases
Line the pointer value. This is possible only if a 4XXXX reference is in the
top node.

NOTE: If the pointer value is increased beyond the matrix size, the controller resets the
pointer value to one before performing the function. If a pointer value is inserted which
is greater than the matrix size, the pointer value is not reset, the function is not
performed, and the bottom output passes power.

Reset Line The bottom input, when receiving power, resets the pointer value to
one. This is only possible if the pointer is a 4XXXX reference.

OUTPUT LINES

Top Input The top output copies the current state of the top input.
Receives Power
Decode Line

Sense Bit Decode The middle output passes power when the bit being examined is a one
Line bit. This output does not pass power when the bit is a zero bit.

Pointer>Matrix The bottom output passes power if the pointer value is greater than
Size Decode Line the matrix size. In this case, no operation is performed.

328
 14 – Logic Bit Instructions

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node holds the pointer value that controls which bit is
examined. It can be a 3XXXX input register reference, a 4XXXX
holding register reference, or a constant (up to 999 for a 16-bit
processor or 9999 for a 24-bit processor). If the reference is a 4XXXX
holding register, the pointer value can be increased by control of the
middle input.

Middle Node The middle node is the source node. It can be one of the following
references: a 0XXXX logic coil, a 1XXXX discrete input, a 3XXXX
input register, or a 4XXXX holding register. The source matrix is a
group of registers or discretes.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the
matrix length. This constant can range from 1 to 255 registers or
groups of discretes (16 to 4080 bits).

Programming Example
The following example illustrates a network with a Logical SENS function.

When input 10027 is energized, the top and middle inputs receive power, and the bit in matrix
40151-40155 at the location indicated by the pointer value (register 40321), is examined. Only one
bit is examined per scan.
If the bit is a one bit, the middle output passes power and energizes coil 00095. If the bit is a zero
bit, no power is passed. Since the middle input receives power by way of the vertical connection
between the top and middle inputs, the pointer increases by one during each scan that input 10027
is energized.
To reset the pointer, input 10071 must be energized, a transitional contact is used to ensure that the
pointer is reset only once, no matter how many scans input 10071 remains energized.

329
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Logical Bit Rotate (BROT)

Description
The Logical Bit Rotate (BROT) function shifts or rotates bits in a matrix. The bits can be rotated to
the left or to the right, and if bits are removed beyond the boundaries of the matrix, they can be
wrapped around to the vacated bits at the start of the matrix. If the bits shifted out of the matrix
are not wrapped around, the vacated bits are filled with zeros.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it receives power, all the
bits in a matrix are rotated or shifted one position per scan.

Direction Line The middle input controls the direction of the shift. Bits can be shifted
either toward the right or toward the left. If this input receives power,
the bits are shifted toward the left (i.e., bit 17 into 16, bit 16 into 15, ...
bit 3 into 2, bit 2 into 1, bit 1 out of the matrix). If this input does not
receive power, the bits are shifted toward the right (i.e., bit 1 into 2, bit
2 into 3, ... bit 15 into 16, bit 16 into 17, etc.). The last bit is shifted out
of the matrix.

Shift/Rotate Line The bottom input controls the wrap-around of the bits. If it receives
power, the bits shifted out of the matrix are carried around unchanged
and entered into the opposite end of the matrix, i.e., wrapped around.
If this input does not receive power, the bits shifted out of the matrix
are discarded. The vacant bit positions at the opposite end of the
matrix are filled with zeros.

OUTPUT LINES

Top Input The top output copies the current state of the top input.
Receives Power

330
 14 – Logic Bit Instructions

Decode Line

Sense Bit Decode The middle output passes power when the bit being shifted out of the
Line matrix is a one bit, regardless of whether the bit is being wrapped
around or discarded.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node. It can be one of the following
references: a 0XXXX logic coil, a 1XXXX discrete input, a 3XXXX
input register, or a 4XXXX holding register. The source matrix is a
group of registers or discretes. Its contents or status is not altered.

Middle Node The middle node is the destination node. It can be either a 0XXXX
logic coil reference or a 4XXXX holding register reference. The
destination matrix is the same size as the source. If a logic coil is used
it cannot be used in another function block or in the eleventh column
of a network; it can be used as a relay contact.

The BROT function overrides the disable state of a coil used in the
destination node of the function block. This can cause personal
injury if the user assumes a coil has disabled an operation and
repairs are being made, because the coil's state can change as a
result of the BROT function.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the
matrix length for both matrices. This constant can range from 1 to 100
registers or groups of discretes (16 to 1600 bits).

Programming Example
The following example illustrates a network with a Logical BROT function.

When input 10035 is energized, the top input receives power and all the bits in matrix 40170-40175
are shifted one position to the right. The last bit, bit 96, is shifted out of the matrix.
If this bit is a one bit (ON), the middle output passes power and energizes coil 00101. Since the
bottom input is not receiving power, bit 1 is filled with a zero. If the bottom input had been
receiving power, the bit shifted out of the matrix would have been wrapped around into the first bit
position in the matrix.

331
15 - Status Instructions
Monitoring System Status

General Description
This chapter describes the use of the STAT function for monitoring system status.

Get Controller System Status (STAT)

Description
The Get Controller System Status (STAT) function obtains vital information about the controller
(such as memory protect status, battery status, I/O error, loss of active lights and J200 Remote I/O
Interface status). The information is placed in a table of registers or discretes.

S901 - Status

The S901 Status Table

Status information is located in specific words of memory. Each word has its own holding register
or group of 16 discrete outputs. The status information available and the words containing the
information are shown in the table below. The 75 words in the S901 status table are divided into
three sections - the first 11 words for controller status information, the next 32 words for I/O
module health information, and the last 32 words for I/O communications information:

Decimal Hex Word

Word
1 Controller Status 01
2 Not Used 02
3 Controller Status 03
4 S901 Status 04
5 Controller Stop State 05
6 Number of Segments in User 06
Logic
7 Address of End-of-logic 07
Pointer
8 RIO Redundancy and 08
Timeout

333
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

9 ASCII Message Status 09

10 Run Load Debug Status 0A
11 Address of Status Word 0B
Pointer Table
12 Channel 1 Input 0C
Channel 2 Input
13 Channel 3 Input 0D
Channel 4 Input
14 Channel 5 Input Channel 6 0E
Input
“ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ ”””””” “”
27 Channel 29 Input Channel 30 1B
Input
28 Channel 31 Input Channel 32 1C
Input
29 Channel 1 Output Channel 2 1D
Output
30 Channel 3 Output Channel 4 1E
Output
31 Channel 5 Output Channel 6 1F
Output
“““““““ “
42 Channel 29 Output Channel 2A
30 Output
43 Channel 31 Output Channel 2B
32 Output
44 Remote I/O Channels 5 and 2C
6 First Word
45 Remote I/O Channels 5 and 2D
6 Second Word
46 Remote I/O Channels 7 and 2E
8 First Word
47 Remote I/O Channels 7 and 2F
8 Second Word
““““ “
70 Remote I/O Channels 31 and 46
32 First Word
71 Remote I/O Channels 31 and 47
32 Second Word

334
 15 – Status Instructions

72 Remote I/O Channels 1 and 48

2 First Word
73 Remote I/O Channels 1 and 49
2 Second Word
74 Remote I/O Channels 3 and 4A
4 First Word
75 Remote I/O Channels 3 and 4B
4 Second Word

S901 Controller Status Words

Words 1 through 11 display the controller status words. Bits in a word are numbered 1 to 16 and
progress from left to right. Bit 1 is the most significant bit (MSB). Bit 16 is the least significant bit
(LSB).
NOTE: The STAT block puts status words for remote channels 1-4 after the status words for
channel 32, instead of before the status words for channel 5.

Word 1
Displays the following aspects of the controller’s status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Not Used
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Enable Constant Sweep
7 Enable Single Sweep Delay
8 1 = 16-Bit User Logic
2 = 24-Bit User Logic
9 AC Power ON
10 Run Light OFF
11 Memory Protect is OFF
12 Battery Failed
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
15 Not Used
16 Not Used

335
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Word 2
Word 2 is not used; all bit values are 0.

Word 3
Displays the following aspects of the controller’s status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 First Scan
2 Start Command Pending
3 Constant Sweep Times
Exceeded
4 Exiting DIM
AWARENESS
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Single Sweeps
14 Single Sweeps
15 Single Sweeps
16 Single Sweeps

336
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 4
Displays the status of the S901 Remote I/O Processor:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 S901 Bad
2 S901 Timeout
3 S901 Loopback Failure
4 S901 Memory Failure
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Not Used
14 RIO Error*
15 RIO Error*
16 RIO Error*

* RIO Errors
000 = RIO did not respond
001 = No response on loopback
010 = Failed loopback data check
011 = Timeout while awaiting a response
100 = RIO did not accept message

337
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Word 5
Displays the controller’s stop state conditions:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Peripheral Port Stop
2 Extended Memory Parity
Error
3 Controller in DIM
AWARENESS
4 Illegal Peripheral
Intervention
5 Segment Scheduler Invalid
6 Start of Node Did Not
Start Segment
7 State RAM Test Failed
8 No End-of-Logic
9 Watchdog Timer Expired
10 Real Time Clock Error
11 CPU Failed
12 Invalid Traffic Cop
13 Invalid Node
14 Logic Checksum
15 Coil Disabled in RUN
Mode
16 Bad Config

Word 6
Displays the number of logic segments:

Bit No. Condition

1 - 16 Number of Segments
(expressed as a binary
number)

338
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 7
Displays the end-of-logic (EOL) pointer:

Bit No. Condition

1 - 16 EOL Pointer

Word 8
Holds a RIO redundancy flag and displays an RIO timeout constant:

Bit No. Condition

1 RIO Redundancy Flag
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 RIO Timeout Constant
14 RIO Timeout Constant
15 RIO Timeout Constant
16 RIO Timeout Constant

339
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Word 9
Displays the ASCII message status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Not Used
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Mismatch Between
Number of Messages and
Pointers
14 Invalid Message Pointer
15 Invalid Message
16 Message Checksum Error

340
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 10
Uses its two most significant bits to display the RUN load debug status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Not Used
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
15 Debug = 0, Run = 0, Load
=1
16 Debug = 0, Run = 1, Load
=0

Word 11
Displays the address of the table of status word pointers:

Bit No. Condition

1 - 16 Pointer to the Table of
Status Word Pointers

341
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

S901 I/O Module Health Status Words

Words 12 through 43 display the health of the I/O modules in the odd and even channels:

Decimal Hex
Word Word
12 Channel 1 Input Channel 2 Input 0C
13 Channel 3 Input Channel 4 Input 0D
14 Channel 5 Input Channel 6 Input 0E
““““““““““ “
26 Channel 29 Input Channel 30 Input 1B
27 Channel 31 Input Channel 32 Input 1C
28 Channel 1 Output Channel 2 Output 1D
29 Channel 3 Output Channel 4 Output 1E
30 Channel 5 Output Channel 6 Output 1F
““““““““““ “
42 Channel 29 Output Channel 30 2A
Output
43 Channel 31 Output Channel 32 2B
Output
Each of these 32 status words is organized as follows:

Odd Channels
Bit No. Slot No.
1 I/O Slot No. 1
2 I/O Slot No. 2
3 I/O Slot No. 3
4 I/O Slot No. 4
5 I/O Slot No. 5
6 I/O Slot No. 6
7 I/O Slot No. 7
8 I/O Slot No. 8

342
 15 – Status Instructions

Even Channels
Bit No. Slot No.
9 I/O Slot No. 1
10 I/O Slot No. 2
11 I/O Slot No. 3
12 I/O Slot No. 4
13 I/O Slot No. 5
14 I/O Slot No. 6
15 I/O Slot No. 7
16 I/O Slot No. 8
If a specified slot is inhibited in the Traffic Cop, the bit is 0. If the slot contains an input module or
an input/output module, the bit is set to 1. If the slot contains an output module and the module’s
COMM active LED is ON, the bit is 0. If the slot contains an output module and the module’s
COMM ACTIVE LED is OFF, the bit is 1.
NOTE: These indicators are valid only when scan time > 30 ms.

343
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

S901 RIO Communication Status Words

Words 44-75 represent the communication status to J200 drops. Two words are used to describe
each of up to 16 drops.

Word 1
Bit No. Condition
1-3 This field identifies the type of
processing scheduled to be
performed by the processor for the
addressed IOR. The following
functions are defined:
000 - Normal I/O
001 - Restart Phase I
(Communication Reset)
010 - Restart Phase II (Application
Reset)
011 - Unassigned
100 - INHIBIT
101 - Unassigned
110 - Unassigned
111 - Unassigned
4 Sequence Number Invalid
5 Byte Count Underrun
6 Current Message not Supported
7 Not Used
8 Busy 0.
9-11 Receive Sequence Number
12 Cable B.
13-15 Send Sequence Number
16 Busy 1.

344
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 2
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Not Used
2 Character Overrun From the Addressed
Drop
3 CRC Error From Addressed Drop
4 Addressed Drop did not Respond
5 Not Used
6 Drop Just Powered Up
7 Invalid Sequence Number
8 Command Not Supported by Drop
9-16 Retry Counter Drop attempted by the
processor to the addressed IOR. The
maximum value is 25510.

345
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

S908 Status

The S908 Status Table

The 277 words in the S908 status table are organized in three sections - the first 11 words for
controller status, the next 160 words for I/O module health, and the last 106 words for I/O
communication health:

Decimal Hex
Word Word
1 Controller Status 01
2 Hot Standby Status 02
3 Controller Status 03
4 RIO Status 04
5 Controller Stop State 05
6 Number of Ladder Logic Segments 06
7 Address of End-of-logic Pointer 07
8 RIO Redundancy and Timeout/ 08
Memory Sizing Word for Panel (in
the 984-145 Compact Controller)
9 ASCII Message Status 09
10 Run/Load/Debug Status 0A
11 Not Used 0B
12 Drop 1, Rack 1 0C
13 Drop 1, Rack 2 0D
14 Drop 1, Rack 3 0E
15 Drop 1, Rack 4 0F
16 Drop 1, Rack 5 10
17 Drop 2, Rack 1 11
18 Drop 2, Rack 2 12
““““
170 Drop 32, Rack 4 AA
171 Drop 32, Rack 5 AB
172 S908 Startup Error Code AC
173-175 Cable A Errors AD-
AF
176-178 Cable B Errors B0-B2
179-181 Global Communication Errors B3-B5
182-184 Drop 1 Errors/ Health Status and B6-B8
Retry Counters (in the Compact 984
Controllers)

346
 15 – Status Instructions

185-187 Drop 2 Errors B9-BB

188-190 Drop 3 Errors BC-BE
272-274 Drop 31 Errors 110-
112
275-277 Drop 32 Errors 113-
115

S908 Controller Status Words

Words 1 through 11 display the controller status words.

Word 1
Displays the following aspects of the controller’s status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1-5 Not Used.
6 Enable Constant Sweep
7 Enable Single Sweep Delay
8 1 = 16-Bit User Logic
2 = 24-Bit User Logic
9 AC Power ON
10 Run Light On
11 Memory Protect is OFF
12 Battery Failed
13-16 Not Used

347
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Word 2
Displays the Hot Standby status for 984 controllers that use S911/R911 Modules:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 S911/R911 Present and Healthy
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 0 = Controller Toggle Set to A
1 = Controller Toggle Set to B
12 0 = Controllers have Matching
Logic
1 = Controllers not have
MatchLogic
13 Remote System State*
14 Remote System State*
15 Local System State*
16 Local System State*

* 00 = Not Used
01 = Off Line
10 = Primary
11 = Standby

348
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 3
Displays the following aspects of the controller’s status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 First Scan
2 Start Command Pending
3 Constant Sweep Times
Exceeded
4 Exiting DIM AWARENESS
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Single Sweeps
14 Single Sweeps
15 Single Sweeps
16 Single Sweeps

349
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Word 4
Displays the status of the 984 controller.
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 IOP Bad
2 IOP Timeout
3 IOP Loopback Failure
4 IOP Memory Failure
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Not Used
14 I/O Error *
15 I/O Error*
16 I/O Error*

* 000 = I/O did not respond

001 = No response on loopback
010 = Failed loopback data check
011 = Timeout while awaiting a response
100 = I/O did not accept message

350
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 5
Displays the controller’s stop state conditions:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Peripheral Port Stop
2 Extended Memory Parity Error for chassis
mount controllers or Traffic Cop/S908
Errors for other Controllers
3 Controller in DIM AWARENESS
4 Illegal Peripheral Intervention
5 Segment Scheduler Invalid
6 Start of Node Did Not Start Segment
7 State RAM Test Failed
8 Invalid Traffic Cop
9 Watchdog Timer Expired
10 Real Time Clock Error
11 CPU Logic Solver Failed for chassis mount
controllers or Coil Used Table for other
Controllers
12 IOP Failure
13 Invalid Node
14 Logic Checksum
15 Coil Disabled in RUN Mode
16 Bad Configuration

Word 6
Displays the number of segments in ladder logic; a binary number is shown:

Bit No. Condition

1 - 16 Number of Segments
(expresses as a binary number)

Word 7
Displays the address of the end-of-logic (EOL) pointer:

Bit No. Condition

1 - 16 ROL Pointer Address

351
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Word 8
In controllers that support remote I/O, word 8 uses its most significant bit to display whether or
not redundant coaxial cables are run to the remote I/O drops. It uses at four least significant bits to
display the remote I/O timeout constant:

Bit No. Condition

1 RIO Redundant Cables? 0 = No,
1= Yes
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 RIO Timeout Constant
14 RIO Timeout Constant
15 RIO Timeout Constant
16 RIO Timeout Constant

In the Compact 984-145 controller, word 8 is used to store a numerical value that defines the upper
limit of memory locations on page 0 where user logic can be placed. This value is not user-
configurable and is used only by the programming panel.

352
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 9
Displays the ASCII message status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Not Used
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Mismatch Between Number of
Messages and Pointers
14 Invalid Message Pointer
15 Invalid Message
16 Message Checksum Error

353
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Word 10
Displays the RUN/LOAD/DEBUG status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Not Used
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
15 Debug = 0, Run = 0,
Load = 1
16 Debug = 0, Run = 1,
Load = 0

Word 11
Word 11 is not used.

354
 15 – Status Instructions

S908 I/O Module Health Status Words

Words 12 through 171 display the health of the I/O modules:

Decimal Hex Word

Word
12 Drop 1, Rack 1 0C
13 Drop 1, Rack 2 0D
14 Drop 1, Rack 3 0E
15 Drop 1, Rack 4 0F
16 Drop 1, Rack 5 10
17 Drop 2, Rack 1 11
18 Drop 2, Rack 2 12
““““

170 Drop 32, Rack 4 AA

172 Drop 32, Rack 5 AB

Five words are reserved for each of up top 32 drops, one word for each of up to five possible racks
(I/O housings) in each drop. Each rack may contain up to 11 I/O modules; bits 1 through 11 in
each word represent the health of the associated I/O module in each rack.
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Slot No.

1 I/O Slot No. 1
2 I/O Slot No. 2
3 I/O Slot No. 3
4 I/O Slot No. 4
5 I/O Slot No. 5
6 I/O Slot No. 6
7 I/O Slot No. 7
8 I/O Slot No. 8
9 I/O Slot No. 9
10 I/O Slot No.10
11 I/O Slot No.11
12 Not Used
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
15 Not Used
16 Not Used

355
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

When is an I/O Module Healthy?

Four conditions must be met before an I/O module can indicate good health:
The slot must be traffic copped
The slot must contain a module with the correct personality.
Valid communications must exist between the module and the RIO interface at remote drops.
Valid communications must exist between the RIO interface at each remote drop and the I/O
processor in the controller.

S908 I/O Communication Status Words

Status words 172 - 277 contain the I/O system communication status. Words 172 - 181 are global
status words. Among the remaining 96 words, three words are dedicated to each of the 32 drops,
depending on the type of 984 controller you are using.

Word 172
S908 Startup Error Code. This word is always 0 when the system is running. If an error occurs, the
controller does not start - it generates a stop state code of 10 (word 5):

TRAFFIC COP VALIDATION SOFT ERROR CODES

01 BADTCLEN Traffic Cop length
02 BADLNKNUM Remote I/O link number
03 BADNUMDPS Number of drops in Traffic Cop
04 BADTCSUM Traffic Cop checksum
10 BADDDLEN Drop descriptor length
11 BADDRPNUM I/O drop number
12 BADHUPTIM Drop holdup time
13 BADASCNUM ASCII port number
14 BADNUMODS Number of modules in drop
15 PRECONDRP Drop already configured
16 PRECONPRT Port already configured
17 TOOMNYOUT More than 1024 output points
18 TOOMNYINS More than 1024 input points
20 BADSLTNUM Module slot address
21 BADRCKNUM Module rack address
22 BADOUTBC Number of output bytes
23 BADINBC Number of input bytes
25 BADRF1MAP First reference number
26 BADRF2MAP Second reference number
27 NOBYTES No input or output bytes
28 BADDISMAP Discrete not on 16-bit boundary

356
 15 – Status Instructions

30 BADODDOUT Unpaired odd output module

31 BADODDIN Unpaired odd input module
32 BADODDREF Unmatched odd module reference
33 BAD3X1XRF 1x reference after 3x register
34 BADDMYMOD Dummy module reference already used
35 NOT3XDMY 3x module not a dummy
36 NOT4XDMY 4x module not a dummy
40 DMYREAL1X Dummy, then real 1x module
41 REALDMY1X Real, then dummy 1x module
42 DMYREAL3X Dummy, then real 3x module
43 REALDMY3X Real, then dummy 3x module

Word 173
Cable A error word.

Bit No. Condition

1-8 Framing Error Count
9-16 DMA Receiver Overrun Count

Word 174
Cable A error word.

Bit No. Condition

1-8 Receiver Error Count
9-16 Bad Drop Reception Count

357
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Word 175
Cable A error word. Displays the last received LAN error code:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Short Frame
2 No End-of-Frame
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 CRC Error
14 Alignment Error
15 Overrun Error
16 Not Used

Word 176
Cable B error word.

Bit No. Condition

1-8 Framing Error Count
9-16 DMA Receiver Overrun Count

Word 177
Cable B error word.

Bit No. Condition

1-8 Receiver Error Count
9-16 Bad Drop Reception Count

358
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 178
Cable B error word. Displays the last received LAN error code:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Short Frame
2 No End-of-Frame
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 CRC Error
14 Alignment Error
15 Overrun Error
16 Not Used

Word 179
Displays the global communication status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Communication
Health
2 Cable A Status
3 Cables B Status
4 Not Used
5-8 Lost Communication
Counter
9-16 Cumulative Retry
Counter

359
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Word 180

Global Cumulative Error Counter for Cable A

Bit No. Condition
1-8 Detected Error Count
9-16 No Response Count

Word 181

Global Cumulative Error Counter for Cable B

Bit No. Condition
1-8 Detected Error Count
9-16 No Response Count

Words 182 - 277 (Remote I/O Only)

For controllers that support remote I/O, words 182 - 277 are used to describe remote I/O drop
status, three status words for each drop.

Word Drop
182 - 184 Drop 1
185 - 187 Drop 2
“““ ““
275 - 277 Drop 32

Each group of RIO drop status word is organized as follows:

Word 1
Displays communication status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Communication
Health
2 Cable A Status
3 Cables B Status
4 Not Used
5-8 Lost Communication
Counter
9-16 Cumulative Retry
Counter

360
 15 – Status Instructions

Compact 984 Status

The Compact 984 Status Table

Decimal Word Hex Word
1 Controller Status 01
2 Not Used 02
3 Controller Status 03
4 Not Used 04
5 Controller Stop State 05
6 Number of Segments in User 06
Logic
7 Address of End-of-logic 07
Pointer
8 To be Defined 08
9 Not Used 09
10 Run/Load/Debug Status 0A
11 Not Used 0B
12 Rack 1 I/O Module Health 0C
13 Rack 2 0D
14 Rack 3 0E
15 Rack 4 0F
16-181 Not Used
182-184 Drop Status B6-B8

S984 Compact Controller Status Words

Words 1 through 11 display the controller status words.
Bits in a word are numbered 1 to 16 and progress from left to right. Bit 1 is the most significant bit
(MSB). Bit 16 is the least significant bit (LSB).

361
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Word 1
Displays the following aspects of the controller’s status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Not Used
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Enable Constant Sweep
7 Enable Single Sweep Delay
8 1 = 16-Bit User Logic
9 AC Power ON
10 Run Light OFF
11 Memory Protect is OFF
12 Battery Failed
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
15 Not Used
16 Not Used

Word 2
Not Used.

362
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 3
Displays the following aspects of the controller’s status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 First Scan
2 Start Command Pending
3 Constant Sweep Times
Exceeded
4 Exiting DIM AWARENESS
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Single Sweeps
14 Single Sweeps
15 Single Sweeps
16 Single Sweeps

Word 4
Not used.

363
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Word 5
Displays the controller’s stop state conditions:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Peripheral Port Stop
2 Not Used
3 Controller in DIM
AWARENESS
4 Illegal Peripheral
Intervention
5 Segment Scheduler Invalid
6 Start of Node Did Not Start
Segment
7 State RAM Test Failed
8 No End of Logic
9 Watchdog Timer Expired
10 Real Time Clock Error
11 CPU Logic Solver Failed
12 Not Used
13 Invalid Node
14 Logic Checksum
15 State Checksum
16 Bad Configuration

Word 6
Displays the number of segments in ladder logic; a binary number is shown:

Bit No. Condition

1-16 Number of Segments
(expressed as a binary number)

Word 7
Displays the address of the end-of-logic (EOL) pointer:

Bit No. Condition

1-16 ROL Pointer Address

364
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 8
In the Compact 984-145 controller, word 8 is used to store a numerical value that defines the upper
limit of memory locations on page 0 where user logic can be placed. This value is not user-
configurable and is used only by the programming panel.

Word 9
Not Used

Word 10
Uses its two least significant bits to display the RUN/LOAD/DEBUG status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Not Used
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
15 Debug = 0, Run = 0, Load =
1
16 Debug = 0, Run = 1, Load =
0

Word 11
Word 11 is not used.

365
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Compact 984 I/O Module Health Status Words

Words 12 through 15 display the health of the I/O modules:

Decimal Hex Word

Word
12 Drop 1, Rack 1 0C
13 Drop 1, Rack 2 0D
14 Drop 1, Rack 3 0E
15 Drop 1, Rack 4 0F
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Slot No.

1 I/O Slot No. 1
2 I/O Slot No. 2
3 I/O Slot No. 3
4 I/O Slot No. 4
5 I/O Slot No. 5
6-16 Not Used
If a module is Traffic Cop’d and active, the bit will be 1.
If a module is inactive or not Traffic Cop’d, the bit will be 0.
In the primary rack bits 1 and 2 (slots 1 and 2) are not used because the processor is placed in these
slots.

Compact 984 I/O Communication Status Words

There are three words that contain information on the communication of the entire drop. If
monitored with the STAT block, they can be found in words 182 through 184. This would require
that the length of the STAT block be a minimum of 184. Words 17 through 181 would not be used.

Word 182
Displays local drop status.

Bit No. Slot No.

1 All Modules Healthy
2 Always 0
9-16 Number of Times a Module
has Been Seen as Unhealthy.
Count will Roll Over at 255

366
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 183
I/O Error Counter. This counter is similar to the one in Word 182 with one exception. If a module
becomes unhealthy, word 182 is incremented by one while Word 183 is incremented each scan until
the module is healthy again.

Word 184
PAB Bus Retry Counter. Diagnostics are performed on the communication of the bus. This word
should normally be zeros. If after five retries a bus error is still detected, the controller will be
stopped.

Modicon Micro PLC Status Table

The Modicon Micro PLCs maintain a table in memory that contains vital system diagnostic
information regarding the PLC, its I/O, and its communications. This table is 56 words long, and
its contents are structured as follows:
Words 1 through 11 contain PLC status information.
Words 12 through 31 contain the health of I/O locations.
Word 32 contains error codes generated at system start-up.
Words 33-36 contain global communications status.
Words 37-40 contain the health of I/O communications at the local drop.
Words 41-56 contain the health of I/O communications to and from the remote drops.
Bits in a word are numbered 1 to 16 and progress from left to right. Bit 1 is the most significant bit
(MSB). Bit 16 is the least significant bit (LSB).

367
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Word 1
Displays the CPU status.
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Not Used
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Enable Constant Sweep
7 Enable Single Sweep Delay
8 0 = 24-Bit User Logic
1 = 16-Bit User Logic
9 Not Used
10 Run Light OFF
11 Not Used
12 Battery Failed
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
15 Debug = 0, Run = 0, Load =
1
16 Debug = 0, Run = 1, Load =
0

Word 2
Displays the PLC drop address.

Bit No. Slot No.

1 - 13 Not Used
14-16 See Below

PLC Configuration Hexidecimal

(Bits 14 15
16)
PLC is configured in single or parent mode 001
PLC is configured as child #1 on an 010
expanded I/O network

368
 15 – Status Instructions

PLC is configured as child #2 on an 011

expanded I/O network
PLC is configured as child #3 on an 100
expanded I/O network
PLC is configured as child #4 on an 101
expanded I/O network

Word 3
Displays more PLC status.
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 First Scan
2 Start Command Pending
3 Constant Sweep Times
Exceeded
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Single Sweeps
14 Single Sweeps
15 Single Sweeps
16 Single Sweeps

Word 4
Displays the maximum number of drops allowed in an I/O/O network.

Bit No. Condition

1 - 12 Not Used
13 Single Sweeps
14 1*
15 0*
16 0*

369
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

*Always set to 4.

Word 5
CPU Stop State Conditions
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Peripheral Port Stop
2 Error in the I/O map
3 Not Used
4 Illegal Peripheral Intervention
5 Segment Scheduler Invalid
6 No SON at the start of the segment
7 State RAM Test Failed
8 Invalid number of DOIOs/EOLs
9 Watchdog Timer Expired
10 Real Time Clock Error
11 Mismatch between coil use table and coils
in ladder logic
12 Fatal Error on the A120 I/O Link
13 Invalid Node in Ladder Logic
14 Logic Checksum Error
15 Coil disabled in RUN mode
16 Bad PLC Setup

Word 6
Displays the number of segments in ladder logic; a binary number is shown:

Bit No. Condition

1 - 16 Number of Segments
(expresses as a binary number)

Word 7
Displays the address of the end-of-logic (EOL) pointer:

Bit No. Condition

1 - 16 ROL Pointer Address

370
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 8
Not Used

Word 9
Not Used

Word 10
Uses its two least significant bits to display the RUN/LOAD/DEBUG status:
If the bit is set to 1, then the condition is TRUE.

Bit No. Condition

1 Not Used
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Not Used
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Not Used
10 Not Used
11 Not Used
12 Not Used
13 Not Used
14 Not Used
15 Debug = 0, Run = 0, Load =
1
16 Debug = 0, Run = 1, Load =
0

Word 11
Word 11 is not used.

371
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Micro Health Status Words

Words 12 through 31 display the health of the I/O modules:
Four contiguous words are used for each of the five Modicon Micro PLCs on an I/O expansion
network; one word in each group of four is used for each possible I/O rack, assuming A120 I/O
expansion:

Decimal
Word
12 PLC 1, Rack 1
13 PLC 1, Rack 2
14 PLC 1, Rack 3
15 PLC 1, Rack 4
16 PLC 2, Rack 1
17 PLC 2, Rack 2
18 PLC 2, Rack 3
19 PLC 2, Rack 4
20 PLC 3, Rack 1
21 PLC 3, Rack 2
22 PLC 3, Rack 3
23 PLC 3, Rack 4
24 PLC 4, Rack 1
25 PLC 4, Rack 2
26 PLC 4, Rack 3
27 PLC 4, Rack 4
28 PLC 5, Rack 1
29 PLC 5, Rack 2
30 PLC 5, Rack 3
31 PLC 5, Rack 4
Rack 1 is always a Modicon Micro PLC, and racks 2 through 4 are A120 I/O racks connected to
rack 1 via an A120 I/O expansion port.
Each word contains five representative bits that show health of the associated I/O unit in each
rack. For example, each rack can support a maximum of five I/O locations:

372
 15 – Status Instructions

If the bit is set to 1, the slot contains a healthy I/O unit.

Bit No. Slot No.

1 Location No. 1
2 Location No. 2
3 Location No. 3
4 Location No. 4
5 Location No. 5
6-16 Not Used

With respect to A120 I/O modules, a location is the physical slot position of the module in its
DTA housing. With respect to the Modicon Micro PLC, the location relates to the following fixed
components on the unit:
Location 1 represents the fixed discrete inputs and outputs on the unit.
Location 2 represents the dedicated interrupt component status on the unit.
Location 3 represents the user-selectable counter/timer count on the unit.
Location 4 represents any fixed analog inputs and outputs on the unit.
Location 5 represents the data transfer component on the unit for serial I/O expansion.
An I/O location is healthy when it is configured and I/O mapped correctly, its personality is
correct, and valid communications exist between it and the CPU that controls it.

Word 32
Start-Up Error Codes (Always 0 when the system is running properly)

Bits 11 through 16
Decimal Hex Word
Word
01 Bad I/O map length 000001
02 Bad link no. for child PLCs on 000010³
network
03 Wrong no. of child PLCs in 000011
I/O map
04 Bad I/O map checksum 000100
10 Bad child PLC descriptor 001010
length
11 Number of segments in user 001011
logic
12 Bad holdup time for child PLC 001100
on network
13 Bad ASCII port number 001101
14 Bad no. of slots in a child PLC 001110

373
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

15 Child PLC has already been set 001111

up
16 Comm port has already been 010000
set up
17 More than 1024 output points 010001
18 More than 1025 input points 010010
20 Bad slot address 010100
21 Bad rack address 010101
22 Bad number of output bytes 010110
25 Bad first reference number 011001
26 Bad second reference number 011010
27 No input or output bytes 011011
28 Discrete not on a 16-bit 011100
boundary
30 Unpaired odd output unit 011110
31 Unpaired odd input unit 011111
32 Unmatched odd input/output 100000
unit reference
33 1x reference after 3x register 100001
34 Dummy unit reference already 100010
used
35 3x reference not a dummy 100011
36 4x reference is not a dummy 100100
40 Dummy, then real 1x reference 101000
41 Real, then dummy 1x reference 101001
42 Dummy, then real 3x reference 101010
43 Real, then dummy 3x reference 101011
44 Too many I/O points in a drop 101100
50 Bad unit descriptor rack 110010
51 Bad unit descriptor slot 110011
52 Bad unit descriptor input byte 110100
count
53 Bad unit descriptor output byte 110101
count
54 I/O driver has not been loaded 110110
55 Unit can be used only in rack 110111

374
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 33
Global Communications

For a parent- or single-mode PLC:

Bit No. Condition
1 0 = unsuccessful
communication to any child
on the I/O expansion net
2-8 Not Used
9 - 16 Number of non-recoverable
communication losses at any
PLC
11 Setup on the I/O expansion
net.

For a child-mode PLC:

Bit No. Condition

1 0 = child has not received a
valid output command from
the parent before holdup
time has expired.
2-8 Not Used
9 - 16 Number of times the child’s
holdup time has expired.

Word 34
Additional Global Communications

375
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

For a parent-mode PLC:

Bit No. Condition
1-8 Number of no responses of the
system
9 - 16 Number of retries due to a
previous comm error

For a child-mode PLC:

Bit No. Condition

1 - 16 Number of ms remaining before
holdup time expires

Word 35
Additional Global Communications for a parent-mode PLC only

For a parent-mode PLC only:

Bit No. Condition
1-8 Number of parity errors detected
on received characters
9 - 16 Number of framing errors detected
on received characters

Word 36
Additional Global Communications for a parent-mode PLC only

For a parent-mode PLC only:

Bit No. Condition
1 Last detected no response
error
2 Last detected overrun error
3 Last detected framing error
4 Last detected parity error
5-8 Not Used
9 - 16 Number of overrun errors
detected on received
characters

376
 15 – Status Instructions

Word 37
Healthy Communications in Rack 1 (for A120 expansion only)
If the bit is set to 1, then condition is TRUE.

For a parent-mode PLC only:

Bit No. Condition
1 All units healthy
2-8 Not Used
9 - 16 Number of times any local
unit goes from healthy to
unhealthy

Word 38
I/O Error Detection in Rack 1 (for A120 I/O expansion only)

Bit No. Condition

1 - 16 Number of times an error
has been detected while
communicating with I/O.

Word 39
I/O Retry Counter in Rack 1 (for A120 I/O expansion only)

Bit No. Condition

1 - 16 Number of times a retry has
been logged to a local I/O
location

Word 40
Not used.

377
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Word 41 - 56
These are for communications on the I/O expansion network - they have meaning only on parent
mode.
Each potential child PLC on the network is described by a group of four contiguous words:
Words 41 through 44 apply to child # 1
Words 45 through 48 apply to child # 2
Words 49 through 52 apply to child # 3
Words 53 through 56 apply to child # 4

Words 41, 45, 49, 53 Format:

Bit No. Condition
1 0 = unsuccessful communication from parent to a
specific child
1 = successful communication at a specific child
9 - 16 Number of nonrecoverable communication losses at
the specific child

Words 42, 46, 50, 54 Format:

Bit No. Condition
1-8 Number of no responses from a specific child
9 - 16 Number of retries due to a previous comm error
at a specific child

Words 43, 47, 51, 55 Format:

Bit No. Condition
1-8 Number of CRC errors detected on received
characters from a specific child
9 - 16 Number of framing errors detected on received
characters from a specific child

Words 44, 48, 52, 56 Format

Bit No. Condition
1 Last detected no response error
2 Last detected overrun error
3 Last detected framing error
4 Last detected CRC error
5-8 Not Used
9-16 Number of overrun errors detected on received
characters

378
16 - Special Instructions
DISA (Disabled Monitor System)

Description
Disabled Monitor System (DISA) monitors the disabled states of all coils and discrete inputs. The
quantity and reference number of the disabled states are logged into simple data tables.

Function Block

Top Node Contains a table in which the first register contains the number of
disabled coils and the registers after that contain the reference
numbers of the disabled coils. Use a 4XXXX reference.

Middle Node Contains a table in which the first register contains the number of
disabled inputs and the registers after that contain the reference
numbers of the disabled inputs. Use a 4XXXX reference.

Bottom Node Contains the maximum number of disabled coils/inputs to be stored

by the DISA instruction.

379
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

HIST (Discrete Logic Analyzer/Histogram)

Description
The Discrete Logic Analyzer/Histogram (HIST) instruction monitors a single input or coil state for
1600 consecutive scans of the logic.

Function Block

Top Node Contains the information to setup the trace function. Use a 4XXXXX
register.

Middle Node Contains the registers used to store the status of the input or output
coils selected to be monitored. Use a 4XXXXX register.

Bottom Node Contains the number of successive scans over which to trap the value
of the coil or input. A number from 1 to 100 is used to indicate 16 to
1600 scans

380
 16 – Special Instructions

SKIP

Description
The Skip function allows logic in a group of networks to be skipped, and thus not solved in order
to reduce scan time. The Skip function can be used to bypass seldom-used program sequences or to
create subroutines.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top and only input, when receiving power, causes the remainder
of the current network and the specified number of networks to be
skipped over by the processor’s scan.

Output Lines None

Function Block
The function block only occupies one node in a network. It contains the SKIP symbol and either a
constant or a register reference. It can be a constant up to 999 in a 16-bit processor or up to 9999
in a 24-bit processor, a 3XXXX input register reference, or a 4XXXX holding register reference. If
a 4XXXX reference is used, it should be unique to this function block to avoid mishaps (i.e., using
the same register to hold a counter value, etc.). The value specifies the number of networks to be
skipped. To skip the remainder of the networks in the current segment, a value of zero is entered
into the function block or register.
NOTE: If a 3XXXX input register is used and the input is coming from a thumbwheel, the
data read by the processor can be incorrect (i.e., if it was read while the number was still
being entered). In order to use a thumbwheel and ensure a correct number, use a
4XXXX reference in the Skip block and use a Subtract block to subtract zero from the
input register to load it into the holding register prior to the Skip.
The Skip function cannot pass the boundary of a segment. Regardless of how many networks were
programmed to be skipped, the function stops when it reaches the end of a segment. Also, using
Skips within Skips causes the processor to shut down.

381
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Programming Example
The following example illustrates a ladder diagram network using a Skip function.

When the Skip function block’s input receives power, the remainder of the network containing the
block (if any) is skipped and the next six networks are skipped. If network 17 contains the Skip
function, the remainder of 17 and all of 18-23 are skipped. If there are only five networks left in the
segment, the operation stops after the fifth network.

382
 16 – Special Instructions

READ (ASCII Read Function)

Description
The Read function allows the 984-80 PLC to read data from an ASCII device through a J812
Remote I/O Adapter or a P453 Power Supply, or a J892 800 Series I/O Interface. The data is
stored in a table of registers.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When this input transitions from
OFF to ON the Read function is performed.

Pause Line The middle input, when receiving power, stops the Read function.
When this input loses power, the Read function resumes where it left
off.

Abort Line The bottom input, when it receives power, stops/aborts the operation.
The top input must be cycled for the function to begin again; it does
not resume where it left off.

OUTPUT LINES

Active Decode The top output, when passing power, indicates that the Read function
Line is communicating with the specified port (FUNCTION ACTIVE).

Error Decode Line The middle output passes power for one scan when an error is
detected. The error code is placed in either the 4 most significant bits
of the source’s first register or the next 6 bits.

First 4 bits = 984-80 error

Next 6 bits = J812 Remote I/O Interface error

383
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

For a list of the error codes, see the Modicon ASCII Programming Guide.

Complete Decode The bottom output passes power for one scan when the operation is
Line complete.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node. It is a 4XXXX holding register
reference. It refers to a table of 7 consecutive registers. The table starts
with the reference in the top node; the next 6 registers are implied.
These registers must be unique to this function block.

The following are the table register assignments:

4XXXX = bits 0 - 5: port numbers (1-32) bits 6 - 15: error codes

4XXXX + 1 = message number
4XXXX + 2 = number of registers required to satisfy format
4XXXX + 3 = number of registers transmitted
4XXXX + 4 = status of solve
4XXXX + 5 = unassigned
4XXXX + 6 = checksum of registers 0 – 5

Middle Node The middle node is the destination node. It is a 4XXXX holding
register reference. It is the reference to the first register in a table of
registers whose length is determined by the value in the bottom node.
The information read by the processor is stored in these registers.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the
destination table length. This constant can range from 1 - 255 for a 16-
bit CPU and 1 - 99 for a 24-bit CPU.

384
 16 – Special Instructions

WRIT (ASCII Write Function)

Description
The Write function transmits data from the 984-80 PLC through a J812 Remote I/O Adapter, a
P453 Power Supply, or a J892 800 Series I/O Interface, to an ASCII device.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When this input transitions from
OFF to ON the Write function is performed.

Pause Line The middle input, when receiving power, stops the Write function.
When this input loses power, the Write function resumes where it left
off.

Abort Line The bottom input, when receiving power, stops/aborts the operation.
The top input must be cycled for the function to begin again; it does
not resume where it left off.

OUTPUT LINES

Active Decode The top output, when passing power, indicates that the Write function
Line is communicating with the specified port (FUNCTION ACTIVE).

Error Decode Line The middle output passes power for one scan when an error is
detected. The error code is placed in either the 4 most significant bits
of the source’s first register or the next 6 bits.

For the -80

First 4 bits = 984-80 error
Next 6 bits = J812 Remote I/O Interface Error

385
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

For the 584

First 4 bits = 584 error
Next 4 bits = P453 Remote I/O Interface Error

For the 984

First 4 bits = 984 error
Next 6 bits = J812 Remote I/O Interface error

For a list of error codes, see the Modicon ASCII Programming Guide.

Complete Decode The bottom output passes power for one scan when the operation is
Line complete.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node. It can be either a 3XXXX input
register or a 4XXXX holding register reference. It is the reference to
the first register in a table of registers.

Middle Node The middle node is the source node. It is a 4XXXX holding register
reference. It refers to a table of 7 consecutive registers. The table starts
with the reference in the top node; the next 6 registers are implied.
These registers must be unique to this function block.

The following are register assignments:

4XXXX = bits 0 - 5: port numbers (1-32) bits 6 - 15: error codes
4XXXX + 1 = message number
4XXXX + 2 = number of registers required to satisfy format
4XXXX + 3 = number of registers transmitted
4XXXX + 4 = status of solve
4XXXX + 5 = unassigned
4XXXX + 6 = checksum of registers 0 – 5

386
 16 – Special Instructions

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the numerical value that specifies the
source table length. This constant can range from 1 - 255 for a 16-bit
CPU and from 1 - 999 for 24-bit CPU.

Programming Example
The following example illustrates a network with a Write function.

When input 10016 transitions from OFF to ON, the top input receives power and starts to write
information to an ASCII device. The information is taken from registers 30001-30040. The top
output passes power and energizes coil 00031 while the Write is taking place. If an error is found,
the middle output passes power for one scan, energizing coil 00032. When the Write is complete,
the bottom output passes power and energizes coil 00033.
A Write to any “reserved” ASCII holding register does not set the error output.
A Write to a busy ASCII port does not set the busy flag.
The Write block issues a done flag when the ASCII message is “sent” to the P453, instead of when
it is actually “sent”.

387
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

XMRD (Extended Memory Read)

Description
The Extended Memory Read function transfers data from a file in the 984’s extended memory to a
block of 4XXXX holding/output registers. This instruction appears only in the processors that
have extended memory.

388
 16 – Special Instructions

XMWT (Write Extended Memory)

Description
The Write Extended Memory function transfers data from a block of 3XXXX input registers or
4XXXX holding/output registers to a block of registers in a 984 extended memory file. This
instruction is available only in the processors that have extended memory.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When this input receives power,
the extended memory write function is performed.

Do Not Clear The middle input, when receiving power, copies the offset value
Offset Line (4XXXX + 4) and uses it in the function. If not receiving power, the
copy of the offset register is cleared to zero before the function is
performed.

Do Not Abort Line The bottom input, when receiving power, does not automatically stop
the 984 processor if a dynamic memory (parity) or power-up
diagnostic error is detected. If not receiving power, the 984 processor
stops if an error is detected.

OUTPUT LINES

Active Decode The top output, when passing power, activates the extended memory
Line write function.

Error Decode Line The middle output passes power when a power-up, memory,
hardware, or syntax error is detected. It continues to pass power until
the faulty data and/or hardware are corrected.

Complete Decode The bottom output passes power for one scan when the data transfer
Line is complete.

389
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node. It can be either a 3XXXX input
register or a 4XXXX holding/output register reference. It specifies the
first register in a table of registers; the contents of the registers are
written to extended memory.

Middle Node The middle node contains a 4xxxx holding/output register reference
that specifies the first register in a six-register control table. If using
the multiple scan option, the registers in the middle node should be
unique to this function block. The control table register assignments
are:

4XXXX = status word

4XXXX + 1 = extended memory file number (1 to 10)
4XXXX + 2 = starting address in the file (0 to 9999)
4XXXX + 3 = count of words transferred per scan (0 to 9999)
4XXXX + 4 = offset value. This value is added to the starting address (4XXXX + 2) for an
effective starting address in extended memory. The same value is also added to the source register
value, for an effective starting address as a source field for the register being transferred to extended
memory. At the end of each transfer, the count of words transferred is added to this value.
4XXXX + 5 = number of registers to be transferred (0 to 9999)

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the value 00001. This value cannot be
changed.

Programming Example
The following example illustrates a network with a XMWT function.

390
 16 – Special Instructions

A block of 1000 4XXXX registers is written in one scan to extended memory. The block starts at
register 41000 and is written to a block starting at register 2000 in file two. The control table,
displayed in the following figure, begins at register 40100. The value, 0002, in register 40101, is the
extended memory file number.
The block of registers is written to the location in extended memory indicated by the value, 2000, in
register 40102.
The value 1000 in register 40103 indicates the number of registers transferred per scan.
Register 40104 contains the offset count that changes throughout the function.
The value 1000 in register 40105 indicates the total number of registers being transferred.
Coil 00001 is energized when the function block is an active and coil 00003 is energized when the
write is complete. Coil 00002 is used to indicate an error.

391
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

XMIT (Transmit)

XMIT (Transmit) Description

The XMIT (Transmit) function block communicates via Modbus from a “master” PLC to multiple
“slave” PLCs or sends ASCII character strings from the PLC’s Modbus slave port 1 or port 2 to
ASCII printers and terminals. Communication is possible over telephone dial-up modems, radio
modems, or a direct serial connection.
XMIT comes with three modes: a communication, port status, and a conversion mode. In the
communications mode the execution of the XMIT block performs general ASCII input functions
including both simple and terminated ASCII. An additional XMIT block may be used for reporting
port status information into registers while another XMIT block performs the ASCII
communication function. Binary data or ASCII may be imported or exported into the PLC and
converted to send to DCE devices per your application’s needs.
The XMIT block contains built-in diagnostics to allow no other active XMIT blocks within the
PLC. This is provided for by the use of a control table; this table controls the communications link
between the PLC and DCE (Data Communication Equipment) devices attached to Modbus port 1
or port 2 of the PLC. The XMIT block doesn’t activate the port LED when it’s transmitting data.
NOTE: The Modbus protocol is a “master/slave” protocol and designed to have only one
master when polling multiple slaves. Therefore, when using the XMIT block in a
network with multiple masters, contention resolution and collision avoidance is your
responsibility and may easily be addressed through ladder logic programming.
NOTE: For more detailed information on the XMIT function block, see Modicon’s XMIT
Function Block User Guide (840 USE 113 00 v3.00).

Communications Block

XMIT Communication Block

The XMIT communication block lets you transmit data directly out of the PLC. You can set the
parity, stop bits, pulse or tone dialing (among other values) just like a modem.

392
 16 – Special Instructions

Inputs Outputs

Top Node Begins operation and should Output goes ON during

remain on until completed operation.
or an error has occurred.
This node must contain the
constant 0001 or 0002 to
select the corresponding
port address.

Middle Node Aborts operation and forces Output goes ON when an

port to “slave” mode; port error is detected or an abort
remains closed so long as has been issued.
input is ON. Abort code
(121) is sent to the fault
status register. The 4x
register is the first in a group
of 16 contiguous holding
registers of the control
block.

Bottom Node Output goes on when block

has completed successfully.
This node must contain a
constant equal to 16, as this
is the number of registers
used.

NOTE: To clear fault register and rest XMIT, the top input node must go off for at least one
scan.

Do not modify the address in the 4xxxx middle node

or delete XMIT from the program while the block is
active. This locks up the communication port,
preventing further communications.

The XMIT instruction block will not operate correctly if:

The NSUP and XMIT loadables are not installed.
The NSUP loadable is installed after the XMIT loadable
The NSUP and XMIT loadables are installed in a Quantum PLC with an out-of-date executive
(older than version 2.10 or 2.12)
Registers in the XMIT control block are as follows:
4x: Revision Number (read only; decimal)
4x+1: Fault Status (read only)
4x+2: (available to user *)
4x+3: Data Rate (50, 75, 110, 134, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 9600, or 19200 bits per second)
4x+4: Data Bits (7, 8)

393
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

4x+5: Parity (0, 1, 2)

4x+6: Stop Bits (0, 1, 2)
4x+7: (available to user *)
4x+8: Command Word (16-digit binary number).
4x+9: Pointer to Message Table (message pointer). Values are limited by the range of 4x registers
configured
4x+10: Length of Message (0 - 512)
4x+11: Response Timeout (0 - 65535 milliseconds)
4x+12: Retry Limit 0-65535
4x+13: Start of Transmission Delay (0 - 65535 milliseconds)
4x+14: End of Transmission Delay (0 - 65535 milliseconds)
4x+15: Current Retry (read only)
NOTE: The XMIT block does not use registers 4x+2 and 4x+7. They are freely available.

XMIT Fault Status (4x+1)

Contains a fault code (read only):

Code Description

1 Modbus exception: Illegal function

2 Modbus exception: Illegal data address

3 Modbus exception: Illegal data value

4 Modbus exception: Slave device failure

5 Modbus exception: Acknowledge

6 Modbus exception: Slave device busy

7 Modbus exception: Negative acknowledge

8 Modbus exception: Memory parity error

9 - 99 Reserved

100 Slave PLC data area cannot equal zero

101 Master PLC data area cannot equal zero

102 Coil (0x) not configured

103 Holding register (4x) not configured

104 Data length cannot equal zero

105 Pointer to message table cannot equal zero

394
 16 – Special Instructions

106 Pointer to message table outside range of configured

holding registers (4x)

107 Transmit message time-out (generated when UART

cannot complete a transmission in 10 seconds or
less. This bypasses the retry counter, activating the
error output on the first error)

108 Undefined error

109 Modem returned ERROR

110 Modem returned NO CARRIER

111 Modem returned NO DIALTONE

112 Modem returned BUSY

113 Invalid LRC checksum from slave PLC

114 Invalid CRC checksum from slave PLC

115 Invalid Modbus function code

116 Modbus response message time-out

117 Modem reply time-out

118 XMIT could not gain access to PLC

communications port #1

119 XMIT could not enable PLC port receiver

120 XMIT could not set PLC UART

121 User issued abort command

122 Top node of XMIT not equal to 1 (#0001)

123 Bottom node of XMIT not equal to 16 (#0016)

124 Undefined internal state

125 Broadcast mode not allowed with this Modbus

function code

126 DCE did not assert CTS

127 Illegal configuration (data rate, data bits, parity, or

stop bits)

128 Unexpected response received from Modbus slave

129 Illegal command word setting

395
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

XMIT Command Word (4x+8)

Each bit of the command word is interpreted as a function or operation to perform. Error 129 in
the Fault Status (4x+1) register will be generated if:
Bits 7 and 8 are on simultaneously
Any two or more of bits 13, 14, 15, or 16 are on simultaneously
Bit 7 is not on when bits 13, 14, 15, or 16 are on
Individual meanings of the bits are as follows:

Bit Description

1 Reserved

2 Enable RTS/CTS control: Set this to 1 when a DCE

connected to the PLC needs hardware handshaking
using RTS/CTS control.
Start of Transmission Delay register (4x+13) keeps
RTS asserted (for X ms) before the message is sent
out of PLC port #1.
End of Transmission Delay register (4x+14) keeps
RTS asserted (for X ms) after the message is sent out
of PLC port #1. When the delay expires, RTS is de-
asserted.

3 - 6 Reserved

7 Enable ASCII string messaging: Set this to 1 when

you want to send ASCII messages out of the PLC.
The XMIT block sends ASCII strings of up to 512
characters.
You program each ASCII message into contiguous 4x
registers on the PLC, two characters per register. Only
use Bit 7 or Bit 8, not both.

8 Enable Modbus messaging: Set this to 1 when you

want to send Modbus messages out of the PLC.
Modbus messages may be in RTU or ASCII. If Data
Bits (4x+4) is 8, the message transmits in Modbus
RTU format; if Data Bits is 7, Modbus ASCII. Only
use Bit 7 or Bit 8, not both.

9 - 12 Reserved

13 Pulse dial modem: Set this to 1 to pulse dial a

telephone number using a Hayes compatible dial-up
modem.
Program the phone number into contiguous 4x

396
 16 – Special Instructions

registers of the PLC, placing a pointer to it in the

Pointer to Message Table register of the XMIT
control table (4x+9) and the length in Length of
Message (4x+10).
Pulse dialed numbers are automatically preceded by
ATDP and with carriage return and line feed
appended. Since the dial message is in ASCII, bit 7
must be ON prior to sending the number.

14 Hang up modem: Set this to 1 to hang up using a

Hayes compatible dial-up modem.
Use ladder logic to turn this bit on. Since the dial
message is in ASCII, bit 7 must be ON prior to
sending the number.
Hang up messages are automatically preceded by
+++AT and with carriage return and line feed
appended.
The XMIT block looks for a correct disconnect
response before indicating a successful completion.

15 Tone dial modem: Set this to 1 to tone dial a

telephone number using a Hayes compatible dial-up
modem.
Program the phone number into contiguous 4x
registers of the PLC, placing a pointer to it in the
Pointer to Message Table register of the XMIT
control table (4x+9) and the length in Length of
Message (4x+10).
Tone dialed numbers are automatically preceded by
ATDT and with carriage return and line feed
appended. Since the dial message is in ASCII, bit 7
must be ON prior to sending the number.

16 Initialize modem: Set this to 1 to initialize a Hayes

compatible dial-up modem.
Program the initialization message into contiguous 4x
registers of the PLC, placing a pointer to it in the
Pointer to Message Table register of the XMIT
control table (4x+9) and the length in Length of
Message (4x+10).
Messages are automatically preceded by AT and with
a carriage return and line feed appended. Since the
initialization message is in ASCII, bit 7 must be on.

397
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

XMIT Message Pointer Word (4x+9)

Pointer to the beginning of a message table.
For ASCII strings, the pointer is the register offset to the first register of the string (each register
holds up to two ASCII characters). Each ASCII string may be up to 512 characters.
For Modbus messages, the pointer is the register offset to the first register (4y in the table below) of
the Modbus definition table. For Modbus function codes 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 15 and 16, the table
must be five registers long; for codes 20 and 21, the table must be six registers.

Modbus Definition Table format

When storing register addresses in the Definition table, the first digit of the register address is
automatically assumed based on the specific field and Modbus function code. For example, a
function code 04 Read Multiple Input Registers command with 100 stored in 4y+3 indicates an
address of 40100 for the Slave PLC data area.

XMIT Port Status Block

The XMIT port status block is a passive block showing the current port status, Modbus slave
activity, ASCII input FIFO, and flow control information that may be used in ladder logic for some
applications. Being a passive block, it does not take, release, or control the PLC port in any manner.

398
 16 – Special Instructions

Inputs Outputs

Top Node Begins operation and should Not used.

remain on until completed
or an error has occurred. In
order to reset the
instruction, this input must
be off for at least one scan.

Middle Node Not used. Output goes ON when an

error is detected or an abort
has been issued. (see below)

Bottom Node Not used. Output goes on when block

has completed successfully.

Do not modify the address in the middle node of the block or

delete it from the program while it is active, as communications
will lock up.

Middle Node Content

The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first in a group of seven (7) contiguous holding
registers that comprise the port status display block, as shown below:

Description Register No Valid

Entries
XMIT Revision Number 4x Read Only
Fault Status 4x +1 Read Only
Slave login status/port 4x +2 Read Only
active status
Slave transaction counter 4x +3 Read Only
Port state 4x +4 Read Only
Input FIFO status bits 4x +5 Read Only
Input FIFO length 4x +6 Read Only

Bottom Node Content

The bottom node must contain a constant equal to (#0007). This is the number of registers used by
the XMIT port status instruction.

399
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

XMIT Conversion Block

The XMIT conversion block converts data into other usable forms based upon your application
needs. The block performs eleven different functions including, but not limited to: ASCII to binary
conversion, integer to ASCII conversion, byte swapping, and ASCII string search. The block
utilizes 4x source blocks and 4x destination blocks.

Inputs Outputs

Top Node Begins operation and should Not used.

remain on until completed
or an error has occurred. In
order to reset the
instruction, this input must
be off for at least one scan.

Middle Node Not used. Output goes ON when an

error is detected or an abort
has been issued. (see below)

Bottom Node Not used. Output goes on when block

has completed successfully.

Top Node Content

The top node must contain a constant (#0000) since conversions do not deal with the PLCs port.
The loadable version does accept 4x registers in the top node, whereas the built in doesn’t.

Don't modify the address in the middle node of the

XMIT block or delete it from the program while it is
active or the function that prevents communications
locks up.

400
 16 – Special Instructions

Middle Node Content

The 4x register entered in the middle node is the first in a group of eight contiguous holding
registers that comprise the control block, as shown below:

Description Register Valid Entries

XMIT Revision Number 4x Read Only
Fault Status 4x +1 Read Only
Available to User 4x +2 0 (May be used as
pointers for
instructions like
TBLK)
Data Conversion Control 4x +3 Refer to the bit
Bits definition table for
4x + 3.
Data Conversion Op-code 4x +4 Refer to the
definition table for
4x + 4.
Source Register 4x +5 4x register (begin
read at High or Low
byte)
Destination Register 4x +6 4x register (begin
read at High or Low
byte)
ASCII String Character 4x +7 Defines the search
Count area

Bottom Node Content

The bottom node must contain a constant equal to (#0008). This is the number of registers used by
the XMIT conversion instruction.

401
17 - Software Loadable Modules
General Description
Software loadable modules are special PLC program instructions available for purchase from
Modicon.
PLC Workshop allows the loading and deleting of the modules into/from online or offline
memory and the editing of programs that already contain software loadable modules.
PLC Workshop supports the software loadable modules described in this chapter. They are
listed below and in the Cross Reference mode, allowing them to be cross referenced by
instruction type.
Name Description
BLKT* Block to Table
CALL
CKSM* Checksum
DMATH Double Precision Math
DRUM Drum Sequencer
EARS
EUCA Engineering Unit Conversion
Alarming
FN10 Custom Loadables
HLTH 984 Health Status

HSBY Hot Standby

ICMP Sequencer Input Compare
MAP3
MATH Math

MBUS Modbus
MRTM Multi-Register Transfer Module
MSTR* Master Block for Modbus Plus Reg
Transfer
PEER Peer to Peer
PID Process Control
PID2* Process Control
TBLK* Table to Block

* Based on the hardware in use, these can also be considered built-in Enhanced Executive
Cartridges. See Enhanced Executive Cartridges for descriptions of these modules.

403
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

CALL

Description
The Call instruction activates an immediate or deferred DX function from a library of functions
defined by function codes. The Copro (Integrated Control Processor) copies the data and function
code into its local memory, processes the data, and copies the results back to controller memory.

Immediate DX Call

Deferred DX Call

404
 17 – Software Loadable Modules

Function Block

Top Node Displays a constant or 4x holding register containing a function

code to be executed. 0 - 999 for user-definable DXs. 500 - 999
system DXs provided by Modicon.

Middle Node Displays a 4x register that is the first in a block of registers to be

passed to the Copro for processing.

Bottom Node Contains number of registers in the block.

405
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

EARS

Description
The EARS loadable function is used in a 984 controller working in conjunction with a man
machine interface (MMI) device that runs a special off-line software package. The controller
monitors a specified group of events for any changes in state and logs change data into a history
table. The data is then removed by the MMI device over Modbus II or Modbus Plus.

Function Block

Top Node State table pointer and history table. Contains the first of 64
consecutive 4x registers. The first two of these registers contain
values that specify the location and size of the current state
table. The remaining two are available for the history table.

Middle Node Implied registers and buffer table.

Bottom Node Contains the number of registers used in the buffer. Valid range
is from 2 - 100.

406
 17 – Software Loadable Modules

EUCA

Description
The Engineering Unit Conversion and Alarming (EUCA) function provides a single ladder logic
instruction for configuring the scaling of raw analog input values and checking the values against
alarm limits.

Function Block

Top Node Contains the alarm status of up to four analog inputs. Use a
4XXXX reference.

Middle Node Contains the control table, which has the raw value, the scaled
value, the engineering unit maximum and minimum, the dead
band, and the alarm limits. Use a 4XXXX reference.

Bottom Node Contains a constant from one to four to select which nibble of
the status register to use.

407
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

FN10

Description
The FN10 custom loadable is used to communicate to the MMC188/40.
To run FN10 in a PLC program, the loadable must be loaded into the PLC Workshop
configuration. Install the FN10.DAT file in your \workshop directory. The file is the actual custom
loadable.
FN10 must be assigned an opcode that will not conflict with other
loadables. When assigning the opcode for FN10 use hex 0x5f.

Function Block

Top Node Control

Middle Node Displays Accumulator, Word, Parameter 2, Quotient,

Parameters, Profile Set, Table, or Output Registers.

Bottom Node Displays subvention number.

Enable Enables the function block when power is applied.

INPUT LINES

First Input Power in

Second Input Unused, Start/Reset, or Move Block.

Third Input Unused.

408
 17 – Software Loadable Modules

OUTPUT LINES

First Output Power Out, Active Out, Ok, or Param1>Param2.

Second Output Unused, Overflow, Carry, Param1=Param2, Done, or Block

moved.

Third Output Unused, Param1<Param2, Not Done, Reset Out, or Ignored

Out.

409
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

HLTH (984 Health Status)

The 984 Health Status (HLTH) function block extends the functionality of the native STAT
instruction by detecting changes in the I/O system and reporting problems only on exception.

FUNCTION BLOCK

Top Node Contains the history matrix, where the initial state of the I/O
system and of the ladder logic checksum is stored. Use a
4XXXX reference.

Middle Node Contains the status table, where appropriate bits are set based
on changes in the I/O system, changes in the logic checksum,
existence of disabled coils, the drops’ lost communication and
retry counters, or determination of negative state of the battery
coil, memory protect switch, or S911 board are stored. Use a
4XXXXX reference.

Bottom Node Contains a constant providing the size of the status table, which
is four times the number of drops plus 3.

410
 17 – Software Loadable Modules

HSBY
The Hot Standby Loadable (HSBY) is a loadable DX function that manages a Hot Standby control
system. This function block must be placed in network 1 of segment 1 in the application logic for
both the primary and standby controllers. This function allows you to program a non-transfer area
in system state RAM. This area protects a serial group of registers in the standby controller from
being modified by the primary controller.

FUNCTION BLOCK

Top Node Contains a 4x holding register used as the HSBY command

register.

Middle Node Contains a 4x register that is the first register in the nontransfer
area in state RAM. The first three registers in the nontransfer
area are special registers: 4x and 4x +1 are the reverse transfer
registers for passing information from the standby to the
primary controller. 4x +2 is the HSBY status register.

Bottom Node Defines the size of the nontransfer area in state RAM. The
nontransfer area must contain at least four registers. If you’re
using a 16-bit processor, the valid range of registers is 4 - 255. If
you’re using a 24-bit processor, the valid range of registers is 4 -
8000.

411
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

MAP3
The MAP3 function block allows the 984 controller to initiate communications with MAP network
nodes.

FUNCTION BLOCK

Top Node Displays the starting register a register containing a function

code to be executed. Use a 4XXXXX reference.

Middle Node Displays a 4x register that is the first in a block of registers to be

passed to the Copro for processing. Use a 4XXXXX reference.

Bottom Node Contains number of registers in the block.

412
 17 – Software Loadable Modules

MBUS
The MBUS loadable function is used with the S975 module to initiate a single transaction with
another device on the Modbus II network. In MBUS transaction, you are able to read or write
discrete or register data.

FUNCTION BLOCK

Top Node Contains the first of seven 4x registers in the MBUS control
block.

Middle Node Contains the first 4x register in a data block to be transmitted or

received in the MBUS transaction.

Bottom Node Contains the number of words reserved for the data block. This
value is entered as a constant. This number does not imply a
data transaction length, but it can restrict the maximum
allowable number of register or discrete references to be read or
written in a transaction.

413
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

MRTM (Multi-Register Transfer Module)

The multi-register transfer module (MRTM) function block is used to transfer blocks of holing
register from the program table to the command block, a group of output registers. To verify each
block transfer, an echo of the data contained in the first holding register is returned to an input
register.

FUNCTION BLOCK

Top Node Displays the first register of the program table. The digit 4 is
assumed as the most significant digit.

Middle Node Displays the first register of the control table. The digit 4 is
assumed as the most significant digit.

Bottom Node Displays the number of register moved from the program table
during each transfer. NNN must be a numerical value from 1 to
127.

INPUT LINES

414
 17 – Software Loadable Modules

PEER

Description
The PEER loadable function is used with the S975 module to initiate identical message transactions
with as many as 16 devices on the ModbusII network at one time. In a PEER transaction, you may
only write register data.

Function Block

Top Node Contains the first of nineteen 4x registers in the PEER control
block.

Middle Node Contains the first 4x register in a data block to be transmitted by

the PEER function.

Bottom Node Contains the number of holding registers to be written starting

with the 4x register defined in the middle node. This value is
entered as a constant. The range for this value is 1 to 249.

415
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

PID

Description
Chose PID to program a PID instruction. Analog loop control provides negative feedback (closed
loop) control of a measured process condition, in order to eliminate error conditions. Please refer
to the Modicon manual for detailed instructions.

Function Block

Top Node Points to a bank of 16 consecutive 4XXXX registers that

provide the constants and variable data required for the
calculation.

Middle Node Points to five 4XXXX registers (that cannot be used elsewhere
in the logic).

Bottom Node Indicates how often (in tenths of seconds) the PID calculation
will be performed. This constant can be from 1 to 255.

416
18 - Enhanced Executive Cartridge Instructions
Enhanced executive cartridge instructions, listed below, are described in this section. Based on the
hardware in use, these instructions could also be considered software loadable modules.
BLKT: Block-to-Table Move
CKSM: Checksum (120, 130, 380, 381, 480, 680, 780)
EMTH: Extended Math
MSTR: Master Block (145, 385, 485, 685, 785)
TBLK: Table-to-Block Move
PID2: PID2 (analog loop control)

Online The program reads whether or not enhanced executive cartridges are
present. If they are present, the enhanced instructions are available in
the Ladder menu.

Offline You must specify YES for enhanced executive cartridges in the PLC
Setup window if you want to program the enhanced instructions. If
you select YES, the enhanced instructions are available in the Ladder
menu. If you select NO, these instructions are not available.

417
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

BLKT (Block-to-Table Move)

Description
The Block-to-Table (BLKT) Move function moves large quantities of holding registers from a
source block to a destination block within a table in one scan of memory.
The source block is fixed. However, the BLKT function uses a movable pointer to indicate the
destination registers, rather than a fixed destination as in the Block Move (BLKM) function.
NOTE: The BLKT move is a powerful operation. If the logic in your program does not
confine the pointer to an appropriate range, all registers in the processor may be
corrupted by the source block. Therefore, remember that the pointer register is not
protected and can be altered by other logic in the program. Be sure that it never contains
a value that specifies a destination outside of the desired range.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it is receiving power, the
information in the source register is moved into a block in the
destination table, as long as the range of destination registers is valid.

Prevent Pointer The middle input, when receiving power, prevents the pointer from
From Increasing increasing. If this line is energized, the next move will involve the
Line same block of registers as the previous move.

Reset Line The bottom input, when receiving power, resets the pointer to zero. If
the top input is also energized, the source is moved to the first block
following the pointer register.

OUTPUT LINES

BLKT Successful The top output passes power when the top input receives power and
Line the move is successful.

418
 18 – Enhanced Executive Cartridge Instructions

CKSM (CHECKSUM)

Description
The Checksum function block is available with the following processors: A130, A131, A141, 351,
385E/D, 480E, 685E, 785E, 984-380, 381, 480, 680, and 780 processors. It provides the following
four types of checksum calculations:
Cyclical redundancy checks (CRC-16) and longitudinal redundancy checks (LRC) are both required
for communication over the Modicon Modbus Industrial Communications System.
Straight checksum is the same as LRC except that a two’s compliment is not performed on the
result.
Binary addition checksum provides a straight 16-bit binary addition of registers without a carry.
You select the type of checksum by turning the select lines ON and OFF. For example, to select an
LRC checksum, turn the Control line ON and the Select 1 and Select 2 lines OFF.
The figure below illustrates a Checksum function block and its components and shows how to
select the checksum type by manipulating the ON/OFF state of the input lines.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The control line, when passing power, activates the Checksum. The
selected calculation will be performed and the result will be stored in
the middle node.

Select 1 and Select These inputs determine the type of checksum to be performed. Figure
2 Lines 16.3 shows how the CKSM function interprets these inputs.

OUTPUT LINEs

Checksum This output passes power for every scan that the checksum is
Successful Line calculated without any detected errors.

Error Line This output passes power when the value in the middle node implied
register is greater than the length specified in the bottom node, or if
the implied register value is zero. This output also turns ON if the
table length is beyond the configured range for 4XXXX holding
registers.

419
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Input Lines

Control Lines Select 1 Select 2 Checksum Types

0 No checksum performed
1 0 0 LRC
1 0 1 Straight checksum
1 1 0 CRC-16
1 1 1 Binary Add checksum
In the above chart, a 1 indicates the input is ON, and a 0 indicates the input is OFF. According to
this chart, if you want to select a straight checksum, turn the Control line and the Select 2 line ON,
and turn the Select 1 line OFF. To select a Binary Add checksum, turn all three inputs ON.
If the Control line is not ON, the checksum is not performed, regardless of the other two inputs.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node, and must be a 4XXXX holding
register. This register is the start of the table of registers that will be
involved in the checksum calculations. The number of registers in the
table is determined by the length value you specify in the bottom
node.

Middle Node The middle node is the destination node and stores the checksum after
calculation. It must be a 4XXXX holding register.

The middle node has an implied register (4XXXX + 1) that contains the number of registers in
the source table that will be involved in the checksum calculation.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains a numerical value that specifies the length
of the block to be involved in the checksum. This constant can range
from 1 to 255.

420
 18 – Enhanced Executive Cartridge Instructions

Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates a network with a CKSM instruction.

When contact 10050 is turned ON, the checksum is performed. Assuming contacts 10060 and
00070 are both OFF, it is the LRC checksum type. The results of the checksum are placed in
holding register 40200, and output coil 00020 is energized.
If the implied register in the middle node (40200) contains a value of 4, the following 4 registers
from the source table are involved in the checksum: 40001, 40002, 40003, and 40004.
If the value in the implied register exceeds the length value specified in the bottom node (10),
output coil 00010 (Error line) is energized.

421
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

EMTH (Extended Math)

Description
The Extended Math (EMTH) function allows you to program 38 different extended math
functions. These extended math functions include: double precision integer addition, subtraction,
multiplication, and division; integer square root and process square root; logarithm and
antilogarithm; and floating point, trigonometric, and other instructions.
Enter the registers to be operated on in the top and middle nodes. Enter the code
that corresponds to the type of math function you want to program in the bottom
node. See Figure 16.4 for a list of the codes and their definitions.

Input Lines and Output Lines

The operation of the inputs and outputs depends on the type of extended math function. See
Figure 16.5 for a chart showing the types of extended math functions, the associated codes, the
types of registers and the inputs and outputs used for each instruction.

Function Block
For all 38 EMTH functions, the nodes operate as follows:

Top Node The top node requires two registers. For some functions, the second
register is not used. However, both must be configured. These can be
3XXXX input or 4XXXX holding registers. You enter the first of the
two registers; the second is implied (the register you enter plus 1).

The only valid functions for 3X registers are square root, process
square root, logarithm, and antilogarithm. See Table 16.5.

Middle Node The middle node requires six registers. For some functions, all six
might not be used. However, all six registers must be configured.
These must be 4XXXX holding registers. You enter the first of the six
registers; the subsequent five are implied.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains a code from 1 to 38, which is entered to
specify the math function. See Figure 16.5 for the codes and their
descriptions.

422
 18 – Enhanced Executive Cartridge Instructions

Code Function Registers Inputs Outputs

1 Integer Addition 4X C1 01,02

2 Integer 4X C1 01,02,03
Subtraction
3 Integer 4X C1 01,02
Multiplication
4 Integer Division 4X C1,C2 01,02,03
6 Process Sq Root 4X, 3X C1 01,02
Code Function Registers Inputs Outputs
8 Antilogarithm 4X, 3X C1 01,02
9 Integer to FP 4X C1 01
Conversion
10 ³ Integer plus FP 4X C1 01
11 Integer minus FP 4X C1 01
12 Integer times FP 4X C1 01
13 Integer divided 4X C1 01
by FP
14 FP minus integer 4X C1 01
15 FP divided by 4X C1 01
Integer
16 Integer/FP 4X C1 01
Comparison
17 FP to Integer 4X C1 01,03
conversion
18 FP Addition 4X C1 01
19 FP Subtraction 4X C1 01
20 FP Multiplication 4X C1 01
21 FP Division 4X C1 01
22 FP Comparison 4X C1 01,02,03
23 FP Square Root 4X C1 01
24 Change Sign 4X C1 01
25 Load value of Pi 4X C1 01
26 Sine in Radians 4X C1 01
27 Cosine in 4X C1 01
Radians
28 Tangent in 4X C1 01

423
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Radians
29 Arcsine in 4X C1 01
Radians
30 Arccosine in 4X C1 01
Radians
31 Arctangent in 4X C1 01
Radians
32 Radians to 4X C1 01
Degrees
33 Degrees to 4X C1 01
Radians
34 FP Raised to 4X C1 01
Integer Power
35 Exponential 4X C1 01
Function
36 Natural Log 4X C1 01
37 Common Log 4X C1 01
38 Report Errors 4X C1 01,02
In this chart, FP = Floating Point
NOTE: For further information, see Modicon’s Enhanced Executive Cartridge User’s Guide
for detailed explanations of the 38 extended math functions.

Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates the double precision addition EMTH function
(code 1).

When contacts 00021 and 00030 (the top input) are turned ON, the EMTH function is performed.
The contents of holding registers 40106 and 40107 are added to the contents of 40155 and 40156.
If an overflow condition occurs, 40157 is set to 1. The result of the addition operation is stored in
holding registers 40158 and 40159.
The top output, coil 00123, is energized if the operation is successful and the top input is ON. The
middle output, coil 00199, is energized if an error condition exists and the top input is ON.
In the top node, 40106 and 40107 hold the first operand.
In the middle node:
40155 and 40156 hold the second operand.
40157 indicates an overflow condition, if set to 1.
40158 and 40159 hold the result of the addition operation.

424
 18 – Enhanced Executive Cartridge Instructions

40160 is implied but not actually used for the double precision addition function.
In the bottom node, code number 1 is entered, indicating a double precision addition operation.

MSTR

Description
The Master Block instruction is available with the A145, 145, AT/MC984, 385E/D, 455, 485E,
685E, 785E, 785L, 984-385, 485, and 685 processors. MSTR is used to program communications
on the MODBUS Plus network. Up to 4 MSTR instructions requiring a data master transaction
path can be active (enabled) within a program at the same time.
Figure 16.6 illustrates an MSTR function block and its components.

INPUT LINES

Control Line When ON, allows the MSTR instruction to be executed (assuming the
Abort line is OFF). The enable line must remain ON until the
communication is completed or an error is returned. If enable is OFF
when the MSTR is processed, all outputs of the MSTR will be turned
OFF.

Abort Line When ON, will terminate an MSTR operation that is active or soon to
be active. The enable line must be ON for the Abort line to have any
effect. When the Abort function is executed, the abort error code is
written to the error status register, the Abort output is turned ON, and
the Complete and Active outputs are turned OFF.

425
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

OUTPUT LINES

Active Line The Active line is ON while the MSTR function is in the process of
executing. It remains on until the function is complete. The Active line
will not go ON for functions that require only one scan.

Error Line The Error line turns ON when the MSTR function is not completed
successfully. An error code is written to the error status register.

Complete Line The Complete line turns ON when the MSTR function is completed
successfully. For single scan functions, the Complete line is turned
ON in the same scan. For multiple scan functions, the Complete line
is turned ON when all processing for the operation is finished. When
the Complete line goes ON, a 0 is written to the error status register.

CONTROL Use the DX Zoom function to view and edit Control Block contents.
BLOCK
To access DX Zoom, click on block and select the View / DX Zoom
menu item or press [Ctrl-D].

The size of the Control Block is operation dependent.

DATA AREA In a Write operation, the Data Area is defined as the area where data is
coming from.

In a Read operation, the Data Area is defined as the area where data is
going.

LENGTH Length refers to the amount of data to be read / written.

426
 18 – Enhanced Executive Cartridge Instructions

PID2

Description
The analog loop control function provides negative feedback (closed loop) control of a measured
process condition. The process variable (PV) is compared to the setpoint (SP). The difference
between the two is called the error (E).
This error is fed into a control calculation. The calculation yields a control value that is used to
adjust the control variable so that the process variable equals the setpoint.
Figure 16.7 shows the PID2 function block and its components.

Input Lines and Output Lines

Please see Modicon’s Enhanced Executive Cartridge User’s Guide for a complete explanation of
the references entered in the top and middle nodes, the input and output lines, and how these
references and lines operate in the calculation. PID2 is a very complicated function that involves
extensive ladder logic. The Modicon manual also contains detailed instructions for programming
the PID2 function.

Function Block

Top Node The top node is the source node and points to a bank of 21
consecutive 4XXXX holding registers. These registers provide the
variable data and constants required to solve the PID2 calculation.

Middle Node The middle node is the destination node and points to a bank of 9
4XXXX holding registers. These registers must not be used elsewhere
in the logic.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains a numerical value that specifies how often
the PID2 calculation should be performed. This value indicates tenths
of seconds. For example, enter 255 if you want the calculation to be
performed every 25.5 seconds.

427
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

TBLK (Table-to-Block Move)

Description
The Table-to-Block (TBLK) Move function moves large quantities of holding registers from a
source block within a table to a destination block in one scan of memory. The destination block is
fixed. However, the TBLK function uses a movable pointer to indicate the source registers, rather
than a fixed source as in the Block Move (BLKM) function.
Figure16.8 illustrates the TBLK function block and its components. An explanation of each of the
components follows.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When it is receiving power, a
block of registers from the source table is moved into the destination
block, as long as the range of registers is valid.

Prevent Pointer The middle input, when receiving power, prevents the pointer from
From Increasing increasing. If this line is energized, the next move will involve the
Line same block of registers as the previous move.

OUTPUT LINES

Reset Line The bottom input, when receiving power, resets the pointer to zero. If
the top input is also energized, the first block in the source table is
moved to the destination block.

Error/Move Not The middle output passes power when the top input receives power
Possible Line and an error condition exists. For example, if the pointer register
indicates a source block that is outside the configured range, the Error
line is energized.

TBLK Successful The top output passes power when the top input receives power and
Line the move is successful.

428
 18 – Enhanced Executive Cartridge Instructions

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The top node is the source node, and must be a 4XXXX holding
register. This register is the start of the block of registers to be
involved in the move. The number of registers in the block is
determined by the length you specify in the bottom node.

Middle Node The middle node is the destination node and contains the pointer
register. It must be a 4XXXX holding register. The destination block
starts with the register immediately following the pointer register
(4XXXX + 1).

The value within the pointer register indicates which block in the source table will be moved. For
example, if the pointer register holds a value of 0, the first block in the source table will be moved.
If the pointer register holds a 1, the second block in the source will be moved. And if the pointer
register holds a value of 2, the third block in the source will be moved, etc.
The registers within the blocks are determined by the top node value and the bottom node value.
For example, if the top node contains register 40011 and the block length specified in the bottom
node is 5, registers 40011 through 40015 comprise the first block, and will be moved when the
pointer value equals 0. Registers 40016 through 40020 comprise the second block, and will be
moved when the pointer value equals 1. Registers 40021 through 40025 comprise the third block,
and will be moved when the pointer value equals 2, etc.
The pointer value will automatically increment by one as each move is performed, unless the
Prevent Pointer from Increasing Line or the Reset line is energized.
Since the pointer register is not protected, it can be changed by other logic in the program.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains a numerical value that specifies the length
of the block to be moved and the length of the destination block. This
constant can range from 1 to 100.

For example, if the source register is 40010 and the length is 10, registers 40010 through 40019 will
be moved into the ten registers of the destination block.

Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates a network with a TBLK function.

429
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

When input 10014 is energized, the top input receives power and the contents of registers 40001
through 40010 are moved into registers 40201 through 40210, assuming the pointer value is 0. The
data is moved all at once. The pointer value increases to 1. Output coil 00033 is energized if the
move is successful. Output 00055 (Error line) remains OFF.
On the next scan, if the top input is still receiving power, the contents of registers 40011 through
40020 are moved into registers 40201 through 40210, and the pointer value increases to 2.
If the pointer value increases so that it points to a range that is beyond configured quantities,
output coil 00055 (Error line) is energized and the pointer register holds its value. Also, whenever
the top input loses power, the TBLK operation stops and the pointer register holds its value.
If contact 10010 is energized (Prevent Pointer from Increasing Line), the pointer value remains the
same and the move involves the same source block, for example, registers 40011 through 40020. As
long as the pointer register holds the same value, each successive move will involve the same block
of source registers.
If contact 00017 (Reset line) is energized, the pointer value is reset to 0, and the source block to be
moved is again registers 40001 through 40010 (first block).

430
19 - Subroutines
JSR (Jump To Subroutine)

Description
The Jump to Subroutine function directs the logic to a specified subroutine, located in the last
segment. The JSR function can appear anywhere in the logic, even within another subroutine. It is
termed “nesting” when a subroutine occurs within another subroutine, and “looping” when a
subroutine calls itself. The 984-80/85 processors allow up to 100 levels of nesting.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top input controls the operation. When this input transitions from
OFF to ON the JSR function is performed and logic jumps to the
target subroutine specified in the top node.

Top Input This output passes power when the Control line is energized, after
Receives Power logic returns from the subroutine. The Top Input Receives Power
Line Line is energized if the Control Line is energized, regardless of
whether or not a target subroutine exists. However, if the target
subroutine does exist, there might be a delay before the Top Input
Receives Power Line is energized, depending on how long it takes to
search for, execute, and return from the subroutine.

OUTPUT LINES

Error Line This output is energized if the JSR is not successful. The JSR is not
successful if the target subroutine does not exist, or if the maximum
number of subroutine nesting levels (100) has been exceeded. In all
other cases, this output is OFF.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

431
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Top Node The top node is the source node. It can either be a constant or a
4XXXX holding register reference with a value between 1 and 255,
inclusive. This node directs logic to the subroutine specified by the top
node value. The JSR top node value should correspond to the LAB
value of the subroutine being jumped to.

Bottom Node The bottom node contains the size value. This size value must be a
constant of 1.

NOTE: The JSR is not successful if the target subroutine does not exist, or if the maximum
number of nesting levels (100) has been exceeded. Although up to 100 levels of nesting
are allowed, it is recommended that no more than three levels of nesting be
programmed. More than three levels of nesting makes programs difficult to understand,
troubleshoot, and support.

Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates a network with a JSR function.

When input 10011 transitions from OFF to ON, the JSR function block receives power and logic is
directed to the subroutine specified by the top node value. The top output passes power and coil
00012 is energized, after logic returns from the subroutine. If the JSR is not successful, the bottom
output passes power and energizes coil 00013.

432
 19 - Subroutines

LAB (Label Subroutine)

Description
The Label function is used to label the starting point of a subroutine. It also functions as a default
return if a Return function has not been programmed into the preceding subroutine network. The
LAB function must be programmed in the first row of the first column of a network in the last
segment.

INPUT LINES

Control Line Because the LAB function must be programmed in row 1, column 1,
the Control line is directly connected to the Power line. Therefore, the
Control line is always energized. When a JSR function calls the
subroutine marked by the LAB, logic starts scanning that subroutine.

OUTPUT LINES

Error Line The only output for the LAB function is the error output. This is
energized if the LAB is encountered by the processor when a JSR has
not been executed (i.e. the subroutine stack is empty). In all other
cases this output is OFF.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Function Block The LAB function block occupies one node in a network. It contains
the LAB symbol and a constant between 1 and 255, inclusive. You can
program up to 255 different subroutines. Each LAB must have a
different number. The LAB number should correspond to the JSR
number that specifies which subroutine is being jumped to.

433
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

RET (Return From Subroutine)

Description
The Return from Subroutine function returns logic to the node immediately after the most recently
executed JSR instruction. The Return function only has effect if it is programmed in a network in
the last segment.

INPUT LINES

Control Line The top and only input, when receiving power, causes the Return
function to be performed. The Return function returns logic from the
subroutine to the node immediately after the most recently executed
JSR.

OUTPUT LINES

Error Line The only output for the RET function is the error output. This is
energized if the RET has been programmed without a subroutine. In
all other cases this output is OFF.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Function Block The RET function occupies one node in a network. It consists of the
RET symbol and a size value. This size value must be a constant of
one.

NOTE: If a subroutine does not contain a RET function, the next LAB function or the end of
logic, whichever comes first, acts as a default return.

434
20 - Miscellaneous Instructions
Instructions for the 351/455 Processors

Description
The information in this section describes the following instructions available for use with 351/455
processors:

Sequencers Allow independent control for repetitive operations.

CONV Converts BCD to binary or binary to BCD in 484 mode.

RTTI Moves the register value to an input table in 484 mode.

RTTO Moves the register value to an output/holding table in 484

mode.

TTR Moves the table value to a series of registers in 484 mode.

The 484 Compatibility Mode

The 484 Compatibility Mode allows sequencers, ADD, MUL, and DIV functions to operate
differently depending upon whether the mode is ON or OFF. If this mode is ON it has the
following effects on the four functions. Figure 18.1 summarizes its effects.
The sequencers are enabled.
An overflow occurs if the result of an ADD function is greater than 999.
The high and low order result of a MUL is separated differently.
The remainder of the DIV function is discarded.

435
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Using Implied References

The references used in the CONV, RTTI, RTTO, and TTR instruction have been modified. These
compatibility references are referred to as implied references. They have been changed to be
compatible with other 984-processor conventions. Figure 18.2 provides the old 484 functions, their
new compatibility counterparts, and how the implied references are applied. The RTTI and RTTO
functions operate as the 484 RTT function.

Old New Implied Implied Implied

484 Compat. Pointer Source Destination
Function Function
CONV CONV N/A Disc. Inputs or N/A* Disc. Outputs or
Holding Register **

RTT RTTI Input Reg. N/A N/A

RTTO Output Reg. N/A N/A

TTR TTR N/A N/A Holding Register

* When using a constant, the source is implied as a discrete input. When using a holding register as
the source, nothing is implied (N/A).
** When using a constant as the source, the destination is implied as holding register. When using a
holding register as the source, the destination is an implied discrete output.
Each implied reference is equal to a 3-digit number. Figure 15.38 shows the relationship.

Implied References Actual Content

0xxxx (Discrete Output) 3-Digit Number
1xxxx (Discrete Input) 3-Digit Number
3xxxx (Input Register) 3-Digit Number
4xxxx (Holding Register) 3-Digit Number

NOTE: Implied Reference Coils are marked as used. However, you cannot search for these
coils as you would for regular coils.

436
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

Sequencers
The sequencers allow independent control for repetitive operations. Sequencers are assigned to
eight specific holding registers (40051-40058), each register corresponding to thirty-two relays. For
example, register 40051 corresponds to 00513-00544 relays, and register 40052 corresponds to
00545-00576 relays. These specific registers can be used in any functions such as counters, timers,
or any arithmetic operations. Refer to Figure 18.4.

Sequencer 484 484 Sequencer 984 Sequencer 984 Sequencer

Number Sequencer Registers Relays Register
Relays
1 2101-2132 4051 00513-00544 40051

2 2201-2232 4052 00545-00576 40052

3 2301-2332 4053 00577-00608 40053

4 2401-2432 4054 00609-00640 40054

5 2501-2532 4055 00641-00672 40055

6 2601-2632 4056 00673-00704 40056

7 2701-2732 4057 00705-00736 40057

8 2801-2832 4058 00737-00768 40058

NOTE: When the 484 Compatibility Mode is set, it allocates these relays as sequencer relays.
When not set, these relays act as normally open relays.
NOTE: When in the 484 mode, the sequencer coils are not mapped to external field devices.
When putting a number in register 40051 to turn on coil 513, only the contacts of the
coil will activate. The coil itself will not turn ON or OFF.

In Figure 18.5, the counter has a preset of 12 and stores its current count in register 40053. Every
time input 10047 is energized, the value in register 40053 is incremented by one. This is equivalent
to moving the stepping switch one position. This example is a 12-step sequencer; 32 steps are
available in all sequencers. The counter limits this circuit to 12 steps, since that is the preset.
Whenever coil 0003 is energized, the counter is reset to zero and the stepping switch goes back to
home (no reference energized) regardless of the current count.

437
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

CONV
The CONV instruction converts either holding registers to discrete outputs or discrete inputs to
holding registers. The CONV can remain binary or changed to BCD. CONV is a two-mode
function block.
Use a constant to represent a reference number. The Search by reference
number online function cannot determine the actual reference number
used.

INPUT LINES

Control In Line When the top node is powered, the CONV function is performed on
every scan. Use a transitional contact to get a single CONV operation.

438
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

RTTI
The RTTI instruction copies the bit pattern of any register or 16 discretes to a specific input
register located within a table. Use a constant to represent a reference number. The system can
accommodate one transfer per scan. RTTI is a two-node function block.
Use a constant to represent a reference number. The Search by Reference Number online function
cannot determine the actual reference number used.
NOTE: The pointer value has a legal range of 801-832, or 1-254. If outside, the function is
NOT performed and the Illegal Pointer value output rail is activated.

439
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

RTTO
The RTTO instruction copies the bit pattern of any register to a specific holding register located
within a table. Use a constant to represent a reference number. The system can accommodate one
transfer per scan. RTTO is a two-node function block.
Use a constant to represent a reference number. The Search by Reference Number online function
cannot determine the actual reference number used.
NOTE: The pointer value has a legal range of 801-832, or 1-254. If outside, the function is
NOT performed and the Illegal Pointer Value output rail is activated.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node Source can be either an input register (3xxxx), or a holding register
(4xxxx).

Bottom Node Pointer is a constant that implies a holding register (4xxxx).

Contains the symbol RTTO and a number specifying Pointer must be a constant indicating a
holding register (4xxxx). The contents of the (4xxxx) points to the destination table, with a valid
range of 1 to 254, or 801 to 832 that corresponds to (40001 to 40254), or (30001 to 30032)
respectively.

INPUT LINES

Control In When the top node is powered, RTTO is performed on every scan.
Use a transitional contact to get a single RTTO operation.

OUTPUT LINES

Copy of Control In Passes power when the top input is powered.

Illegal Pointer Passes power when the Pointer value is outside the allowed range.
Value

440
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

Example

In Figure 18.12, the first transition of 10047 copies 30012 to 40011. The Pointer value remains the
same; it does not increment. On the next scan, if the new value read from 40010 is 7, then the
contents of 30012 is copied to 40007. In order to store to successive locations, you need additional
user logic to increment the pointer each time the RTTO is executed.

441
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

TTR

General Description
The TTR instruction copies the bit pattern of any register located within a table to a specific
holding register. Use a constant to represent a reference number. The system can accommodate one
transfer per scan. TTR is a two-node function block.
Use a constant to represent a reference number. The Search by Reference Number online function
cannot determine the actual reference number used.
NOTE: The pointer value has a legal range of 801-832, or 1-254. If outside, the function is
NOT performed and the Illegal Pointer Value output rail is activated.

INPUT LINES

Control In Line When the top node is powered, TTR is performed on every scan. Use
a transitional contact to get a single TTR operation.

OUTPUT LINES

Copy of Control In Passes power when the top input is powered.

Illegal Pointer Passes power when the Pointer value is outside the allowed range.
Value

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Pointer The Top Node, Pointer, can be either an input register (3xxxx), or a
holding register (4xxxx).

Contains a number specifying a Pointer register. It points to the destination table, with a valid range
of 1 to 254, or 801 to 832 that corresponds to (40001 to 40254), or (30001 to 30032) respectively.

442
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

16-Bit Signed and Unsigned Math Functions

Description
A group of three-node instructions are available to support 16-bit math functions. The structure of
these instructions closely resembles the familiar BCD-based ADD, SUB, MUL, and DIV blocks
available in all models of 984 PLCs.
These instructions can do both signed and unsigned 16-bit math calculations. Two additional
instructions are available to convert to sign floating point values for use in EMTH operations. Their
nodal structure and their block input/output requirements are described on the following pages.

AD16 Signed/unsigned 16-bit addition

SU16 Signed/unsigned 16-bit subtraction

MU16 Signed/unsigned 16-bit multiplication

DV16 Signed/unsigned 16-bit division

TEST Compares the magnitude of two signed/unsigned 16-bit

integers

ITOF Signed/unsigned integer-to-FP conversion

FTOI FP-to-signed/unsigned integer conversion

443
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

AD16 (16-Bit Addition)

Description
AD16 is a three-node instruction that adds the value in the top node to the value in the middle
node and posts the sum in the holding register in the bottom node.

Function Block
The top and middle nodes may contain either:
A constant value up to 65,535
A 3x input register
A 4x holding register
The bottom node contains the 4x holding register where the sum of the 16-bit addition will be
stored.

Output Lines
The bottom output is the overflow flag. It turns ON when the sum is larger or smaller than the
instruction is designed to calculate.

444
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

SU16 (16-Bit Subtraction)

SU16 is a three-node instruction that subtracts the value in the middle node from the value in the
top node and posts the difference in the holding register in the bottom node.

Function Block
The top and middle nodes may contain either:
A constant value up to 65,535
A 3x input register
A 4x holding register
The bottom node contains the 4x holding register where the difference of the 16-bit subtraction
will be stored.

445
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

MU16 (16-Bit Multiplication)

Description
MU16 is a three-node instruction that multiplies the values in the top and middle nodes and posts
the product in two contiguous holding registers. The first register is specified in the bottom node.

Function Block
The top and middle nodes may contain either:
A constant value up to 65,535
A 3x input register
A 4x holding register
The bottom node contains a 4x holding register where the high-order half of the product is stored.
The low-order half of the product is stored in the next contiguous holding register (4x+1) after the
register in the bottom node.

446
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

DV16 (16-Bit Division)

Description
DV16 is a three-node instruction that divides the value in the top node by the value in the middle
node and posts the quotient and remainder in two contiguous holding registers. The first of which
is specified in the bottom node.

Function Block
The top and middle nodes may contain either:
A constant value up to 65,535
A 3x input register
A 4x holding register
The bottom node contains a 4x holding register where the quotient is stored. The remainder of the
divide operation is stored in the next contiguous holding register (4x+1) after the register given in
the bottom node.

Output Lines
The middle output is the overflow flag. It turns ON when the quotient is larger or smaller than the
instruction is designed to calculate.

447
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

TEST (16-Bit Magnitude Comparison)

Description
TEST is a three-node instruction that compares the magnitudes of the values in the top and middle
nodes and describes the relationship via the states of the block outputs.

Function Block
The top and middle nodes may contain either:
A constant value up to 65,535
A 3x input register
A 4x holding register
The bottom node contains a constant value of 1.

448
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

ITOF (Signed/Unsigned Integer-to-Floating Point Conversion)

Description
ITOF is a three-node instruction that converts signed or unsigned integer value in the top node to a
floating point (FP) value and posts that FP value in two contiguous holding registers. The first
register is specified in the middle node.

Function Block
The top and middle nodes may contain either:
A constant value up to 65,535
A 3x input register
A 4x holding register
The middle node is the first of two contiguous 4x holding registers where the converted floating
point value is stored.
The bottom node contains a constant value of 1.

449
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

FTOI (Floating Point-to-Signed/Unsigned Integer Conversion)

Description
FTOI is a three-node instruction that converts the floating point (FP) value in the top node to a
signed or unsigned integer value and posts that integer value in the middle node.

Function Block
The top is the first of two contiguous 4x holding register where the floating point value is stored.
The middle node is a 4x holding register where the converted integer value is stored.
The bottom node contains a constant value of 1.

Output Lines
The bottom output is the overflow flag. It turns ON when the converted integer value is larger or
smaller than the instruction is designed to calculate.

450
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

PCFL

Processor Control Function Library

Description
The Processor Control Function Library (PCFL) is a single 3-node DX block in ladder logic. Like
EMTH, this DX can be used to reference an entire library of functions. PCFL is intended for
continuous process control dealing with analog values. Functions in PCFL are divided into three
major categories:
ƒ Advanced calculations
ƒ Signal processing
ƒ Regulatory control
The following dialog displays the 23 PCFL variants. When a PCFL instruction is used, the specific
variant is described at the top of the instruction in ladder.

451
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Input and Output Lines

The PCFL block accepts one input (top = enable/disable) and produces one of two outputs:
Top = DONE
Bottom = ERROR

Function Block
The body of the function block includes the following:

FUNC Enter the code representing the name of PCFL library function It is
displayed in the top node. The codes are summarized in Summary of
PCFL Functions.

4XXXX Enter the first holding register for parameters for PCFL.

LEN Enter the length of the registers table to process for PCFL. This is
identified in Table 18.23 Summary of PCFL Instructions, the #
Registers column. This value is used to calculate the registers used for
the table and printout. If you change this value the Registers Used
Table may be incorrect.

Summary of PCFL Functions

The table below summarizes the Process Control functions that have been programmed for PCFL
block. An asterisk after the function name denotes that the function is time-dependent. The
translated function code is also listed followed by the number for registers needed by the module
and a short description. When programming a PCFL, these functions are selected from a pick list.
Once in the pick list, pressing the first letter of the function is a quick way to select that function.
(Ex: pressing ‘D’ will place the cursor on DELAY.)

Function Code # Registers Description

Advanced Calculations

AVE 01 24 Average of set of weighted inputs (up to 4).

CALC 02 14 Calculation block for pre-set programmed

formulas.

EQN 03 64 max. Postfix notation calculator for user

programmed equations. Includes four internal
variables that can be set up from other
sections of logic. The length depends upon the
user equation, but is limited to 64 registers
(can be up to 255). See Chapter 16 for a Zoom
Screen example. The formula can be entered

452
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

directly from the Zoom Screen. The total

number of registers used in your equation is
displayed in the Zoom Screen. To optimize
the number of registers used by the controller,
change the bottom node (LEN) of the
function to equal the Registers Used value in
the Zoom Screen.

Signal Processing
ALARM 30 16 Central alarm blocks LL, L, H, HH are
available for Deviation and Process Variable.

AIN 31 14 Interface for input modules. Converts input to

scaled engineering units, including a provision
for process SQRT.

AOUT 32 9 Interface for calculated signals with output

modules by converting an output signal to a
value between 0 and 4095.

DELAY * 33 32 Pure delay for use with time-delay

compensation.

LKUP 34 39 A look-up table for up to eight points.

INTEG * 35 16 Integrate an input at a given interval

LLAG * 36 20 First order lead/lag filter.

LIMIT 37 10 Limiter for process variable, LL, L, H, HH.

LIMV * 38 14 Velocity limiter for process variable changes

for L,H.

39 8 Lets you put an input in either manual or auto

mode.
MODE

RAMP * 41 14 Ramp generator used for set point filtering.

Ramps to a given set point at a constant rate.

RMPLN * 42 16 Logarithmic ramp generator used for set point

filtering. Ramps to a given set point,
approximately 2/3 closer to the set point for
each time constant.

453
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

RATE * 43 14 Derivative over specified time period. For rate

calculations.

SELECT 44 14 High/Low/Average selector.

Regulatory Control
ONOFF 73 14 Two-position deadband. You can specify either
ON or OFF.

PID * 75 44 ISA non-interacting PID.

* time-dependent

454
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

DIOH

Description
The distributed I/O health instruction (DIOH) lets you retrieve health data from a specified group
of drops on the distributed I/O network. It accesses the DIO health status table, where health data
for modules in up to 189 distributed drops is stored.

Function Block
Top Node The source value is a 4 digit constant xxyy where
xx = the decimal value in the range 00 .. 16, indicating the slot number
of the DIO processor
yy = is the decimal value in the range 1..64, indicating the drop
number
Middle Node The 4x register is the first holding register in the destination table.
Bottom Node The integer value entered specified the length or the number of 4x
registers in the destination table.

455
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Instructions for the Micro PLCs

CTIF

Description
The CTIF instruction is a configuration/operation tool for Modicon Micro PLCs that contain
hardware interrupts (all models except the 110CPU311 models). The actual counter/timer and
interrupts are located in the PLC hardware, and the CTIF instruction is what is used to set up this
hardware.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node First word in the CTIF parameter block, with an implied size of four.

Bottom Node Drop number where the operation is performed. Valid values are an
integer constant ranging from 1 to 5.

456
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

SCIF (Sequential Control Interface)

Description
The Sequential Control Interface (SCIF) instruction combines two subfunctions - Drum and ICMP.
Drum mode is used to map a predefined bit pattern to the outputs on the Modicon Micro PLC in a
sequential, step-by-step fashion. ICMP (input compare) mode is used to match inputs coming from
the field devices with a predefined table of patterns for each step of the drum.
Using drum and ICMP together allows the programmer to fire outputs and compare the status of
the inputs against a predefined status. If a mismatch occurs, the process is halted.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node The step pointer

Middle Node The first register in the data step table; the first six registers in the
table are reserved.

Bottom Node The number of application-specific step data registers in the step data
table; the total number of registers in the table is K + 6. K is an
integer in the range of 1 through 255.

457
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

T1MS

Description
Use the T1MS (millisecond timer) instruction to time events or create delays in an application.
T1MS increments at intervals of 1 ms.

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node Timer preset. K is an integer in the range 1 through 999

Middle Node Accumulated time

Bottom Node Always set to a constant value of one

458
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

CONV

Available only on the 984-351 and 984-455

The Convert block is one of four 484-replacement instructions. It is used to convert discrete data
to a holding register or holding register data to discrete data.
The conversion can be either binary-to-binary, BCD-to-binary (discrete to register) or binary-to-
BCD (register to discrete). This block uses 12 bits in and 12 bits out, but if the conversion is
straight binary-to-binary, bits 11 and 12 are forced off.
In converting discretes to a holding register, the source is specified as a constant, which implies a
1xxxx, and the destination is specified as a constant, which implies a 4xxxx (for example, 00049
implies 40049).
In converting a register to output discretes, the source is specified as a holding register (4xxxx) and
the destination is specified as a constant, which implies a 0xxxx. For example, 00032 implies 12
coils starting with 00032.

Care should be taken when converting register data

to discretes as coils may inadvertently be activated.

459
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

RTTI
The Register to Input Table block is one of four 484-replacement instructions. It copies the
contents of an input register or a holding register to another input or holding register. This
destination register is pointed to by the input register implied by the constant in the bottom node.
Only one such operation can be accommodated by the system in each scan.
The pointer is a 3xxxx implied by a constant (i.e. 00018 -> 30018) whose contents indicate the
destination. A value of 1 to 254 indicates a holding register (40001 - 40254) and a value of 801 to
832 indicates an input register (30001 - 30032). If the value is outside this range, the operation is
not performed and the ERROR rail is powered. Note the pointer’s value is NOT incremented
automatically.

460
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

RTTO
The Register to Output Table block is one of four 484-replacement instructions. It copies the
contents of an input register or a holding register to another input or holding register. This
destination register is pointed to by the holding register implied by the constant in the bottom
node. Only one such operation can be accommodated by the system in each scan.
The pointer is a 4xxxx implied by a constant (i.e. 00018 -> 40018) whose contents indicate the
destination. A value of 1 to 254 indicates a holding register (40001 - 40254) and a value of 801 to
832 indicates an input register (30001 - 30032). If the value is outside this range, the operation is
not performed and the ERROR rail is powered. Note that the pointer’s value is NOT incremented
automatically.

461
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

TTR
Available only on the 984-351 and 984-455.
The Table to Register block is one of four 484-replacement instructions.
It copies the contents of a source (input or holding) register to a holding register implied by the
constant in the bottom node. This source register is pointed to by the input or holding register
specified in the top node.
Only one such operation can be accommodated by the system in each scan.
The pointer is a 3xxxx or 4xxxx whose contents indicate the source. A value of 1 to 254 indicates a
holding register (40001 - 40254) and a value of 801 to 832 indicates an input register (30001 -
30032). If the value is outside this range, the operation is not performed and the ERROR rail is
powered.
NOTE: The pointer’s value is NOT incremented automatically.
The destination is a holding register implied by the constant in the bottom node (for example,
00018 -> 40018).

462
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

COMM
Available only on the Micro 311,411,512 and 612 controllers.
The ASCII Communications Function (COMM) block is used to transmit/receive ASCII data (in
the form of a single ASCII character, 1 to 4 integers or 1 to 4 hexadecimal numbers) to or from the
simple ASCII port.

4xxxx+ 0 = Operation Code

4xxxx+ 1 = Error Status
4xxxx+ 2 = Number of data fields provided/expected
4xxxx+ 3 = Number of data fields processed
4xxxx+ 4 = Reserved
4xxxx+ 5 = Port Number (1 for local, 2 for child #1, 3 for child #2, etc.)
4xxxx+ 6 = Reserved
4xxxx+ 7 = Reserved
4xxxx+ 8 = Reserved
4xxxx+ 9 = Active Status Timer

FUNCTION
BLOCK

Top Node Beginning of the control block

Middle Node Write function source or Read function destination

Bottom Node Size of the source/destination table. Valid values are an integer
constant in the range of 1 through 255.

463
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

COMM Operation Codes

Code Operation

1000 Flush Input Buffer in Read Operation

1001 Flush Specified Input Bytes in Read Operation

1002 Control/Monitor RTS, CTS, DSR

1010 Read ASCII Character - NO CR/LF

1020 Read ASCII Character - CR/LF

1031 - 1034 Read 1 to 4 Integers (I1, I2, I3, I4) - NO CR/LF

1041 - 1044 Read 1 to 4 Integers (I1, I2, I3, I4) - CR/LF

1051 - 1054 Read 1 to 4 Hexadecimals (H1, H2, H3, H4) - NO CR/LF

1061 - 1064 Read 1 to 4 Hexadecimals (H1, H2, H3, H4) - CR/LF

1110 Write ASCII Character - NO CR/LF

1120 Write ASCII Character - CR/LF

1131 - 1134 Write 1 to 4 Integers (I1, I2, I3, I4) - NO CR/LF

1141 - 1144 Write 1 to 4 Integers (I1, I2, I3, I4) - CR/LF

1151 - 1154 Write 1 to 4 Hexadecimals (H1, H2, H3, H4) - NO CR/LF

1161 - 1164 Write 1 to 4 Hexadecimals (H1, H2, H3, H4) - CR/LF

464
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

CTIF
The Interrupt/Timer/Counter function is only available on Micro 311, 411, 512 and 612
controllers. The CTIF block is used by a parent PLC to access child functions over an I/O
expansion bus.
The Parent PLC’s function block will complete in the same scan. If multiple blocks exist, the last
one executed will be used.
4xxxx+0 = Error/Operation Type Bit #15 Bit #16
0 0 Set Mode
0 1 Get Mode
4xxxx+1 = Control Register Bit #1 Bit #2
0 0 No Change
0 1 Select Counter Mode
1 0 Select Timer Mode
1 1 No Change
4xxxx+2 = Status Register
4xxxx+3 = Current Count Value of Timer/Counter

NOTE: B: has a value of 1 to 5 that designates the drop number.

465
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

MATH
Each MATH function operates on the contents of the top node registers and places a result in the
middle node registers.

For example, the normal square root uses registers A: (3/4xxxx and 3/4xxxx+1) as an 8 digit
operand and stores the result in B: (4yyyy and 4yyyy+1.) The result storage format is XXXX.XX00
where there are 2 places of precision following an implied decimal point.
Math performs the function indicated by the bottom node (see table).

C: Function Operand Range Result Range

Register Registers Register’s
(A:) (B:)

1 Normal 3/4xxxx 8 4yyyy, xxxx.xx00

3/4xxxx+1 digits 4yyyy+1
2 Process 3/4xxxx 4 4yyyy, xxxx.xx00
digits 4yyyy+1
3 Log (X) 3/4xxxx 8 4yyyy 1 – 7.999
3/4xxxx+1 digits
4 Antilog 3/4xxxx 1– 4yyyy, 8 digits
(X) 7.999 4yyyy+1

In general the higher 4 digits of an 8 digit number are stored in the lower register (4yyyy rather than
4yyyy+1).
NOTE: Log(X) & Anti-Log(X) are both base 10 functions. Process Square Root multiplies the
Square Root of the contents of 3/4xxxx by Square Root(4095) to normalize it for
measurements taken with 12 bit A/D converters.

466
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

DMTH
Double Precision Math performs a double precision addition, subtraction, multiplication, or
division (set by bottom node). Double precision uses 2 registers appended together to form one
OPERAND. Each DMTH instruction operates on the same 2 OPERANDS:
OP1 = 4xxxx, 4xxxx + 1 (A: top node)
OP2 = 4yyyy, 4yyyy + 1 (B: middle node)
As shown below, results, flags, and remainders are stored in the registers following OP2. Registers
not used by the chosen math function may be used for other purposes.
NOTE: For numbers spread over more than one register, the least significant 4 digits are
stored in the highest holding register.
Z Double Precision Functions Result Registers
1 Add (OP1) + (OP2) (4yyyy + 3, 4yyyy + 4)
2 Subtract (OP1) - (OP2) (4yyyy + 2, 4yyyy + 3)
3 Multiply (OP1) * (OP2) (4yyyy + 2, 4yyyy + 3)(4yyyy + 4, 4yyyy + 5)
4 Divide (OP1) \ (OP2) (4yyyy + 2, 4yyyy + 3) quotient(4yyyy + 4, 4yyyy + 5) remainder
NOTE: The Subtract function uses the outputs to indicate the result of comparison between
OPERANDS OP1 and OP2. These outputs and those for add, multiply and divide are
listed in the table below.

467
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

DRUM

NOTE: Ensure the middle node of only one drum of a set of cascaded drums is connected or
multiple counts occur.
The Drum block operates on a table of registers containing 16-bit data values for each step in a
sequence. As the pointer is increased, the data for the step is moved from the table to a second
register. When the top node receives power, a validation check is performed and if it passes, data
moves and mask operations are performed. When the middle node receives power, the step pointer
is incremented to the next step before step data is moved. If the pointer is on the last step then no
action is taken. When the bottom node receives power the step pointer is cleared.

DRUM - Registers
Drums can be cascaded to form drums wider than 16 bits. Drums with the same current step
register (4xxxx) are considered to be cascaded. An output mask allows the user to mask bits of
register data before writing to coils.
Masked Output Data(4yyyy) Contains the result of Step Data (4yyyy+1) masked with the Output
Mask (4yyyy+2).
Current Step Data(4yyyy + 1) Contains data from the current step pointed to by the current step
register 4xxxx.
Output Mask(4yyyy + 2) Contains the mask to be applied to the data for each sequencer step.
Machine ID Number(4yyyy + 3) Used to identify DRUMS belonging to a specific machine
configuration. (must be1-9999).
Profile ID Number(4yyyy + 4) Used to identify what data is currently loaded into the sequencer
(must be 1-9999).
Steps Used(4yyyy + 5) Contains the number of steps for the DRUM. (1-255 16-bit PLC or 1-999
24 bit PLC).
Step Data Table(4yyyy + 6) Table of data beginning at 4yyyy+6 (length is set by the bottom node of
the DRUM block).
ID numbers out of range causes all cascaded drums to not operate.

468
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

ID
Available only on Quantum v2.xx and VME 424/x controllers.
The Interrupt Disable block is used to mask timer and I/O interrupts. When the top input is active,
the system will mask any response to any interrupts generated by the timers or I/O modules.
A - Specifies the interrupt type to be masked. May be a constant 1 to 3:
1. All interrupts masked
2. I/O module interrupts masked
3. Timer interrupts masked

469
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

IE
Available only on Quantum v2.xx and VME 424/x controllers.
The Interrupt Enable block is used to unmask timer and I/O interrupts. When the top input is
active, the system will unmask and respond to any interrupts missed from the timers or I/O
modules.
A: - Specifies the interrupt type to be unmasked. May be a constant 1 to 3:
1 - All interrupts unmasked
2 - I/O module interrupts unmasked
3 - Timer interrupts unmasked

470
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

ITMR
Available only on Quantum v2.xx controllers.
The Interval Timer Interrupt block is used to provide interrupts to asynchronous user logic. This
two-node block allows the user to create a timer that is capable of interrupting the normal scan
cycle to execute the specified logic. The resolution is 1 ms. The interval can be programmed in 1
second, or 1,10, or 100 ms intervals. Up to 16 ITMR blocks can appear in logic.

A: 4xxxx Function Control/Status Register

A: 4xxxx + 1 Timer interrupt Interval

A: 4xxxx + 2 Subroutine Label number (1-1023). This follows the same rules as the JSR block.
B: The timer number. Must be unique for each ITMR block or an error will result.

Bits
1 Execution delayed due to interrupt mask 12, 13 00 – 1 ms counting
2 Invalid block in Sub 01 – 10 ms counting
3 Not Used 10 – 100 ms counting
4 Time = 0 11 – 1 sec counting
5 Mask Interrupt Overrun 14 0 – PLC stop resets counter
6 Execution Overrun 1 – PLC stop holds counter
7 No Label of Invalid Label 15 0 – Enable low resets counter
8 Timer number used in previous network 1 – Enable low holds counter
9, 10 Reserved 16 0 – Function disabled
11 Not used 1 – Function enabled

471
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

IMIO
Available only on Quantum v2.xx controllers.
The Immediate I/O block is used to access specified modules from within logic, as opposed to
regular processing, which occurs at the beginning (inputs) or end (outputs) of logic solving for the
segment.
A: 4x Module slot in Local drop. High byte = Rack; Low byte = Slot.
A: 4x +1 Error Status:
• 2001: Invalid operation type
• 2002: Invalid slot (module not defined)
• 2003: Module not bi-directional
• F001: Module not in healthy state

B: This is the function to perform:

1 – Input: Transfer data from module to state RAM
2 – Output: Transfer date from state RAM to module
3 – Bi_Dir: Allows both Input and Output for bi-directional modules

472
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

BMDI
Available only on Quantum v2.xx controllers.
The BMDI block is used to do a block move between normal logic and an interrupt subroutine. It
allows the user to mask both timer and I/O interrupts for the move and then unmask them.
If you have used the ID function prior to BMDI, those
interrupts are re-enabled once the BMDI is completed.

473
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

VMER
Available only on the Quantum VME-424/X controller.
The VME Read block allows the user to read data from devices on the VME bus.
A: The first of five control 4x registers.
A: 4xxxxVME Address modifier code (39, 3A, 3D, 3E, 29 or 2D)
4xxxx+1 to 4xxxx+4: The VME Control block.
B: A pointer to the first destination 4x register.
C: A constant specifying the number of destination registers to which data is transferred. This can
be from 1 to 255.
If Byte Swap is active, the high byte is exchanged with the low byte of a word after it is read from
the VME bus. If Word Swap is enabled, the upper word is exchanged with the lower word of a
double after it is read. An error will occur if both inputs are enabled at once.

ACTIVE: Passes power when the top input receives power.

ERROR: Passes power when an error occurs.
COMPLETE: Passes power when the read complete.

474
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

VMEW
Available only on the Quantum VME-424/X controller.
The VME Write block allows the user to write data to devices on the VME bus.
A: The first of five control registers.
High byte: VME Address modifier code (39, 3A, 3D, 3E, 29 or 2D).
Low byte: Data bus size.
4xxxx+1 to 4xxxx+4: The VME Control block.
B: A pointer to the first source register 3x/4x.
C: A constant specifying the number of data source registers to be transferred to the VME bus. (1-
255 is valid)
If BYTE SWAP is active, the high byte is exchanged with the low byte of a word before it is written
to the VME bus. If WORD SWAP is active, the upper word is exchanged with the lower word of a
double before it is written. An error will occur if both inputs are enabled at once.

ACTIVE: Passes power when the top input receives power.

ERROR: Passes power when an error occurs.
COMPLETE: Passes power when the write is complete.

475
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

SWAP
Available only on the Quantum VME-424/X controller.
The SWAP block allows the user to issue one of three different swap commands:
1. Swap high and low bits of a 16-bit word.
2. Swap high and low words of a 32-bit double word.
3. Swap (reverse) bits within a register’s low byte.

A: Contains a constant from 1 to 3, specifying what type of swap to perform (see the above list)
B: Contains the register 3x/4x on which the swap is to be performed
C: Contains a constant that indicates how many registers are to be swapped, starting with the source
register
ACTIVE: Passes power when the top input receives power
ERROR: Passes power when an error occurs
COMPLETE: Passes power when complete

476
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

IMOD
IMOD Interrupt Module Vectors:

Provides Interrupt vectoring to subroutines from a module

in the given slot of the PLC backplane, (e.g. 140 HLI 340 00).

TOP NODE (number 1-16)

Slot number in PLC backplane that has the interrupt
module. PLC gives error if slot is same as PLC slot.
(Note that Modsoft does not limit this entry).
MIDDLE NODE (4xxxx)
The first 4xxxx control register contains the function
Status: Bit 16 (lsb) 1=enabled; bits 15-9=unused;
bit 8=Error, slot nbr used in another network;
bit 7=Error, max nbr interrupts defined in module;
(see module info for defining interrupts).
bit 6=Error, intp. lost due to edit user logic;
bit 5=Error, module unhealthy
bit 4=Error, Interrupt lost because of comm error on the backplane
bit 3=Error, Slot nbr entered is same as PLC’s slot nbr
bits 2-1(msb)=unused.
4xxxx+1=State of inputs 1-16 at time of interrupt.
4xxxx+2=Reserved for future use.
4xxxx+3 to 4xxxx+3+bottom node number:
bits 1-5=interrupt line status (see zoom screen);
bit 6=unused;

477
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

bits 7-16: Subroutine LAB number (0-1023);

Value of zero (0), means interrupt ignored.
BOTTOM NODE (number 1-16)
Highest interrupt line to use. Maximum nbr of interrupts that
come from the module. Sets implied 4xxxx range, (see above).

478
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

ICMP
The Input Compare compares bit for bit the feedback data of live inputs to the expected status of
each point in its table.
When the top input receives power, a validation check is performed and if it passes data moves and
mask operations are performed. When the middle input receives power, it tells the function all
previous ICMP’s were all good.
A value of zero in the ID numbers causes the error output to energize. A value > 9999 in Machine
ID or Profile ID cause an error. A value > bottom constant in the Steps used register also cause an
error.

479
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

NEQN
The Network Equation allows a complex equation using algebraic notation. The instruction NEQN
that represents the equation must be placed at row 0 column 1. Specific logic can accompany this
instruction, which uses one full ladder logic network. The NEQN is standard in Quantum PLCs
with Executive 2.0 or greater; unavailable in earlier Quantums and for other PLC types.

Input:
NEQN has one control input (to the top row), which is used to enable or disable the equation. The
input may be a normally open (N.O.) contact, a normally closed (N.C.) contact, a horizontal short,
or an open.

Outputs:
The outputs are coils in the NEQN. The row in determines their meanings. When the NEQN
passes power to the output:
On the top row, the equation has completed successfully without an error.
On the second row, the equation has completed successfully and the result is less than zero.
On the third row, the equation has completed successfully and the result is equal to zero.
On the fourth row, the equation has completed successfully and the result is greater than zero.
On the fifth row, the data in the equation has caused a calculation error.

Equation Content:
The content of the Equation Network is in the form:
result: = algebraic expression
Where:

480
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

The result is a variable contained in one or two 4x registers-it may be a signed or unsigned 16-bit
short integer, a signed or unsigned 32-bit long integer, or a floating point number.
The algebraic expression is a syntactically correct construction of variable and/or constant data,
standard algebraic operators, and/or functions; parentheses can be used to define the order in
which the expression is evaluated and to indicate arguments to functions within the expression.
If the fifth output goes ON, it indicates an error condition. One of the following messages will
appear at the bottom of the Equation Network instruction:

Error Message Meaning

Invalid Op. An internal error generated by the
math coprocessor.
Overflow A value is too large to be
represented in its specified data
type.
Underflow (For floating point data only.) A
number is too small to be
represented in FP format.
Divide by 0 The variable, constant, or result
of a function directly to the right
of a “/” operator has a value of
zero.
Invalid operation with Boolean Occurs when a Boolean value is
Data entered in an argument to a
function.

Data Type Suffix Applies to

Boolean (binary) B Constants, 1x, or 0x
Unsigned short integer U Constants, 3x, or 4x
Signed short integer S Constants, 3x, or 4x
Signed long integer L Constants, 3x, or 4x
Unsigned long integer UL Constants, 3x, or 4x
Floating point number F Constants, 3x, or 4x

When entering a 0x or 1x reference as a discrete variable the reference is assumed to be Boolean

and you do not need to append the suffix B.
When entering a 3x or 4x register in NEQN the following rules apply:
If you enter a register without a suffix, it is assumed to represent a signed 16-bit integer variable.
The suffix B cannot be appended to a 3x or 4x register entry.

481
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Algebraic Operators:
Operation Operator Symbol Description
Groupings
Unary - Negation
Unary - One’s complement
Exponent ** Exponentiation
Multiply * Multiplication
Multiply / Division
Addition + Addition
Addition - Subtraction
Logical Bitwise && AND
Logical Bitwise | OR
Logical Bitwise << Left shift
Logical Bitwise >> Right shift
Logical Bitwise ^ XOR
Relational < Less than
Relational <= Less than or equal to
Relational = Equal
Relational <> Not equal
Relational >= Greater than or equal
to
Relational > Greater than
Conditional ?x:y Then x Else y
(required after a
relational (If)
argument)
Assignment := Placed between the
result and the
expression in an
Equation Network;
indicates that the
value of the
expression is copied
into the result
variable

482
 20 – Miscellaneous Instructions

The following functions are recognized in an Equation Network:

Function Name Meaning

ABS Absolute value
ARCCOS Arc cosine
ARCSIN Arc sine
ARCTAN Arc tangent
COS Cosine
COSD Cosine of degrees
EXP Exponent function (power of e)
FIX Converts floating point to integer
FLOAT Converts integer to floating point
LN Natural logarithm (base e)
LOG Common logarithm (base 10)
SIN Sine of radians
SIND Sine of degrees
SORT Square root
TAN Tangent of radians
TAND Tangent of degrees

Data Type Words Consumed Valid Range of

Values
Boolean One 0, 1
Signed 16-bit One -32,768...+32,767
constant
Unsigned 16-bit One 0...65,535
constant
Signed long (32-bit) Two -2xE9...+2xE9
constant
Unsigned long (32- Two 0...4,294,967,295
bit constant
Floating Point Two 8.43x10-37 <= |x|
constant <= 3,402x1038

483
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Entering Constant Data in an Equation Network:

A constant is prefaced with a # sign and appended with a data-type suffix. All constant values are in
decimal format-hexadecimal values are not allowed.
If a constant is entered in an Equation Network without an appended suffix, it is assumed to be a
signed short integer.
A Boolean constant must have the suffix B appended to it. The only two valid Boolean constants
are #OB and #1B; no other values are legal Boolean constants.

484
21 - FTLogger/FTTrend
FTLogger Overview
FTLogger collects data from multiple PLC devices and records it in to selected database files.
FTLogger accesses the devices through FasTrak or OPC Data Access (Version 2.05 and below)
communication servers. Addresses are entered in a spreadsheet format with up to 30,000 addresses
per log window. Data is logged based on a specific time frame, deadband, or event.

FTTrend Overview
FTTrend is an application that enables graphical trending of real-time and logged data from
multiple devices. A data trend is illustrated by graphing a series of data values collected for a data
point over a period of time. A line connects the values to each other. The real-time access to
devices is handled through FasTrak or OPC Data Access (Version 2.05 and below) communication
servers and the logged data comes from a Microsoft Access or SQL database file created by
FTLogger or FTTrend.

485
22 - Auditing
Activity Audit
The Activity Audit contains records that list programming and setting changes made by users while
running WorkShop. These records contain:
The date and time the activity occurred
A general description of the activity
The machine name of the computer on which the activity occurred
When available, the name of the user who performed the activity

Examples of particular Audit activities that may be recorded in the Activity Audit file include:
Each time PLC WorkShop attaches online to a PLC
Whenever logic is changed in the ladder program
PLC memory configuration is modified

Activity Audits can be written to Microsoft Access files, Structured Query Language (SQL) files or
the Windows Activity Log (when the FT Security Server is running on an accessible computer).
For more on the FT Security Server, please see Chapter 5 of this manual.
Activity Audits written to Microsoft Access and SQL files may be read with many popular viewers.
Audits written to the Windows Activity Logs may be read with the Windows Event Viewer,
which is found in the Windows NT/2000/XP Administrative Tools menu.
The Activity Audit feature may be used in conjunction with Password Security but can also be used
independently.

Setup
Select the Options / Activity Audit Setup menu item as illustrated below to setup the activity
audit.

If security is not enabled, the Activity Audit Setup option is not protected and any user can access
this feature.

487
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

When security is enabled, WorkShop determines under which operating system it is running. If
WorkShop is running under Windows 95/98/ME, the Password Required dialog appears.

This dialog verifies the entered Name and Password are those of an administrator. Only an
Administrator is allowed to edit / enable audits when security is enabled.

488
INDEX
484 mode ......................................................... 289 Compatibility ....................................................... 2
911 Status ......................................................... 171 Configuration.................................................. 240
984 State ........................................................... 170 Configuration Extensions ............ 129, 133, 148
984 Status ......................................................... 173 configurator............................................. 124, 487
Address Documentation ................................. 18 Configuring the TCP/IP Extension ........... 156
Addresses ................................................ 129, 220 Connecting to PLC ...........................................17
administrator ................................................... 122 Control ............................................................. 233
Animation Editor ........................................... 261 Controller State .............................................. 169
ASCII Input..................................................... 133 Controller Status ............................................ 172
ASCII Message Editor ................................... 210 CONV ............................................................. 435
ASCII Message Status .................................... 179 Copy ........................................5, 13, 15, 210, 221
ASCII Output ................................................. 133 Counters ......................................... 346, 410, 437
ASCII Ports ........................... 129, 133, 138, 148 Creating
audit .................................................................. 487 New Program ........................ 11, 13, 241, 129
audit trail ................................................. 113, 487 Cross Reference ........................ 13, 34, 233, 240
audits........................................................ 117, 124 Cursor Type .......................................................16
authentication .................................................. 105 Customer Support............................................... 1
Battery Coil ...................................................... 133 Cut ................................................. 2, 13, 197, 221
BLKT ............................................................... 403 Data format .................................... 210, 220, 232
branch ................................................................. 51 Data Link......................................................... 105
Cable A Errors ................................................ 187 Data Protection .............................................. 148
Cable B Errors ................................................ 189 Data Window ........................... 2, 13, 51, 52, 220
Call instruction ................................................ 404 DCOM ............................................................. 118
centralized security ................................ 122, 124 DCP Drop ID ................................................ 133
centralized security server ............................. 118 Debug .............................................................. 237
Changing PLC Types ..................................... 130 Delete ....................................................... 198, 221
Channels........................................................... 133 DIO Health ..................................................... 195
CKSM ............................................................... 403 Disabling data ................................................. 226
Clear ................................................. 210, 221, 240 Discrete Inputs ............................................... 133
Clearing Memory ............................................ 240 Discrete Outputs ............................................ 133
Coils ......................................................... 210, 270 Documentation ........................................ 16, 240
Column...................................................... 51, 223 Documentation Window .......................... 13, 16
Communication Status .................................. 183 Domains .......................................................... 115
Communications Cable ..................................... 7 Drop Communication Errors ...................... 193

489
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Duplicate Coils................................................ 270 I/O Scanner Transaction.............................. 159

DX Modules .................................................... 133 Import Program ................................................11
EARS ................................................................ 403 Importing Documentation ..............................23
Edit Input Registers ............................................... 133
Cut .................................................................... 2 Insert ........................15, 198, 201, 210, 221, 223
Logic Editor ..................................... 51, 52, 53 Installation ..................................................... 5, 11
New Network ............................................... 54 Instruction ......................... 12, 15, 133, 197, 200
New Row ....................................................... 54 Instruction Bar .................................. 12, 15, 201
Paste ................................................................. 2 IP Address ..........................................................94
Paste with Rewire............................... 197, 221 Keyboard ....................... 138, 197, 200, 201, 221
Logic Programs...........13, 197, 210, 221, 241 Label ....................................................................25
EEPROM ........................................................ 131 Ladder .................................................................34
EMTH ..................................................... 422, 451 Ladder Editor ................................................. 200
Enabling data .................................................. 227 Load Program Offline .........................32, 34, 89
End of Logic Pointer ..................................... 177 Loadables................................................. 129, 164
Enter and Validate............................................ 13 Logger .............................................................. 485
EPROM ........................................................... 131 Logic Programs
Error Log ......................................................... 105 Creating ..........................................................13
EUCA ............................................................... 403 Debugging ................................................... 238
Exporting ........................................................... 11 documenting ............................................... 240
Exporting Documentation .............................. 25 Programming ............ 197, 221, 226, 233, 240
Fast PLC Connection ......................... 17, 18, 97 Saving ..............................................................13
Fast PLC Setup .................................... 18, 89, 97 Logic Status ..................................................... 239
Find Logic......................................... 13, 215, 216 Logical AND Function ................................. 314
Flash RAM....................................................... 131 Logical Complement ..................................... 320
Floating .............................................................. 16 Login ................................................................ 237
FN10................................................................. 403 Logout.............................................................. 237
Format .............................................................. 220 Machine Configuration ................................. 168
FTLogger ......................................................... 485 MAP3 ............................................................... 403
FTTrend ........................................................... 485 Maximum Messages ....................................... 133
Global Errors .................................................. 191 MBUS .............................................................. 403
groups ...................................................... 115, 124 Menu Bar ..................................................... 12, 13
Holding Registers ........................................... 133 Merge Program Choice Dialog .......................56
Hot keys ........................................................... 202 Merge Program Procedure ..............................54
HSBY................................................................ 403 MMS ETHERNET ....................................... 157

490
 Index

Modbus Ports ................................. 129, 133, 139 Powerflow ....................................................... 197

Mode ................................................................. 240 Print
Module Health ................................................ 182 Page Setup ......................................................89
Modules ............................................................ 144 Cross Reference .......................................... 233
Mouse ......................................... 2, 197, 200, 201 Printer Setup ..................................................99
MOVE....................................................... 44, 201 Printing Logic ................................................34
MSTR ............................................................... 403 Printer Setup ............................................... 89, 99
Network .................................................. 200, 222 Processor Status ............................................. 236
Network Communications.............................. 93 Program Setup ......................................2, 89, 241
Network Headers ........................................... 241 Program Windows ............................................15
Network Scan .................................................... 96 Programming
New Network.................................................... 54 Offline ......................... 16, 197, 226, 233, 240
New Program .................................................. 129 Online ................................... 16, 197, 233, 240
Normally Open Contacts .............................. 239 Quantum Hot Standby .................................. 154
NOT ........................................................ 2, 32, 95 Quantum VME Bus Configuration
Extension .................................................... 153
Number Lock .................................................... 16
RAM ................................................................. 131
Number of Segments ..................................... 176
Remote I/O Timeout.................................... 178
Open ...................................................... 32, 34, 89
Replace Table.....................................................46
Optimize .......................................................... 237
Row ........................................... 13, 201, 210, 223
Page Setup ......................................................... 89
RTTI ................................................................ 435
Password ................................................. 105, 122
RTTO .............................................................. 435
Password Security .................................. 105, 113
Run Mode................................................ 237, 240
Paste ........................................ 2, 13, 15, 197, 221
Run Status ....................................................... 180
Paste with Rewire .................................. 197, 221
S901 Status ...................................................... 174
PCFL ....................................................... 232, 451
S908 Error ....................................................... 185
Peer Cop .......................................................... 148
S980 Station Address..................................... 148
PEER................................................................ 415
SA85 board CONFIG.SYS file ......................93
PID ................................................................... 416
Save Program As ............................................ 240
PID2 ................................................................. 403
Save Program As Offline .................................32
PLC Clock and Calendar ............................... 133
Saving ......................................................... 13, 221
PLC Configuration ............... 133, 139, 148, 240
Saving Logic Programs.....................................32
PLC Operations .............................................. 237
Searching for an Address .............................. 248
PLC Type Setup..................................... 129, 133
Security 105, 113, 115, 117, 118, 122, 124, 487
PLC Types ....................................................... 130
Security Congifuration .................................. 122
Pop .................................................................... 223

491
PLC WorkShop for Modicon

Segment ............................................................ 198 Terminal Modem ..............................................91

Segment Headers ............................................ 241 TEST .......................................333, 346, 361, 367
Segment Scheduler ......................................... 198 Timer Register ................................................ 133
Selection ........................................................... 198 Timers ...................................................... 198, 437
Sequencers .............................................. 281, 435 Title Bar ..................................................... 12, 197
Server ................................................................ 113 Toolbar ...................2, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 30, 31,
Set Clock ................................................. 129, 165 197, 200, 214, 226, 233
Setup Total Config. Ext. Words ..................... 133, 148
Communications .......................................... 93 Total Logic Words ......................................... 133
PLC Type............................................ 129, 133 Total Message Words .................................... 133
Printer.......................................................89, 99 Total TCOP Words ....................................... 133
Program ................................................ 89, 241 Trace Coil ........................................................ 218
Share Address Documentation ...................... 18 Transfer Offline Program to Online..............22
SKIP ................................................................. 133 Trend................................................................ 485
Square D .......................................................... 144 TTR .................................................................. 435
Status Line ....................................12, 13, 16, 201 Undo ...................................................................50
Status Pointer .................................................. 181 Users ........................................................ 115, 124
Stop Code ........................................................ 175 Using the ASCII Message Editor ................ 210
SubNet Mask ..................................................... 94 Using the Logic Editor........................51, 52, 53
Support ................................................................. 1 Validate and Enter Logic ............. 197, 226, 233
SY/MAX ......................................................... 144 Watchdog Timer ............................................ 133
SY/MAX Configuration Extension ............ 157 Workgroup ...................................................... 115
Symbols ................................ 18, 31, 34, 233, 240 Zoom
Table Update ................................................... 233 PCFL Instruction EQN Function .......... 232
TBLK ............................................................... 403 variable......................................................... 231
Technical Support .............................................. 1 Zoomable Instructions.................................. 230

492